OPERATION GUIDE

FS-1100
FS-C2026MFP/FS-C2126MFP
FS-1300D

Introduction
Thank you for your purchase of FS-C2026MFP/FS-C2126MFP.
This Operation Guide is intended to help you operate the machine correctly, perform routine maintenance and
take a simple troubleshooting action as necessary, so that you can always use the machine in good condition.
Please read this Operation Guide before you start using the machine.
We recommend the use of our own brand supplies. We will not be liable for any damage caused by the use of
third party supplies in this machine.
A label shown in the illustration assures that the supplies are our own brand.

Included Guides
The following guides are supplied with the machine. Refer to them as necessary.
Quick Installation Guide
Describes the procedures for installation of the machine, frequently-used operations, routine maintenance, and
troubleshooting action.
Safety Guide
Provides safety and cautionary information for the installation and use of the machine. Be sure to read this guide
before using the machine.
Safety Guide (FS-C2026MFP/FS-2126MFP)
Describes the machine installation space, cautionary space, and other information. Be sure to read this guide
before using the machine.
CD-ROM (Product Library)
Operation Guide (This Guide)
Describes how to load paper, basic copy, print and scan operations, and troubleshooting.

Fax Operation Guide
KYOCERA COMMAND CENTER Operation Guide
Printer Driver Operation Guide
Network FAX Driver Operation Guide
KM-NET for Direct Printing Operation Guide
KMnet Viewer User Guide
PRESCRIBE Commands Technical Reference
PRESCRIBE Commands Command Reference

Safety Conventions in This Guide
The sections of this guide and parts of the machine marked with symbols are safety warnings meant to protect
the user, other individuals and surrounding objects, and ensure correct and safe usage of the machine. The
symbols and their meanings are indicated below.

WARNING: Indicates that serious injury or even death may result from insufficient attention to or
incorrect compliance with the related points.

CAUTION: Indicates that personal injury or mechanical damage may result from insufficient attention
to or incorrect compliance with the related points.

Symbols
The U symbol indicates that the related section includes safety warnings. Specific points of attention are
indicated inside the symbol.

.... [General warning]

.... [Warning of danger of electrical shock]

.... [Warning of high temperature]

The symbol indicates that the related section includes information on prohibited actions. Specifics of the
prohibited action are indicated inside the symbol.

.... [Warning of prohibited action]

.... [Disassembly prohibited]

The z symbol indicates that the related section includes information on actions which must be performed.
Specifics of the required action are indicated inside the symbol.

.... [Alert of required action]

.... [Remove the power plug from the outlet]

[Always connect the machine to an outlet with a ground
....
connection]

Please contact your service representative to order a replacement if the safety warnings in this Operation Guide
are illegible or if the guide itself is missing (fee required).

NOTE: An original which resembles a bank note closely may not be copied properly in some rare cases
because this machine is equipped with a counterfeiting prevention function.

i

Contents

Contents
Quick Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v
Menu Map. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii
Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxi
Laser Safety (Europe) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiv
SAFETY OF LASER BEAM (USA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxv
Safety Instructions Regarding the Disconnection of Power (USA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvii
Legal Restriction on Copying/Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxix
Legal and Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxi

1 Part Names
Operation Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

2 Preparation before Use
Check bundled items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Determining the Connection Method and Preparing Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Connecting Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Power On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Sleep and Auto Sleep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Switching the Language for Display [Language] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Setting Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Network Setup (LAN Cable Connection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Installing Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
COMMAND CENTER (Settings for E-mail) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Sending E-mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Loading Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Loading Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
Installing Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47

3 Basic Operation
Login/Logout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
One-Touch Keys and Program Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Message Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Printing - Printing from Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Sending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Preparation for sending a document to a PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Confirm Destination Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Specifying Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Scanning using TWAIN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
Canceling Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
Checking Remaining Toner and Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51

4 Copying Functions
Original Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Paper Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Original Orientation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
EcoPrint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Combine Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Continuous Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14

ii

Contents

Job Finish Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
File Name Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Print Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Color Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Color Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Sharpness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Background Density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Saturation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25

5 Sending Functions
Original Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Sending Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Duplex Sending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Original Orientation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
File Separation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Original Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Adjusting Density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Scan Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Color / Grayscale / Black and White Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Continuous Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
File Name Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Subject and Body Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Sharpness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Background Density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
WSD Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Job Finish Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
FTP Encrypted TX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Scanning Image using Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
About Color Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31

6 Document Box
Printing Documents Stored in USB Memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Saving Documents to USB Memory (Scan to USB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Removing USB Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Printing from a Job Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

7 Status / Job Cancel
Checking Job Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Checking Job History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Sending the Job Log History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Pause and Resumption of Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Canceling of Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Device/Communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19

8 Default Setting (System Menu)
Common Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Copy Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-62
Sending Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-70
Document Box Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-74
Printer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-79
Printing Reports/Sending Notice. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-95
Adjustment/Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-101

iii

Contents

Date/Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-117
Editing Destination (Address Book/Adding One-Touch Keys) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-133
Restarting the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-148
Network Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-149
Network Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-160
Interface Block Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-168
Security Level (Security Level setting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-173
Optional Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-174

9 Maintenance
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Toner Container Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Replacing the Waste Toner Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

10 Troubleshooting
Solving Malfunctions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Responding to Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Responding to an ATTENTION Indicator Flashes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Clearing Paper Jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16

11 Management
User Login Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Job Accounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
Checking the Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-33

Appendix
Optional Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix-2
Character Entry Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix-7
Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix-11
Color balance adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix-21
Sharpness adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix-22
Color saturation adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix-22
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix-23
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix-28

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Index-1

iv

Quick Guide Be sure to read Legal and Safety Information
before using this machine.

Administrator tasks

To make copies To print
Simply press the Start key to make You can print via a network or print
copies. You can also fine tune the a PDF file directly from USB
It copies. It prints.
copy settings by changing the memory.
paper size, adjusting the density,
etc.

Copying with Printing Documents Print
What specific Stored in Removable via a
you want settings USB Memory network
to do

Connecting Cables

Network Setup
(LAN Cable Connection)

Install the printer
driver on your
computer *1
Setup

Loading Paper...2-26

Placing Originals on
the Platen...2-44

Printing Printing -
Copying Functions Documents Stored Printing from
Operation
...4-1 in USB Memory Applications
... 6-2 ...3-22

*1: For more information, refer to the Printer Driver User Guide.

v

Administrator tasks

To send documents
You can send scanned images via a network. Or, you can also store scanned images in
USB memory.
It sends.

Send Send to Saving
What as Folder Documents to
you want E-mail (SMB) USB Memory
to do

Connecting Cables

Network Setup (LAN Cable Connection) Plug the USB
memory

Create a shared folder on the destination
computer. ...3-32

Setup
Editing Destination (Address Book/Adding
One-Touch Keys)...8-133

Place the originals on the platen

Sending ...3-25 *1 Saving Documents
Operation to USB Memory
Sending Functions ...5-1
(Scan to USB) ...6-5

*1: If the destination is not stored in the address book, you can send by entering the address
directly.

vi

Administrator tasks

To send a FAX (Only on products with the fax function installed)
As well as sending a FAX via the telephone lines, you can also send a FAX via a network.
It faxes. NOTE: For more information on setting up and sending a FAX, refer to the FAX Operation
Guide.

FAX directly
What Send a FAX from a
you want computer
to do

Connect the modular cord for the
telephone line to this machine.

Selection of Telephone Line
(Inch version only)

Network Setup
(LAN Cable Connection)

Install the Network FAX
Driver on your computer *1
Setup

Selection of Transmit Terminal Identification
(TTI)...2-3
on the FAX Operation Guide *2

Place the originals on the platen

FAX Operation About Network
(Basic) ...3-1 FAX ...7-1
Operation
on the FAX Operation on the FAX Operation
Guide Guide

*1: For more information, refer to the Network FAX Driver Operation Guide.
*2: If the destination is not stored in the address book, you can send the
FAX by entering the address directly.

vii

Menu Map

Copy key Function Menu key Paper Selection (page 4-4)

Collate (page 3-20)

Duplex (page 3-16)

Zoom (page 3-13)

Combine (page 4-11)

Original Size (page 4-2)

Orig.Orientation (page 4-8)

Original Image (page 3-11)

Density (page 3-9)

EcoPrint (page 4-10)

Continuous Scan (page 4-14)

File Name Entry (page 4-17)

JobFinish Notice (page 4-15)

Print Override (page 4-18)

Color Selection (page 4-19)

Color Balance (page 4-20)

Sharpness (page 4-22)

Backgrnd Density (page 4-23)

Saturation (page 4-25)

Send key Function Menu key Color Selection (page 5-19)

Original Size (page 5-2)

Original Image (page 5-15)

Scan Resolution (page 5-18)

Sending Size (page 5-4)

Zoom (page 5-6)

Orig.Orientation (page 5-10)

Continuous Scan (page 5-20)

File Format (page 5-12)

File Name Entry (page 5-21)

viii

Subject Entry (page 5-22) JobFinish Notice (page 5-28) FAX Resolution (FAX OPERATION GUIDE) FAX Delayed TX (FAX OPERATION GUIDE) FAX Direct TX (FAX OPERATION GUIDE) FAX RX Polling (FAX OPERATION GUIDE) Density (page 5-16) Duplex (page 5-8) FTP Encrypted TX (page 5-30) File Separation (page 5-14) Sharpness (page 5-23) Backgrnd Density (page 5-24) Document Box key Sub Address Box (FAX OPERATION GUIDE) Polling Box (FAX OPERATION GUIDE) Job Box (page 6-8) USB Memory (page 6-2) Document Box key Function Menu key Collate (page 3-20) USB printing Paper Selection (page 4-4) Duplex (page 3-16) File Name Entry (page 4-17) JobFinish Notice (page 4-15) Print Override (page 4-18) Color Selection (page 4-19) Encrypted PDF ix .

Orientation (FAX OPERATION GUIDE) Continuous Scan (FAX OPERATION GUIDE) File Name Entry (FAX OPERATION GUIDE) JobFinish Notice (FAX OPERATION GUIDE) Density (FAX OPERATION GUIDE) Duplex (FAX OPERATION GUIDE) Function Menu key Color Selection (page 5-19) Scan to USB Memory Original Size (page 5-2) Original Image (page 5-15) Scan Resolution (page 5-18) Storing Size Zoom (page 5-6) Orig. JPEG/TIFF Print (page 6-3) XPS FitTo Page (page 6-4) Function Menu key File Name Entry (page 4-17) Other than USB printing JobFinish Notice (page 4-15) Print Override (page 4-18) Del.Orientation (page 5-10) Continuous Scan (page 5-20) File Format (page 5-12) File Name Entry (page 5-21) x . after Print Function Menu key Original Size (FAX OPERATION Scan to Polling Box GUIDE) Original Image (FAX OPERATION GUIDE) FAX Resolution (FAX OPERATION GUIDE) Orig.

xi . JobFinish Notice (page 5-28) Density (page 5-16) Duplex (page 5-8) Sharpness (page 5-23) Backgrnd Density (page 5-24) Status/Job Cancel key Print Job Status (page 7-2) Send Job Status (page 7-2) Store Job Status (page 7-2) Scheduled Job (page 7-8) Print Job Log (page 7-8) Send Job Log (page 7-8) Store Job Log (page 7-8) Scanner (page 7-19) Printer (page 7-19) FAX (page 7-20) Toner Status (page 3-51) Paper Status (page 3-51) USB Memory (page 7-20) USB Keyboard (page 7-21) System Menu/Counter Report Report Print Menu Map (page 8-95) key Status Page (page 8-95) Font List (page 8-96) Admin Rpt Outgoing (FAX Set. FAX Rpt OPERATION GUIDE) Incoming (FAX FAX Rpt OPERATION GUIDE) Result Rpt Send Result E-mail/Folder (page 8-99) Set.

FAX (page 8-99) CancelBefore (page 8-99) Send FAX RX (FAX Result OPERATION GUIDE) JobFinish Do Not Notice Attach Attach SendImage Job Log Auto Sending (page 7-13) History Send History (page 7-13) Destination (page 7-13) Subject (page 7-13) SSFC Log Subject Counter Printed by Function (page 11-33) Pages by Paper Full Color (page 11-33) Size Black & (page 11-33) White Scanned (page 11-33) Pages System Network TCP/IP TCP/IP (page 8-149) Setting Settings IPv4 Setting (page 8-150) IPv6 Setting (page 8-150) Protocol (page 8-157) Detail NetWare (page 8-151) AppleTalk (page 8-153) WSD-SCAN (page 8-154) WSD-PRINT (page 8-155) IPSec (page 8-166) Secure SSL (page 8-160) Protocol xii .

(page 11-10) NW User (page 11-11) Property Job Job (page 11-13) Account. USB Host (page 8-168) USB Device (page 8-169) Option I/F 1 (page 8-171) Option I/F 2 (page 8-171) Security (page 8-173) Level Restart (page 8-148) Op Functions (page 8-174) User/Job User Login User Login (page 11-3) Account Set. (page 11-31) Report Total Printed (page 11-27) Accounting Pages Scanned (page 11-27) Pages FAX TX (FAX Pages OPERATION GUIDE) xiii .Set. Accounting Account. Local User (page 11-3) List IC Card Key Login Settings Password Login Group Auth. IPP Security (page 8-161) HTTP (page 8-162) Security LDAP (page 8-164) Security Host Name LAN Interface (page 8-149) I/F Block Set.

List (page 11-16) Default Apply Limit (page 11-23) Setting Copy/Print (page 11-19) Count Counter Limit (page 11-25) Unknown ID (page 11-12) Job Common Language (page 8-3) Settings Default (page 8-5) Screen Sound Buzzer Key (page 8-6) Confirmation Job Finish (page 8-6) Ready (page 8-6) Warning (page 8-6) Keyboard (page 8-6) Confirm FAX Speaker (FAX OPERATION GUIDE) FAX Monitor (FAX OPERATION GUIDE) Display (page 8-7) Bright. Orig. FAX TX Time (FAX OPERATION GUIDE) Counter (page 11-27) Reset Each Job (page 11-28) Account Account. (page 8-10) Size Custom (page 8-11) PaperSize xiv . Orig. Orig./Paper Custom (page 8-8) Set.Size Def.

Size Cassette 2 (page 8-13) Type Cassette 3 Cassette 3 (page 8-13) Set. Media for Full Color (page 8-22) Auto Black & (page 8-22) White Def. Clear (page 8-123) Timer xv . (page 8-21) PaperSource SpcialPaper (page 8-23) Act. Size Cassette 3 (page 8-13) Type MP Tray Set. Custom Cassette 1 (page 8-13) PaperSize Size Cassette 1 (page 8-13) Type Cassette 2 Cassette 2 (page 8-13) Set. Preset Limit (page 8-25) Measurement (page 8-26) Error DuplexPaper (page 8-27) Handling Error PaperMismat (page 8-27) chErr Date Setting Date/Time (page 8-117) Date Format (page 8-119) Time Zone (page 8-120) Summer (page 8-121) Time Timer Setting Err. MP Tray Size (page 8-15) MP Tray (page 8-15) Type Media Type (page 8-17) Set.

Sleep Timer (page 8-125) Sleep Level Quick (page 8-126) Recovery Energy Saver (page 8-126) PanelReset (page 8-129) Timer Auto Err.Orientati (page 8-29) on EcoPrint (page 8-43) File Name (page 8-39) Entry Subject/Body (page 8-40) Continuous (page 8-30) Scan File Format (page 8-36) File (page 8-46) Separation JPEG/TIFF (page 8-44) Print xvi . (page 8-122) Clear Auto Panel (page 8-128) Reset Unusable (page 8-130) Time Function Color (page 8-33) Default Selection Scan (page 8-32) Resolution FAX (FAX Resolution OPERATION GUIDE) Original (page 8-31) Image Density (page 8-37) Zoom (page 8-38) Collate (page 8-42) Orig.

(page 8-53) Binding Image (page 8-54) Quality Color TIFF (page 8-55) Comp. KPDL (page 8-80) xvii . Auto % (page 8-65) Priority DP Read (page 8-66) Action Select Key Left (page 8-68) Set. Right (page 8-68) Printer Emulation PCL6 (page 8-79) Set. PDF/A (page 8-56) Login (page 8-58) Operation Optional Normal (page 8-59) Memory Printer (page 8-59) Priority Copy Priority (page 8-59) RAM Disk (page 8-60) Setting Copy Photo (page 8-62) Processing Paper (page 8-63) Selection AutoPaperSe (page 8-64) lect. Binding (page 8-51) Finish. XPS FitTo (page 8-45) Page Detail Setting 2 in 1 Layout (page 8-47) 4 in 1 Layout (page 8-48) Border Line (page 8-50) Orig.

KPDL(Auto) (page 8-81) Color Setting (page 8-82) EcoPrint (page 8-82) Override A4/ (page 8-83) LTR Duplex (page 8-84) Copies (page 8-85) Orientation (page 8-87) Gloss Mode (page 8-88) Wide A4 (page 8-89) FormFeed (page 8-89) TimeOut LF Action (page 8-90) CR Action (page 8-91) Print Offset (page 8-92) Paper Feed (page 8-93) Mode Send Select Key Left (page 8-70) Set. Right (page 8-70) Destination Check (page 8-72) Check beforeSend Check New (page 8-72) Dest. Right (page 8-74) xviii . FAX (FAX OPERATION GUIDE) Document Sub Address (FAX Box Box OPERATION GUIDE) Job Box (page 8-76) Polling Box (FAX OPERATION GUIDE) Select Key Print Left (page 8-74) Set.

Copy Denst. Normal Print Chart (page 8-105) Adjust (page 8-105) Magenta Adjust Cyan (page 8-105) Adjust Yellow (page 8-105) Detail Print Chart (page 8-107) Adjust (page 8-107) Magenta Adjust Cyan (page 8-107) Adjust Yellow (page 8-107) Correct. Store Left (page 8-74) Right (page 8-74) Edit Address (page 8-143) Destination Book Print List (page 8-143) Adjust/Maint. Auto (page 8-101) Adj. Manual (page 8-101) Send/Box Auto (page 8-102) Density Manual (page 8-102) AutoColor (page 8-103) Correct Color (page 8-104) Calibration Color Regist. Bk (page 8-111) Line Service Service Setting Status Network Status Test Page Developer Setting Developer Refresh xix .

Remote Diag. ID xx . LaserScanner (page 8-112) Cln Drum (page 8-113) Refresh Altitude Adj.Set. (page 8-114) MC (page 8-115) FAX Country Code FAX Call Set. Remote Diag.

the smell may become unpleasant. • Avoid locations with vibrations. when this machine is moved after installation. To maintain the appropriate environment for copy work. however. Avoid the following locations when selecting a site for the machine. • Avoid locations near a window or with exposure to direct sunlight.Environment The service environmental conditions are as follows: • Temperature: 50 to 90. it is suggested that the room be properly ventilated. adverse environmental conditions may affect the image quality. If the floor is delicate against casters. but the amount does not cause any ill effect to one’s health.5 °F (10 to 32. If. the floor material may be damaged.5 °C) • Humidity: 15 to 80 % However. • Avoid locations with drastic temperature fluctuations. xxi . • Avoid poorly ventilated locations. During copying. the machine is used over a long period of time in a poorly ventilated room or when making an extremely large number of copies. some ozone is released. • Avoid locations with direct exposure to hot or cold air.

• If toner does happen to get on your skin. • If you do happen to ingest toner. as well as contact with your eyes and skin. contact a physician. move to a place with fresh air and gargle thoroughly with a large amount of water. If necessary. Do not attempt to force open or destroy the toner container or the waste toner box. avoid inhalation and ingestion. • If you do happen to get toner in your eyes. If toner happens to spill from the toner container or the waste toner box. If coughing develops. xxii . If there is any remaining tenderness. • If you do happen to inhale toner. flush them thoroughly with water. contact a physician. wash with soap and water. rinse your mouth with water and drink 1 or 2 cups of water to dilute the contents of your stomach. Dangerous sparks may cause burns.Cautions when handling consumables CAUTION Do not attempt to incinerate the toner container or the waste toner box. Keep the toner container and the waste toner box out of the reach of children. contact a physician.

remove the paper from the cassette and the Multi Purpose (MP) Tray. transmitting/receiving Fax is disabled. If using the products with the fax function installed the main power switch is off. but press the Power key on the operation panel to enter Sleep mode. Store the machine in a place where the temperature stays below 40ºC while avoiding sharp changes of temperature and humidity. xxiii . Do not turn off the main power switch.Other precautions Return the exhausted toner container and waste toner box to your dealer or service representative. Store the machine while avoiding exposure to direct sunlight. If the machine will not be used for an extended period of time. The collected toner container and waste toner box will be recycled or disposed in accordance with the relevant regulations. return it to its original package and reseal it.

The label shown below is attached on the rear side of the machine. In the normal operation of the product by user. laser radiation emitted inside this machine is hermetically sealed within the protective housing and external cover.Laser Safety (Europe) Laser radiation could be hazardous to the human body. no radiation can leak from the machine. xxiv . These labels are attached to the laser scanner unit inside the machine and are not in a user access area. This machine is classified as Class 1 laser product under IEC 60825-1:2007. For this reason. Caution: Performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

S. 2. FS-C2026MFP FS-C2126MFP xxv . without certification. Food and Drug Administration (FDA). 1976. The laser optical system. 1976. 2. The CDRH Act A laser-product-related act was implemented on Aug. never permits the laser beam to escape. The label shown below indicates compliance with the CDRH regulations and must be attached to laser products marketed in the United States. by the Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U. This act prohibits the sale of laser products in the U. the label is on the rear. This indicates that the product is safe to use during normal operation and maintenance. 1. enclosed in a protective housing and sealed within the external covers. Safety of laser beam This machine has been certified by the manufacturer to Class 1 level under the radiation performance standards established by the U.DHHS (Department of Health and Human Services) in 1968. On this machine.S.S. and applies to laser products manufactured after Aug.SAFETY OF LASER BEAM (USA) 1.

follow the maintenance instructions in the other section of this manual. Shown at below is the label located on the cover of the optical unit. Maintenance For safety of the service personnel. avoid direct exposure to the laser beam. xxvi .3. Optical unit When checking the optical unit. 4. which is invisible.

uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and. Operation is subject to the following two conditions. This equipment generates. pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Other precautions (for users in California.ca. if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions. However.special handling may apply. MERCURY WARNING THE LAMP(S) INSIDE THIS PRODUCT CONTAIN MERCURY AND MUST BE RECYCLED OR DISPOSED OF ACCORDING TO LOCAL. may cause harmful interference to radio communications. the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: • Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and RSS-Gen of IC Rules.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception. STATE OR FEDERAL LAWS. • The use of a non-shielded interface cable with the referenced device is prohibited. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. * The above warning is valid only in the United States of America. and (2) this device must accept any interference. including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.Safety Instructions Regarding the Disconnection of Power (USA) Caution: The power plug is the main isolation device! Other switches on the equipment are only functional switches and are not suitable for isolating the equipment from the power source.dtsc. • Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on. • Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. • Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. WARNING This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device. Attention: Le débranchement de la fiche secteur est le seul moyen de mettre l’appareil hors tension. Radio Tag Technology In some countries the radio tag technology used in this equipment to identify the toner container may be subject to authorization and the use of this equipment may consequently be restricted. xxvii . the United States) This product contains a CR Coin Lithium Battery which contains Perchlorate Material . (1) this device may not cause interference. CAUTION — The changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. See www. Les interrupteurs sur l’appareil ne sont que des interrupteurs de fonctionnement: ils ne mettent pas l’appareil hors tension.

(b) have used parts or supplies which are not genuine Kyocera brand parts or supplies. OR INABILITY TO USE. altered. Kyocera's only obligation and the Customer's exclusive remedy shall be replacement of any defective parts. which: (a) have become damaged due to operator negligence. This warranty does not cover MFP's or accessories. nor any other person.Warranty (USA) FS-C2026MFP/FS-C2126MFP MULTIFUNCTIONAL PRODUCT LIMITED WARRANTY Kyocera Mita America. and Kyocera Mita Canada. Neither the seller. Inc. THIS WARRANTY IS MADE IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS. or removed. and the new accessories installed with the initial installation of the MFP. or province to province. accidents. improper storage or unusual physical or electrical stress. whichever first occurs. This warranty does not cover Maintenance Kits or the components of Maintenance Kits. is authorized to extend the time period or expand this warranty on behalf of Kyocera. based upon the country of purchase. AND KYOCERA SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. If the Kyocera Dealer is not able to provide service. against any defects in material and workmanship for a period of one (1) year. and the fixing unit which have a separate warranty. This warranty is valid only for the original retail purchaser (referred to as the "Customer") of a new Kyocera MFP in the United States of America or Canada.000 copies/prints from date of installation. (c) have been installed or serviced by a technician not employed by Kyocera or an Authorized Kyocera Dealer. Ltd. write to Kyocera at the address below for the name and address of the Authorized Kyocera Dealer in your area or check Kyocera's website at www. the developing unit. This warranty gives the Customer specific legal rights. The Customer may also have other rights. In the event the MFP or an accessory is found to be defective within the warranty period. (both referred to as "Kyocera") warrant the Customer's new Multifunctional Product (referred to as "MFP"). In order to obtain performance of this warranty. the Customer must immediately notify the Authorized Kyocera Dealer from whom the product was purchased. EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. THE MFP. THIS WARRANTY SHALL NOT EXTEND TO. the transfer belt.com/us. or 200. xxviii .kyoceramita. or (d) have had the serial number modified. AND KYOCERA SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR. misuse. which vary from state to state. which consist of the drum unit. Kyocera shall have no obligation to furnish labor. ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHICH MAY ARISE OUT OF THE USE OF.

Do not knowingly copy/scan the items that are not to be copied/ scanned. It may not be limited to these items. xxix .Legal Restriction on Copying/Scanning • It may be prohibited to copy/scan copyrighted material without permission of the copyright owner. Paper money Bank note Securities Stamp Passport Certificate • Local laws and regulations may prohibit or restrict copying/scanning of other items not mentioned above. • Copying/Scanning the following items is prohibited and may be penalized by low.

xxx .

Legal and Safety Information Please read this information before using your machine........................ xxxiii • Energy Saving Control Function............................ xxxix xxxi ........ • Legal Information...................................... xxxvii • Paper Recycling ......................................................................... This chapter provides information on the following topics............................................ xxxvii • About this Operation Guide ...............xxxviii • Conventions in This Guide .. xxxvii • Automatic 2-Sided Copy Function .............. xxxii • Regarding Trade Names ...................... xxxvii • Energy Star (ENERGY STAR®) Program ...........................................

Legal Information Copying or other reproduction of all or part of this guide without the prior written consent of Kyocera Mita Corporation is prohibited. xxxii .

• Helvetica. • AppleTalk is a registered trademark of Apple Computer. and/or other countries. • Power PC is a trademark of IBM in the U. • TrueType is a registered trademark of Apple Computer. • PCL is a trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company. • Adobe Acrobat. Inc.S. • KPDL is a trademark of Kyocera Corporation. • This machine contains the software having modules developed by Independent JPEG Group. • TypeBankG-B.A. • IBM and IBM PC/AT are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation. are installed in this machine. Inc. ITC Bookman. and/or other countries. Incorporated. Adobe Reader and PostScript are trademarks of Adobe Systems. • Novell and NetWare are registered trademarks of Novell. xxxiii . • All European language fonts installed in this machine are used under licensing agreement with Monotype Imaging Inc.S. MS-DOS and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U. Inc. • Microsoft. ITC ZapfChancery and ITC ZapfDingbats are registered trademarks of International Type-face Corporation. The designations ™ and ® will not be used in this Operation Guide. • ThinPrint is a trademark of ThinPrint GmbH in Germany and other countries. • ITC Avant Garde Gothic. Palatino and Times are registered trademarks of Linotype-Hell AG. • UFST™ MicroType® fonts by Monotype Imaging Inc. TypeBankM-M and Typebank-OCR are trademarks of TypeBank®. • Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.A. All other brands and product names are registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective companies.Regarding Trade Names • PRESCRIBE and ECOSYS are trademarks of Kyocera Corporation.

are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice.fsf. INDIRECT.kyoceramita. All rights reserved.html).org/)” 4 The names “OpenSSL Toolkit” and “OpenSSL Project” must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission. 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice. please contact openssl-core@openssl. Open SSLeay License Copyright (c) 1998-2006 The OpenSSL Project. EXEMPLARY. 5 Products derived from this software may not be called “OpenSSL” nor may “OpenSSL” appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project. For written permission. 6 Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: “This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www. this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY.org/)” THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES. OR PROFITS. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms.com/gpl” for more information on how to make GPL applied codes available. with or without modification. THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING. xxxiv .openssl. DATA.openssl. LOSS OF USE. SPECIAL. PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES. INCLUDING. EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.org/copyleft/gpl. BUT NOT LIMITED TO. (http:/ /www. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT. this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. Please access “http://www.GPL Firmware of this machine is using in part the GPL applied codes (www.org. OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE. INCIDENTAL. WHETHER IN CONTRACT. 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment: “This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. STRICT LIABILITY. BUT NOT LIMITED TO.

e. etc. this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU Public Licence. PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES.] xxxv . INCLUDING. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms. lhash. 4 If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement: “This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft. Copyright remains Eric Young’s. this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.. 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: “This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft. LOSS OF USE. WHETHER IN CONTRACT.com)” The word ‘cryptographic’ can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic related :-). are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice. THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used. EXEMPLARY.com). The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed. BUT NOT LIMITED TO.com) All rights reserved. with or without modification. STRICT LIABILITY. 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice.Original SSLeay License Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft. OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE.com). and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed. The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution. This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to. INCIDENTAL.com)” THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES. This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft. OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY. not just the SSL code. i. DATA. BUT NOT LIMITED TO. DES. This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package. RSA. SPECIAL. code. The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft. INDIRECT. EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. be it the RC4. OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING. The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL. If this package is used in a product. this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. OR PROFITS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT.

upon their return to Monotype Imaging. characters and symbols (Typefaces) solely for your own customary business or personal purposes at the address stated on the registration card you return to Monotype Imaging. you need to acquire a multi- user license agreement which can be obtained from Monotype Imaging. 3 To protect proprietary rights of Monotype Imaging. decrypt. 9 Massachusetts U. expressed or implied. including warranties of fitness for a particular purpose and merchantability. as appropriate. 12 You acknowledge that you have read this Agreement. 4 You agree not to duplicate or copy the Software or Typefaces.S. except that you may make one backup copy. In no event will Monotype Imaging be liable for lost profits. title and interest to the Software and Typefaces and no rights are granted to you other than a License to use the Software on the terms expressly set forth in this Agreement. or otherwise transfer the Software and/or Typefaces without the prior written consent of Monotype Imaging. numerals.A. 6 You agree that you will not modify. 5 This License shall continue until the last use of the Software and Typefaces. sell. Monotype Imaging retains all rights.Monotype Imaging License Agreement 1 Software shall mean the digitally encoded. law governs this Agreement. Monotype Imaging does not warrant that the Software is free from all bugs. and agree to be bound by its terms and conditions. When this License expires or is terminated. understand it. disassemble. or any damages caused by abuse or misapplication of the Software and Typefaces. By opening this diskette package. The parties agree that all other warranties. Under the terms of this License Agreement. errors and omissions. you shall either return to Monotype Imaging or destroy all copies of the Software and Typefaces and documentation as requested. If you need to have access to the fonts on more than three printers. and the diskette will be free from defects in material and workmanship. you agree to accept the terms and conditions of this Agreement. duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at FAR 252-227-7013. machine readable. subdivision (b)(3)(ii) or subparagraph (c)(1)(ii). unless sooner terminated. reverse engineer or decompile the Software. or any other incidental or consequential damages. you agree to maintain the Software and other proprietary information concerning the Typefaces in strict confidence and to establish reasonable procedures regulating access to and use of the Software and Typefaces. duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions applicable to restricted rights software as set forth in FAR 52. you have the right to use the Fonts on up to three printers. the Software will perform in accordance with Monotype Imaging-published specifications. lost data. No change in this Agreement is effective unless written and signed by properly authorized representatives of each party. styles and versions of letters. xxxvi . 8 Your exclusive remedy and the sole liability of Monotype Imaging in connection with the Software and Typefaces is repair or replacement of defective parts. This License may be terminated by Monotype Imaging if you fail to comply with the terms of this License and such failure is not remedied within thirty (30) days after notice from Monotype Imaging. alter. 11 Use. scalable outline data as encoded in a special format as well as the UFST Software. are excluded. Further use.227-19 (c)(2). You agree that any such copy shall contain the same proprietary notices as those appearing on the original. 2 You agree to accept a non-exclusive license to use the Software to reproduce and display weights. lease. 10 You shall not sublicense. Neither party shall be bound by any statement or representation not contained in this Agreement. 7 Monotype Imaging warrants that for ninety (90) days after delivery.

Paper Recycling This device supports the recycled paper which reduces the load on the environment. Automatic 2-Sided Copy Function This device includes 2-sided copying as a standard function. it is possible to lower the amount of paper used. Sleep The device automatically enters Sleep when 1 minute has passed since the device was last used. printer and fax functions remain in a waiting state but power consumption is still reduced to a minimum when there is no activity with the device within a set amount of time. For example.Energy Saving Control Function The device comes equipped with a Sleep Mode where copier. Energy Star (ENERGY STAR®) Program We have determined as a company participating in ENERGY STAR that this product has earned the ENERGY STAR. For more information see Duplex Copying on page 3-16. press the Power key to wake the machine from sleep mode or energy saver mode. Automatic authentication does not take place in sleep mode or energy saver mode. Your sales or service representative can provide information about recommended paper types. xxxvii . To continue the installation. by copying two 1-sided originals onto a single sheet of paper as a 2-sided copy.

Basic Operation Describes the procedures for basic copying. Chapter 9 .Preparation before Use Explains adding paper. Provides information on media types and paper sizes. Chapter 2 .Document Box Provides a basic guide to using document boxes. Appendix Explains how to enter characters. Chapter 3 . printing and scanning.About this Operation Guide This Operation Guide contains the following chapters.Troubleshooting Explains how to handle error messages. Introduces the convenient optional equipment available for this machine. xxxviii .Status / Job Cancel Explains how to check the job status and job history and how to cancel jobs being printed or waiting to print. Chapter 4 . connecting the machine. paper jams and other problems. Chapter 1 .Management Explains user login administration and job accounting. Chapter 10 . and lists the machine specifications. placing originals. Chapter 7 .Copying Functions Describes the functions you can use when copying.Maintenance Describes cleaning and toner or waste toner box replacement. and necessary configurations before first use. Also explains how to check the remaining paper and device status and how to cancel a transmission Chapter 8 . Also includes a glossary of terms.Default Setting (System Menu) Describes the System Menu options for general machine operation.Part Names Identifies machine parts and operation panel keys. Chapter 6 . Chapter 11 . Chapter 5 .Sending Functions Describes the functions you can use when sending originals.

Italic Indicates a message displayed Ready to copy is displayed. Index and Menu Map. Convention Description Example Bold Indicates the operation panel Press the Start key. (In the Contents. refer to the phrase or references to FAX Operation Guide. additional information. jump to a related page.Conventions in This Guide The following conventions are used depending on the nature of the description. Note Indicates supplemental information or operations for NOTE: reference. on the Message Display. keys or a computer screen. Then click the text. For details on Network FAX. the linked areas are not underlined. Position the pointer over the underlined text until the pointer changes to a hand with appointing finger ( ). [Regular] Indicates a selection item on the Select [System]. Important Indicates items that are required or prohibited so as to avoid IMPORTANT: problems.) xxxix . Caution Indicates what must be observed to prevent injury or CAUTION: machine breakdown and how to deal with it. Message Display. Underline A link function allows you to Refer to Contents. Used to emphasize a key word.

xl .

.................1 Part Names This chapter identifies the machine parts and operation panel keys..................................................... • Operation Panel......... 1-2 • Machine ............ 1-4 1-1 ...........................................

Also used to enter a pause when entering a FAX number. * Only on products with the fax function installed. machine. Used to register. where you can Message Display. 1-2 . where you can operate the document box and USB Displays the Add Destination screen. call and delete Selects the menu where you can send a destinations to the one-touch key displayed at the lower left FAX. Selects the menu displayed at the lower right in the Message Display. Selects black and white mode. folder key numbers (1 to 11 and 12 to Blinks while print data (SMB/FTP) or FAX*. Displays the Send screen. and sending a FAX. where you can Switches between on-hook and off-hook when manually check the status. Displays the Address Book screen. Calls the previous destination. destinations. Part Names Operation Panel Displays the System Menu/Counter menu screen.* Displays the Document Box screen.* pause or cancel the job in process. 22). machine is accessing the memory. Selects full color mode. Displays the FAX screen. Blinks while the Selects auto color mode. Check what is make settings required shown here while operating the for copying. to 22). where Shifts to switch the one-touch you can send an e-mail. in the Message Display. where you can add. where you can add memory. Displays the Status screen.* numbers (1 to 22). edit and delete destinations. Displays the Copy screen. is being received or Indicator is lit while shifted (12 data is transmitted. where you can check the system settings and counters. print a status report.

transmission and document box. Used to select a menu item. move the cursor when entering characters. Used to register or recall programs. Cancels the printing job in progress. print. Puts the machine to sleep or wakes it up. Selects the chosen item or finalizes the entered value. numbers and symbols. Resets settings and displays the basic screen. etc. Ends operation (logs out) on the Numeric keys. Returns the Message Display to the previous screen. Lights or blinks when an error occurs. Lit when the machine's Displays the function menu for copy. 1-3 . Part Names 1 Clears entered numbers and characters. change a value. main power is on. Enter Administration screen. Starts copying and scanning operations and processing for setting operations.

Part Names Machine 1 2 3 6 4 5 7 1 Operation Panel 2 Top Cover (Top Tray) 3 Paper Stopper 4 MP (Multi-Purpose) Tray 5 Paper Cassette 6 USB Memory Slot 7 Main Power Switch 8 9 10 11 12 13 8 Black Toner Container (K) 9 Magenta Toner Container (M) 10 Cyan Toner Container (C) 11 Yellow Toner Container (Y) 12 Waste Toner Cover 13 Waste Toner Box 1-4 .

Part Names 1 14 15 16 14 Paper Transfer Unit 15 Paper Ramp 16 Duplex Unit 17 25 18 19 26 20 21 22 23 24 17 LINE connector* 18 TEL connector* 19 USB Interface Connector 20 Network Indicators 21 Network Interface Connector * Only on products with the fax function installed 1-5 .

the top tray and document processor cannot be opened at the same time. 1-6 . Part Names 22 USB Memory Slot 23 Right Cover 24 Power Cord Connector 25 Rear Cover 26 Rear Cover Lever 27 30 28 29 31 32 33 35 34 27 Original Width Guides 28 Document Processor Cover 29 Opening Handle* 30 Original Table 31 Original Stopper 32 Original Eject Table 33 Top Cover Lever* 34 Handles for moving 35 Platen * To prevent toppling.

..................................... 2-11 • Network Setup (LAN Cable Connection) ....................................................... 2-26 • Loading Originals............................ • Check bundled items ...................................... 2-7 • Sleep and Auto Sleep...........................................................2 Preparation before Use This chapter explains the preparations before using this equipment for the first time as well as the procedures for loading papers and originals............ 2-24 • Loading Paper ................ 2-47 2-1 ............................... 2-2 • Determining the Connection Method and Preparing Cables ........ 2-3 • Connecting Cables ................................................................................... 2-9 • Switching the Language for Display [Language] ............................ 2-14 • Installing Software ... 2-23 • Sending E-mail ............................................. 2-10 • Setting Date and Time ......................... 2-22 • COMMAND CENTER (Settings for E-mail) ............................................................................................................... 2-44 • Installing Printer Driver .............. 2-5 • Power On/Off.....

• Quick Installation Guide • Safety Guide • Safety Guide (FS-C2026MFP/FS-C2126MFP) • CD-ROM (Product Library) • CD-ROM (TWAIN compatible application) Documents Contained in the Included CD-ROM The following documents are contained in the included CD-ROM (Product Library). Documents Operation Guide (This Guide) Fax Operation Guide KYOCERA COMMAND CENTER Operation Guide Printer Driver User Guide Network FAX Driver Operation Guide KM-NET for Direct Printing Operation Guide KMnet Viewer User Guide PRESCRIBE Commands Technical Reference PRESCRIBE Commands Command Reference 2-2 . Refer to them as necessary. Preparation before Use Check bundled items Check that the following items have been bundled.

and prepare the necessary cables. 2-3 . Scanner default settings. Connection Example 2 Determine the method to connect the equipment to a PC or network by referring to the illustration below. Connecting a scanner to your PC network with a network cable (100BASE-TX or 10BASE-T) COMMAND CENTER Network Send E-mail Administrator’s PC Network settings. MFP Printing Network Send SMB USB Saves the scanned image as a data file on your PC. User and Sends the image data destination registration of scanned originals to the desired recipient as a file attached to an E-mail message. FAX Network TWAIN Scanning FAX Network WIA Scanning * Only on products with the fax function installed USB TWAIN and WIA are standardized interface for communication between software applications and image acquisition devices. Network Network FAX Network Network Send FTP Sends the scanned image as a data file on the FTP. Preparation before Use Determining the Connection Method and Preparing Cables Check the method to connect the equipment to a PC or network.

2-4 . Shielded) * Network FAX and FAX functions available only on products with the fax function installed. For details on Network FAX. refer to the FAX Operation Guide. Shielded) Scanning/WIA Scanning/ Network FAX* Printer/WIA USB interface USB2. Max. 5. Available Standard Interfaces Function Interface Necessary Cable Printer/Scanner Network interface LAN (10Base-T or /TWAIN 100Base-TX.0 compatible cable Scanning (Hi-Speed USB compliant. Preparation before Use Preparing Necessary Cables The following interfaces are available to connect the equipment to a PC. Prepare the necessary cables according to the interface you use.0 m.

Preparation before Use Connecting Cables Follow the steps below to connect cables to the machine. 1 If the machine power is on. On 2 Connect the machine to the PC or your network device. Off Then. remove the cap. press the main power switch to turn off the power. 1 2 2-5 . press the power key on 2 the operation panel and make sure that the message displayed and memory light are off. When using the network interface. 3 Remove the Power Cord Connector Cover.

For details. 6 Turn the main power switch on. The machine begins to warm up. refer to Network Setup (LAN Cable Connection) on page 2-14. Preparation before Use 4 Connect one end of the supplied power cable to the machine and the other end to a power outlet. configure the network. 5 Replace the Power Cord Connector Cover. 2-6 . IMPORTANT: Only use the power cable that comes with the machine. Off On 7 When connecting the network cable.

.. Wait more than 5 seconds. On Off 2-7 . Preparation before Use Power On/Off Power On When the main power indicator is lit. and then turn on the main power switch. Turn the main power switch on.. do not turn on the main power switch again On immediately. Make sure that the memory indicator is off before turning off the main power switch. Power Off Before turning off the main power switch. When the main power indicator is off. 2 Press the Power key.. Off IMPORTANT: When turning off the main power switch. press the Power key on the operation panel to off. Make sure that the indicator is off.

Preparation before Use In case of not using the machine for a extended period of time CAUTION: If this machine will be left unused for an extended period (e. If using the products equipped with the fax function. 2-8 . remove the power plug from the outlet as a safety precaution. IMPORTANT: Remove paper from the cassettes and seal it in the paper storage bag to protect it from humidity. overnight).g.g. turn it off at the main power switch. note that turning the machine off at the main power switch disables fax transmission and reception. vacation). If the machine will not be used for an even longer period of time (e.

The time required for the machine to wake up from power save mode and resume normal operation will be longer than for sleep mode. while the machine is asleep. such as ventilation. If you are using the products equipped with the fax function. press the Power key. NOTE: Energy Saver mode settings. Auto Sleep Auto Sleep automatically switches the machine into Sleep Mode if left idle for 1 minute. Note that ambient environmental conditions. The machine will be ready to operate in about 20 seconds. 2-9 . If print data is received during Sleep. press the Power key. may cause the machine to respond more slowly. and allows sleep mode to be set separately for each function. Energy Saver (products that is not equipped with the fax function) This mode reduces power consumption even more than normal sleep mode. Settings can be specified to prevent access from a computer. To use the machine. Message Display and all indicators on the operation panel will go out to 2 save a maximum amount of power except the Main Power indicator. To resume. received fax data is printed out while the operation panel also remains unlit. the print job is performed while the Message Display remains unlit. such as printing from a computer or accessing COMMAND CENTER. This status is referred to as Sleep. see Sleep Level on page 8-126. Preparation before Use Sleep and Auto Sleep Sleep To enter Sleep. press the Power key.

5 Press the OK key. is displayed and the screen returns to the Common Settings menu. Use the procedure below to select the language. 2-10 . Menu/Count. menu. Preparation before Use Switching the Language for Display [Language] Select the language displayed on the Message Display. When you are performing user management and Login User Name: L b have not logged in. Menu/Count. 2 In the Sys. If user management is selected in [Network Setting]. 1 Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main unit operation panel. Completed. ******************** Then. a login screen will appear. 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* 7 Copy [ Exit ] 3 Press the OK key. enter the Login User Name and Login Login Password: Password to log in. The Common Settings menu Common Settings: a b appears. NOTE: The default settings of the Login User Name [ Menu ] [ Login ] and Login Password are both "2600". press [Menu] (the Left Select key) to authenticate. Language appears.: a b key to select [Common Settings]. Language: a b 1 *English ********************* 2 Deutsch 3 Français 6 Press the U or V key to select the desired language and then press the OK key. Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-7 for details on entering characters. press the U or V Sys. 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] 4 Press the U or V key to select [Language].

Preparation before Use

Setting Date and Time
Follow the steps below to set the local date and time at the place of installation.

When you send an E-mail using the transmission function, the date and time as set here will be printed in the
header of the E-mail message. Set the date, time and time difference from GMT of the region where the
2
machine is used.

NOTE: Be sure to set the time difference before setting the date and time.

1 Turn on the main power switch.

Off

On

2 Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main
unit operation panel.

When you are performing user management and
Login User Name: L b have not logged in, a login screen will appear.
******************** Then, enter the Login User Name and Login
Login Password: Password to log in.

[ Login ]

3 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b key to select [Common Settings].
5 User Property
6 Common Settings
*********************
7 Copy
[ Exit ]

4 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu
Common Settings: a b appears.
1 Language
*********************
2 Default Screen
3 Sound
[ Exit ]

5 Press the U or V key to select [Date Setting].

2-11

Preparation before Use

6 A login screen will appear. Then, enter the Login
Login User Name: L b User Name and Login Password to log in.
********************
Login Password:

[ Login ]

7 Press [Login] (the Right Select key). The Date
Date Setting: a b Setting menu appears.
1 Date/Time
*********************
2 Date Format
3 Time Zone
[ Exit ]

8 Press the U or V key to select [Time Zone].

9 Press the OK key. Time Zone appears.
Time Zone: a b
1 -12:00 Internati
*********************
2 -11:00 Midway
3 -10:00 Hawaii

10 Press the U or V key to select your region and
then press the OK key.

Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
the Date Setting menu.

11 Press the U or V key to select [Summer Time].
Date Setting: a b
2 Date Format
3 Time Zone
4 Summer Time
*********************
[ Exit ]

12 Press the OK key. Summer Time appears.
Summer Time: a b
1 *Off
*********************
2 On

13 Press the U or V key to select [On] or [Off] and
then press the OK key.

Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
the Date Setting menu.

2-12

Preparation before Use

14 Press the U or V key to select [Date/Time].
Date Setting: a b
1 Date/Time
*********************
2 Date Format
3 Time Zone 2
[ Exit ]

15 Press the OK key. Date/Time appears.
Date/Time: a b
Year Month Day
2010 01 01
(Time Zone:Tokyo )

16 Press the Y or Z key to move the cursor position,
press the U or V key to enter year, month and day,
and then press the OK key.

17 Press the Y or Z key to move the cursor position,
Date/Time: a b press the U or V key to enter hours, minutes and
Hour Min. Second seconds, and then press the OK key.
11: 45: 50
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
(Time Zone:Tokyo )
the Date Setting menu.

18 Press the U or V key to select [Date Format].
Date Setting: a b
1 Date/Time
2 Date Format
*********************
3 Time Zone
[ Exit ]

19 Press the OK key. Date Format appears.
Date Format: a b
1 *Month/Day/Year
*********************
2 Day/Month/Year
3 Year/Month/Day

20 Press the U or V key to select the desired display
format and then press the OK key.

Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
the Date Setting menu.

2-13

Preparation before Use

Network Setup (LAN Cable Connection)
The machine is equipped with network interface, which is compatible with network protocols such as TCP/IP
(IPv4), TCP/IP (IPv6), IPX/SPX, NetBEUI, IPSec, and AppleTalk. It enables network printing on the Windows,
Macintosh, UNIX, NetWare and other platforms.
This section explains the TCP/IP (IPv4) Setup procedures. For other network settings, refer to Network
Setup on page 8-149.

NOTE: After all network related settings have been done, turn the machine OFF and ON again. This is
mandatory to make the settings effective!

• TCP/IP (IPv4) Setup (when an IP address is automatically assigned) ...2-16
• TCP/IP (IPv4) Setup (by Entering IP Addresses) ...2-16

TCP/IP (IPv4) Setup (when an IP address is automatically assigned)
If an IP address will be automatically assigned, configure the settings below.

NOTE: The [DHCP] and [Auto-IP] settings are enabled by default. Specify the settings below when Network
Setup on page 8-149 have been changed from their default state.

Use the procedure below to setup the TCP/IP (IPv4) setting.
1 Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main
unit operation panel.

When you are performing user management and
Login User Name: L b have not logged in, a login screen will appear.
******************** Then, enter the Login User Name and Login
Login Password: Password to log in.

[ Login ] NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on
Appendix-7 for details on entering characters.

2 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b key to select [System], and then press the OK key.
1 Report
2 Counter
3 System
*********************
[ Exit ]

IMPORTANT: To make the settings, you must have
Administrator only. logged in using a Login User Name with administrator
privileges.
The default settings of the Login User Name and Login
Password are both "2600".

If you have logged in using a Login User Name without
administrator privileges, the screen will display
Administrator only. and return to the standby screen.

2-14

Preparation before Use

3 In the System menu, press the U or V key to
System: a b select [Network Setting].
1 Network Setting
*********************
2 I/F Block Set.
3 Security Level 2
[ Exit ]

4 Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu
Network Setting: a b appears.
1 TCP/IP Settings
*********************
2 NetWare
3 AppleTalk
[ Exit ]

5 Press the U or V key to select [TCP/IP Settings].

6 Press the OK key. The TCP/IP Settings menu
TCP/IP Settings: a b appears.
1 TCP/IP
*********************
2 IPv4 Setting
3 IPv6 Setting
[ Exit ]

7 Press the U or V key to select [TCP/IP].

8 Press the OK key. TCP/IP appears.
TCP/IP: a b
1 Off
2 *On
*********************

9 Press the U or V key to select [On] and then press
the OK key.

Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
the TCP/IP Settings menu.

10 Press the U or V key to select [IPv4 Setting].
TCP/IP Settings: a b
1 TCP/IP
2 IPv4 Setting
*********************
3 IPv6 Setting
[ Exit ]

2-15

Preparation before Use

11 Press the OK key. The IPv4 Setting menu appears.
IPv4 Setting: a b
1 DHCP
*********************
2 Bonjour
3 Auto-IP
[ Exit ]

12 Press the U or V key to select [DHCP].
13 Press the OK key. DHCP appears.
DHCP: a b
1 Off
2 *On
*********************

14 Press the U or V key to select [On] and then press
the OK key.

Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
the IPv4 Setting menu.

15 Press the U or V key to select [Auto-IP].
IPv4 Setting: a b
1 DHCP
2 Bonjour
3
*********************
Auto-IP
[ Exit ]

16 Press the OK key. Auto-IP appears.
Auto-IP: a b
1 Off
2 *On
*********************

17 Press the U or V key to select [On] and then press
the OK key.

Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
the IPv4 Setting menu.

TCP/IP (IPv4) Setup (by Entering IP Addresses)
Set up TCP/IP to connect to the Windows network. Set the IP addresses, subnet masks, and gateway
addresses. The default settings are "TCP/IP Protocol: On, DHCP: On, Bonjour: Off, Auto-IP: On".

NOTE: Before setting an IP address, ask your network administrator if your network environment requires
input of an IP address. If input is necessary, ask your network administrator to obtain an IP address for you.

2-16

Preparation before Use

Use the procedure below to setup the TCP/IP (IPv4) setting.

1 Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main
unit operation panel.

2
When you are performing user management and
Login User Name: L b have not logged in, a login screen will appear.
******************** Then, enter the Login User Name and Login
Login Password: Password to log in.

[ Login ] NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on
Appendix-7 for details on entering characters.

2 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b key to select [System], and then press the OK key.
1 Report
2 Counter
3 System
*********************
[ Exit ]

IMPORTANT: To make the settings, you must have
Administrator only. logged in using a Login User Name with administrator
privileges.
The default settings of the Login User Name and Login
Password are both "2600".

If you have logged in using a Login User Name without
administrator privileges, the screen will display
Administrator only. and return to the standby screen.

3 In the System menu, press the U or V key to
System: a b select [Network Setting].
1 Network Setting
*********************
2 I/F Block Set.
3 Security Level
[ Exit ]

4 Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu
Network Setting: a b appears.
1 TCP/IP Settings
*********************
2 NetWare
3 AppleTalk
[ Exit ]

5 Press the U or V key to select [TCP/IP Settings].

2-17

Preparation before Use

6 Press the OK key. The TCP/IP Settings menu
TCP/IP Settings: a b appears.
1 TCP/IP
*********************
2 IPv4 Setting
3 IPv6 Setting
[ Exit ]

7 Press the U or V key to select [TCP/IP].

8 Press the OK key. TCP/IP appears.
TCP/IP: a b
1 Off
2 *On
*********************

9 Press the U or V key to select [On] and then press
the OK key.

Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
the TCP/IP Settings menu.

10 Press the U or V key to select [IPv4 Setting].
TCP/IP Settings: a b
1 TCP/IP
2 IPv4 Setting
*********************
3 IPv6 Setting
[ Exit ]

11 Press the OK key. The IPv4 Setting menu appears.
IPv4 Setting: a b
1 DHCP
*********************
2 Bonjour
3 Auto-IP
[ Exit ]

12 Press the U or V key to select [DHCP].
13 Press the OK key. DHCP appears.
DHCP: a b
1 Off
2 *On
*********************

14 Press the U or V key to select [Off] and then press
the OK key.

2-18

Preparation before Use

Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
the IPv4 Setting menu.

15 Press the U or V key to select [Bonjour].
IPv4 Setting: a b
1 DHCP 2
2 Bonjour
*********************
3 Auto-IP
[ Exit ]

16 Press the OK key. Bonjour appears.
Bonjour: a b
1 *Off
*********************
2 On

17 Press the U or V key to select [Off] and then press
the OK key.

Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
the IPv4 Setting menu.

18 Press the U or V key to select [Auto-IP].
IPv4 Setting: a b
1 DHCP
2 Bonjour
3
*********************
Auto-IP
[ Exit ]

19 Press the OK key. Auto-IP appears.
Auto-IP: a b
1 Off
2 *On
*********************

20 Press the U or V key to select [Off] and then press
the OK key.

21 Press the U or V key to select [IP Address].
IPv4 Setting: a b
2 Bonjour
3 Auto-IP
4 IP Address
*********************
[ Exit ]

2-19

Preparation before Use

22 Press the OK key. IP Address appears.
IP Address: a b

123.145.167.189

23 Use the arrow keys to enter the IP address.
Press the Y or Z key to move the cursor position
horizontally.

Press the U or V key or the numeric keys to enter
the IP Address. Each 3 digits can be set between
000 and 255.

IMPORTANT: When the DHCP Setting (page 2-14) is
IP Address: b [On], the current IP address is displayed and cannot be
changed.
123.145.167.189
When setting an IP address, set the DHCP Setting
(page 2-14) to Off.

24 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the IPv4 Setting menu.

25 Press the U or V key to select [Subnet Mask].
IPv4 Setting: a b
3 IP Address
4 Subnet Mask
*********************
5 Default Gateway
[ Exit ]

26 Press the OK key. Subnet Mask appears.
Subnet Mask: a b

123.145.167.189

27 Use the arrow keys to enter the Subnet Mask.
Press the Y or Z key to move the cursor position
horizontally.

Press the U or V key or the numeric keys to enter
the Subnet Mask. Each 3 digits can be set between
000 and 255.

2-20

Press the Y or Z key to move the cursor position horizontally. Each 3 digits can be set between 000 and 255. Preparation before Use IMPORTANT: When the DHCP Setting (page 2-14) is [On]. 29 Press the U or V key to select [Default Gateway]. Completed. Completed. Press the U or V key or the numeric keys to enter the Default Gateway. set the DHCP Setting 2 (page 2-14) to Off. When setting an Subnet Mask. is displayed and the screen returns to the IPv4 Setting menu. the current Subnet Mask is displayed and cannot be changed.145. 32 Press the OK key. is displayed and the screen returns to the IPv4 Setting menu. IPv4 Setting: a b 3 IP Address 4 Subnet Mask 5 Default Gateway ********************* [ Exit ] 30 Press the OK key. Default Gateway: a b 123. 2-21 . IMPORTANT: When the DHCP Setting (page 2-14) is [On].167. set the DHCP Setting (page 2-14) to Off. 28 Press the OK key. the current Default Gateway is displayed and cannot be changed.189 31 Use the arrow keys to enter the Default Gateway. Default Gateway appears. When setting an Default Gateway.

NOTE: Installation on Windows XP. See Sleep and Auto Sleep on page 2-9. Windows Vista and Windows 7 must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges. Wake the device from Sleep Mode before continuing. 2-22 . Plug and Play is disabled on this device when in Sleep Mode. Server 2003. Preparation before Use Installing Software Install appropriate software on your PC from the included Product Library CD-ROM (Product Library) if you want to use the printer function of this machine or perform TWAIN / WIA transmission or FAX transmission from your PC. Windows 2000. FAX functions available only on products with the fax function installed.

g. If restrictions have been set for COMMAND CENTER. 1 Launch your Web browser. The default setting is admin00. E.168. network printing.21/ The web page displays basic information about the machine and COMMAND CENTER as well as their current status.48. E-mail transmission and advanced networking. For more information on using the FAX. information on the FAX settings has been omitted. enter the machine’s IP address. 2-23 . 2 In the Address or Location bar. Preparation before Use COMMAND CENTER (Settings for E-mail) COMMAND CENTER is a tool used for tasks such as verifying the operating status of the machine and changing the settings for security. The values for each category must be set separately. The password can be changed. 3 Select a category from the navigation bar on the left of the screen. The procedure for accessing COMMAND CENTER is explained below. refer to the FAX Operation Guide. FAX functions available only on products with the fax function installed. enter the correct password to access pages other than the startup page.) http://192. For details. refer to the KYOCERA COMMAND CENTER Operation Guide. 2 NOTE: Here.

• SMTP Settings Use COMMAND CENTER to register the IP address or host name of the SMTP server. • Sender address The procedure for specifying the SMTP settings is explained below. 2-24 . To use this function. 1 Click Advanced -> SMTP -> General. Before sending images loaded onto this machine as E-mail attachments. this machine must be connected to a mail server using the SMTP protocol. Preparation before Use Sending E-mail Specifying the SMTP settings allows you to send images loaded onto this machine as E-mail attachments. check the following: • The network environment used to connect this machine to the mail server A full-time connection via a LAN is recommended. • If limits have been set on the size of E-mail messages. it may not be possible to send very large E-mails.

Login User Name When Other is selected for Authenticate. The maximum length of the Login Password is 64 characters. the password set here will be used for authentication. The settings to be specified in the SMTP settings screen are shown below. POP before SMTP Enter the timeout (in seconds) if you chose POP before SMTP as the Timeout Authentication Protocol. It is often used for further identification of the machine. SMTP Server Timeout Enter the default time out for the server in seconds. Authenticate as Authentication can be set from three POP3 accounts or you can choose a different account. a DNS server address must also be configured. such as the machine administrator. Authentication Enables or disables the SMTP authentication protocol or sets POP before SMTP Protocol as the protocol. The DNS server address may be entered on the TCP/IP General tab. this protocol must be enabled. The maximum length of the SMTP server name and IP address is 64 characters. The maximum length of the sender address is 128 characters. Preparation before Use 2 Enter the correct settings in each field. Domain Restriction Enter the domain names that can be permitted or rejected. The maximum length of the signature is 512 characters. 3 Click Submit. When the value is 0. Sender Address Enter the E-mail address of the person responsible for the machine. You can also specify E-mail addresses. SMTP Server Name Enter the SMTP server IP address or its name. E-mail Size Limit Enter the maximum size of E-mail that can be sent in kilobytes. the limitation for E-mail size is disabled. 2-25 . The maximum length of the domain name is 32 characters. so that a reply or non-delivery report will go to a person rather than to the machine. Login Password When Other is selected for Authenticate. Item Description 2 SMTP Protocol Enables or disables SMTP protocol. the Login User Name set here will be used for SMTP authentication. Test This will test if the SMTP connection can be successfully established. The SMTP authentication supports Microsoft Exchange 2000. To use E-mail. Signature Enter the signature. The signature is free form text that will appear at the end of the E-mail body. The maximum length of the Login User Name is 64 characters. The sender address must be entered correctly for SMTP authentication. If entering the name. SMTP Port Number Set the SMTP Port Number or use the SMTP default port 25.

2-26 . 3 Raise the right and left hands alternately to create a gap and feed air between the papers. paper with holes or paper with pre-prints like logo or company name. 2 Hold the stack at both ends and stretch it while keeping the entire stack swelled. Avoid exposing opened paper to high temperatures and high humidity as dampness can be a cause of problems. align the papers on a level. Before Loading Paper When you open a new package of paper. 4 Finally. If the machine will not be used for a prolonged period. CAUTION: If you copy onto used paper (paper already used for copying). turn the stack in the cassette upside down. NOTE: If printouts are curled or not neatly stapled. fan the sheets to separate them slightly prior to loading in the following steps. straighten it before loading. protect all paper from humidity by removing it from the cassettes and sealing it in the paper storage bag. flat table. 1 Bend the whole set of sheets to swell them in the middle. If the paper is curled or folded. Preparation before Use Loading Paper Paper can be loaded standardly in the cassette and the multi purpose tray. NOTE: If you use special paper such as letterhead. refer to Paper on Appendix-11. Seal any remaining paper after loading in the multi purpose tray or cassettes back in the paper storage bag. This may damage the machine or cause poor image quality. Paper that is curled or folded may cause a jam. do not use paper that is stapled or clipped together. A paper feeder is also available as an option (refer to Optional Equipment on Appendix-2).

3 Adjust the position of the paper width guides located on the left and right sides of the cassette. IMPORTANT: To use a paper size that does not appear on the size dial. 1 Pull the cassette completely out of the machine. 2 Statement. Use the multi purpose tray for paper that is heavier than 163 g/m2. Executive. The standard cassette holds up to 250 sheets of Legal or smaller plain paper (80 g/m2). Legal. Other (Folio. 16K and Envelope C5) IMPORTANT: • You should not use inkjet printer paper or any paper with a special surface coating. recycled paper or color paper. A6. (Refer to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Cassettes on page 2-36) The cassettes can hold paper with weights up to 163 g/m2. IMPORTANT: When pulling the cassette out of the machine. always specify the media type setting. B5. set the size dial to "Other". see Specifying Paper Size and Media on page 2-36. The paper size set here is recognized by the machine. 2 Turn the Paper Size Dial until the paper size you are using is visible. Preparation before Use Loading Paper in the Cassettes The standard cassette will each hold plain paper. • Do not load thick paper that is heavier than 163 g/m2 in the cassettes. The paper size must also be set from the operation panel. Oficio II. ensure it is supported and does not fall out. 2-27 . (Such papers may cause paper jams or other faults. Letter. The following paper sizes are supported: A4. For details. A5.) • When using media types other than plain paper (such as recycled or colored paper).

keep the side that was closest the package seal facing up. Loading the paper without adjusting these guides may cause skewed feeding and paper jams. 4 Adjust the paper length guide to the paper size required. • The paper length and width guides must be adjusted to the paper size. • Before loading the paper. If there is a gap. 2-28 . Preparation before Use NOTE: Paper sizes are marked on the cassette. • When loading the paper. • Be sure that the paper length and width guides rest securely against the paper. 5 Load the paper in the cassette. • Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator (see illustration below). IMPORTANT: Do not load paper above the triangle mark located on the width guide. readjust the guides to fit the paper. Ensure the side to be printed is facing up and the paper is not folded. be sure that it is not curled or folded. curled. Paper that is curled or folded may cause paper jams. or damaged.

Preparation before Use 6 Insert the paper cassette into the slot in the machine. When paper is exhausted. (Refer to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Cassettes on page 2-36. NOTE: If the machine will not be used for a prolonged period.) 2-29 . recycled. confirm there is no paper left in the machine. etc. the pointer will go down to the level of (empty). 7 Select the media type (plain. Push it straight in as far as it will go. 2 There is a paper gauge on the right side of the front of the paper cassette to indicate the remaining paper supply.) loaded in the cassette. Be sure that the paper is properly set in the cassette. protect all paper from humidity by removing it from the cassettes and sealing it in the paper storage bag. IMPORTANT: When pulling out the cassette from the machine.

2 When using legal size paper. Envelope #6 (Commercial #6 3/4). • A4 or smaller plain paper (80 g/m2). Youkei 2: 5 sheets NOTE: When you load custom size paper. Envelope C5. Envelope #10 (Commercial #10). select the media type by referring to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray on page 2-41. pull out the sub tray. Youkei 4. set the media type to Thick. and 16K. enter the paper size by referring to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray on page 2-41. (Refer to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray on page 2-41. 2-30 . Envelope #9 (Commercial #9). 1 Pull the MP tray towards you until it stops. recycled paper or color paper: 50 sheets • Hagaki: 15 sheets • OHP film: 1 sheet • Envelope DL. Preparation before Use Loading Paper in the Multi Purpose Tray The multi purpose tray will hold up to 50 sheets of Legal or smaller plain paper (80 g/m2). Be sure to use the multi purpose tray when you print on any special paper. IMPORTANT: When using media types other than plain paper (such as recycled or colored paper).) If you are using a paper weight of 106 g/m2 or more. The capacity of the multi purpose tray is as follows. Monarch. The multi purpose tray accepts paper sizes from A4 to A6 and Hagaki and from Legal to Statement-R. always specify the media type setting. When you use special paper such as transparencies or thick paper.

Preparation before Use 3 Adjust the position of the paper guides on the MP tray. IMPORTANT: Keep the side that was closest the package seal facing up. Curled paper must be uncurled before use. If there is just a small amount of paper left over in the multi purpose tray and you want to add more. Straighten the top edge if it is curled. c ° 2-31 . 2 4 Align the paper with the paper guides and insert as far as it will go. Standard paper sizes are marked on the MP tray or Manual Feed tray. slide the paper guides to the corresponding mark. check that there is no paper left over in the tray from a previous job before loading the paper. When loading paper into the multi purpose tray. For standard paper sizes. first remove the left-over paper from the tray and include it with the new paper before loading the paper back into the tray.

2-32 . 2 When using legal size paper. Preparation before Use Loading Envelopes or Hagaki 5 envelopes may be loaded in the multi purpose tray. Acceptable envelope and Hagaki sizes are as follows. pull out the sub tray. Acceptable Envelope Size Hagaki 148×100 (mm) Oufuku Hagaki 148×200 (mm) Youkei 2 162×114 (mm) Youkei 4 235×105 (mm) Monarch 3 7/8"×7 1/2" Envelope #10 (Commercial #10) 4 1/8"×9 1/2" Envelope DL 110×220 (mm) Envelope C5 162×229 (mm) Executive 7 1/4"×10 1/2" Envelope #9 (Commercial #9) 3 7/8"×8 7/8" Envelope #6 (Commercial #6 3/4) 3 5/8"×6 1/2" ISO B5 176×250 (mm) 1 Pull the MP tray towards you until it stops.

Insert the envelope all the way along the width guides. Standard paper sizes are marked on the MP tray or Manual Feed tray. 2-33 . 5 For landscape form envelopes. keeping the printing side face-up and the edge with the flap left. slide the paper guides to the corresponding mark. 2 4 Align the paper with the paper guides and insert as far as it will go. For standard paper sizes. keeping the printing side face-up and the edge with the flap facing the front side. open the flap. Preparation before Use 3 Adjust the position of the paper guides on the MP tray. close the flap. For portrait form envelopes. Insert the envelope all the way along the width guides.

NOTE: When you load envelopes in the multi purpose tray. select the envelope type by referring to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray on page 2-41. 2-34 . Preparation before Use When you load envelopes or cardstock in the multi purpose tray Load envelope with the print side facing up. (Hagaki) Return postcard Portrait Landscape (Oufuku Hagaki) form form envelopes envelopes NOTE: Use unfolded return postcard (Oufuku Hagaki). Be sure to load it in correctly. otherwise printing may be done in the wrong direction or on the wrong face. IMPORTANT: If the Cardstock is warped. Close the flap. press on the warped area before putting it in the multi purpose tray. IMPORTANT: How to load envelopes (orientation and facing) will differ depending on the type of envelope. Cardstock Open the flap.

Preparation before Use Paper stopper To use the sheet ejection stopper. open as shown below. (Example: Legal) 2 2-35 .

16K. set the size dial to "Other" as described in Loading Paper in the Cassettes on page 2-27. specify the media type setting. you use a media type other than plain paper. Labels**. Statement. Cardstock**. Recycled. Coated**. Envelope #6 (Commercial #6 3/4)**. Rough. Preparation before Use Specifying Paper Size and Media The default paper size setting for cassette.Prepunched. Thick (163g/m2 or less). and then set the paper type as described in Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Cassettes on page 2-36. Envelope**. Cassettes Selection Item Selectable Size/Type Paper Size Select from the standard sizes. Thick (164g/m2 or more)**. A5. Folio and 16K ISO B5. Preprinted. Paper feeder Selection Item Selectable Size/Type Paper Size Select from the standard sizes. Legal. Thick (163g/m2 or less). B5. Inch size: Letter. Color. Letterhead. If the paper does not appear on the size dial. To set the paper used in the cassette when the paper is a frequently used paper. Plain. B5. Selectable paper sizes are as follows. set the paper size using the size dial as described in Loading Paper in the Cassettes on page 2-27. Folio. specify the paper size. Preprinted. (Refer to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray on page 2-41. Executive. Envelope C5. A5. High Quality and Custom 1~8 * For instructions on how to specify the custom paper size.  Rough. 2-36 . Prepunched. refer to Paper Weight on page 8-17. refer to Original/Paper Settings on page 8-8. A6.) Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Cassettes To fix the type of paper to be used in cassette or the optional paper feeder (cassettes 2 and 3). High Quality and Custom 1~8. Bond. and then set the paper size and paper type as described in Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Cassettes on page 2-36 To fix the type of paper to be used in multi purpose tray. ** Only on products with the paper feeder (multi purpose) installed *** To change to a media type other than Plain. and Oficio II Metric size: A4. and the default media type setting is [Plain]. Statement and Oficio II Metric size: A4. Recycled. Executive and Envelope C5 Media Type*** Plain. Legal. Color. Inch size: Letter. Youkei 2**. Also. Letterhead. Bond. specify the paper size setting. for multi purpose tray and for the optional paper feeder (cassettes 2 and 3) is [Letter]. Selectable paper sizes are as follows. Custom* Media Type*** Selectable media types are as follows.

Recycled. When you are performing user management and Login User Name: L b have not logged in. 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] 5 Press the U or V key to select [Orig.].: a b key to select [Common Settings]. Color. ******************** Then. 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* 7 Copy [ Exit ] 4 Press the OK key. Rough. 2 Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main unit operation panel. 3 In the Sys. Menu/Count. [ Login ] NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-7 for details on entering characters. enter the Login User Name and Login Login Password: Password to log in. 2-37 . The Common Settings menu Common Settings: a b appears. Menu/Count. a login screen will appear. Bond. menu./Paper Set. and High Quality 2 When the paper size appears on the size dial 1 Turn the size dial to set the paper size. Preparation before Use NOTE: If using the products equipped with the fax function. Plain. press the U or V Sys. the available media types for printing received faxes are as shown below.

Cassette 1 Type appears. Completed. Operate in a similar fashion when you select an optional cassette (Cassette 2 or 3). Follow the steps below when you select the main unit cassette (Cassette 1). 8 Press the OK key. The Orig./Paper Set.: a b appears. 2-38 . Cassette 1 Type: a b 1 *Plain ********************* 2 Rough 3 Recycled 11 Press the U or V key to select the desired paper type and then press the OK key. 1 Cassette 1 Type ********************* [ Exit ] 9 Select [Cassette 1 Type]. menu Orig.Size ********************* 2 Def.] are shown when the optional cassettes are installed.] to [Cassette 3 Set. 10 Press the OK key. Orig. Size 3 Custom PaperSize [ Exit ] 7 Press the U or V key to select from [Cassette 1 Set. NOTE: [Cassette 2 Set./Paper Set. menu. The Cassette 1 Set.: a b appears. is displayed and the screen returns to the Cassette 1 Set.]. Preparation before Use 6 Press the OK key. menu Cassette 1 Set.] and [Cassette 3 Set. 1 Custom Orig.

6 Press the OK key.: a b appears. enter the Login User Name and Login Login Password: Password to log in. The Orig.]. Menu/Count./Paper Set. menu Orig./Paper Set. menu. 1 Custom Orig. 2 2 Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main unit operation panel.: a b key to select [Common Settings]. press the U or V Sys. Preparation before Use When the paper size does not appear on the size dial 1 Turn the size dial to set "Other". 3 In the Sys. Orig. a login screen will appear. [ Login ] NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-7 for details on entering characters.Size ********************* 2 Def. Size 3 Custom PaperSize [ Exit ] 2-39 . 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* 7 Copy [ Exit ] 4 Press the OK key. ******************** Then./Paper Set. When you are performing user management and Login User Name: L b have not logged in. Menu/Count. 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] 5 Press the U or V key to select [Orig. The Common Settings menu Common Settings: a b appears.

NOTE: When the Paper Size Dial on the cassette is set to a standard paper size. this setting does not appear. Cassette 1 Size: a b 1 *Lettera ********************* 2 Legala 3 Statementa 11 Press the U or V key to select the desired paper size and then press the OK key. is displayed and the screen returns to the Cassette 1 Set.: a b appears. Completed. The Cassette 1 Set. NOTE: [Cassette 2] and [Cassette 3] are shown when the optional cassettes are installed. 1 Cassette 1 Size ********************* 2 Cassette 1 Type [ Exit ] 9 Press the U or V key to select [Cassette 1 Size].] to [Cassette 3 Set.].: a b 1 Cassette 1 Size 2 Cassette 1 Type ********************* [ Exit ] 2-40 . Cassette 1 Size appears. menu Cassette 1 Set. Cassette 1 Set. 10 Press the OK key. Operate in a similar fashion when you select an optional cassette (Cassette 2 or 3). 8 Press the OK key. menu. Follow the steps below when you select the main unit cassette (Cassette 1). 12 Press the U or V key to select [Cassette 1 Type]. Preparation before Use 7 Press the U or V key to select from [Cassette 1 Set.

Preprinted. Transparency. Thick. NOTE: If using the products equipped with the fax function and the multi purpose tray is used to print a received FAX.83~14. Inch size: Letter. High Quality and Custom 1~8* * To change to a media type other than Plain. B6. and Oficio II Metric size: A4. Selectable paper sizes Size Sizes are as follows. Envelope DL. Color. Statement. is displayed and the screen returns to the Cassette 1 Set. Envelope #9 (Commercial #9). Cardstock. Legal. Entry Selectable paper sizes are as follows. Hagaki. Recycled. Recycled. Bond. Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray To fix the type of paper to be used in the multi purpose tray. Plain.01" increments) Metric size X (Horizontal): 148~356 mm (in 1mm increments).76~8. Envelope. Labels. Bond. and High Quality 2-41 . Oufuku Hagaki. Youkei 4. Youkei 2 Size Enter the size not included in the standard size. Y (Vertical): 70~216 mm (in 1mm increments) Media Type Selectable media types are as follows. B5.01" increments). When using other than a plain paper. Inch size X (Horizontal): 5. Envelope #10 (Commercial #10). Envelope Monarch.02" (in 0. Vellum. Folio and 16K ISO B5. A6. Cassette 1 Type: a b 1 *Plain ********************* 2 Rough 3 Recycled 2 14 Press the U or V key to select the desired paper type and then press the OK key. Prepunched. the available media types are as shown below. Envelope C5. Rough. refer to Paper Weight on page 8-17. A5. Letterhead. Completed. Cassette 1 Type appears. Coated.50" (in 0. Envelope #6 (Commercial #6 3/4). menu. Item Description Paper Standard Select from the standard sizes. Color. Executive. specify the paper size. Preparation before Use 13 Press the OK key. Rough. Y (Vertical): 2. specify the media type. Plain.

1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] 4 Press the U or V key to select [Orig. Menu/Count./Paper Set.: a b key to select [Common Settings]. Menu/Count. 1 Custom Orig. menu. Preparation before Use 1 Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main unit operation panel. Size 3 Custom PaperSize [ Exit ] 6 Press the U or V key to select [MP Tray Set. enter the Login User Name and Login Login Password: Password to log in. 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* 7 Copy [ Exit ] 3 Press the OK key. ******************** Then. a login screen will appear. Orig. [ Login ] NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-7 for details on entering characters.: a b appears. The MP Tray Set.Size ********************* 2 Def. menu Orig. When you are performing user management and Login User Name: L b have not logged in.]./Paper Set.: a b appears. press the U or V Sys. 7 Press the OK key. menu MP Tray Set. 2-42 . 1 MP Tray Size ********************* 2 MP Tray Type [ Exit ] 8 Press the U or V key to select [MP Tray Size]. 2 In the Sys. The Common Settings menu Common Settings: a b appears. 5 Press the OK key.]./Paper Set. The Orig.

is displayed and the screen returns to the MP Tray Set. menu. use the numeric keys to Size Entry(Y): D b enter the Y (vertical) size and press the OK key. MP Tray Type appears.14. MP Tray Size appears. Completed. Preparation before Use 9 Press the OK key. MP Tray Type: a b 1 *Plain ********************* 2 Transparency 3 Rough 13 Press the U or V key to select the desired paper type and then press the OK key. is displayed and the screen returns to the MP Tray Set.83 . Completed. menu. (5. 2-43 . 11 Press the U or V key to select [MP Tray Type].02) and then enter the X (horizontal) size and press the x ***11.49*" OK key. MP Tray Set.: a b 1 MP Tray Size 2 MP Tray Type ********************* [ Exit ] 12 Press the OK key. 1 *ISO B5a ********************* 2 Envelope #10 3 Envelope #9 If you select [Size Entry]. MP Tray Size: a b 1 *Lettera ********************* 2 Legala 3 Statementa 2 10 Press the U or V key to select the desired paper MP Tray Size: a b size and then press the OK key.

Put the scanning side facedown and align it flush against the original size indicator plates with the back left corner as the reference point. 1 Open the document processor. IMPORTANT: Do not push the document processor forcefully when you close it. 2 Place the original. NOTE: Shadows may be produced around the edges and in the middle of open-faced originals. Placing Originals on the Platen You may place books or magazines on the platen in addition to ordinary sheet originals. Preparation before Use Loading Originals Follow the steps below to load originals for copying. The connector of the document processor will be removed form the machine. Excessive pressure may crack the platen glass. be sure that there are no originals left on the original table or on the original eject table. 2-44 . Do not close the document processor when the original is 25 mm or thicker. Originals left on the original table or on the original eject table may fall off when the document processor is opened. Keep the document processor open if the original is 25 mm or thicker. NOTE: Before opening the document processor. 3 Close the document processor. CAUTION: Do not leave the document processor open as there is a danger of personal injury. sending or storing.

2-45 . Both sides of two-sided originals are scanned. Recycled paper. High quality paper: 50 sheets Thick paper (110 g/m2): 36 sheets Thick paper (120 g/m2): 33 sheets Art paper: 1 sheet Originals Not Supported by the Document Processor Do not use the document processor for the following types of originals. • Soft originals such as vinyl sheets • Transparencies such as OHP film • Carbon paper • Originals with very slippery surfaces • Originals with adhesive tape or glue • Wet originals • Originals with correction fluid which is not dried • Irregularly shaped (non-rectangular) originals • Originals with cut-out sections • Crumpled paper • Originals with folds (Straighten the folds before loading. Failure to do so may cause the originals to jam). • Originals bound with clips or staples (Remove the clips or staples and straighten curls. Preparation before Use Loading Originals in the Document Processor The document processor automatically scans each sheet of multiple originals. wrinkles or creases before loading. Part Names of the Document Processor 2 (1) (1) Document processor cover (2) (2) Original width guides (3) (3) Original table (4) (4) Original eject table (5) (5) Original stopper (6) Opening handle (6) Originals Supported by the Document Processor The document processor supports the following types of originals. Colored paper. Weight 50 to 120 g/m2 (duplex: 50 to 110 g/m2) Size Maximum A4 to Minimum A5 Maximum Legal to Minimum Statement Capacity Plain paper. Failure to do so may cause the originals to jam).

If there is a gap. Originals with punched holes or perforated lines should be placed in such a way that the holes or perforations will be scanned last (not first). Preparation before Use How to Load Originals IMPORTANT: Before loading originals. Ensure that loaded originals do not exceed the level indicator. Put the side to be scanned (or the first side of two-sided originals) face-up. Originals left on the original eject table may cause the new originals to jam. Exceeding the maximum level may cause the originals to jam (see the figure). 1 Adjust the original width guides to fit the originals. Slide the leading edge into the document processor as far as it will go. 2-46 . be sure that there are no originals left on the original eject table. 2 Place the originals. readjust the original width guides. an automatic document feeder image will appear in the message display. IMPORTANT: Confirm that the original width guides exactly fit the originals. NOTE: When the original has been inserted to the correct position. The gap may cause the originals to jam.

the user account management window appears.exe. 2 Insert the CD-ROM supplied with the machine into the optical drive of the PC. 1 Turn on the computer and start up Windows. Installing Printer Driver in Windows 2 If you are connecting this machine to a Windows PC. Windows XP and Windows 2000. In Windows 7/Windows Vista. select Cancel. Windows Vista. Preparation before Use Installing Printer Driver Ensure the machine is plugged in and connected to the PC before installing the printer driver from the CD-ROM. follow the next steps to install the printer driver. NOTE: In Windows 7. Click Allow. you must be logged on with administrator privileges. You can use either Express Mode or Custom Mode to install the software. NOTE: If the software install wizard does not launch automatically. Click Accept. open the CD-ROM window in Windows Explorer and double-click Setup. Express Mode automatically detects connected machines and installs the required software. Use Custom Mode if you want to specify the printer port and select the software to be installed. 3 Click View License Agreement and read the License Agreement. The example shows you how to connect your machine to a Windows 7 PC. The installation program launches. 2-47 . If the Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box displays.

2 Select the print system to be installed and click Next. From this point. Use Express Mode for standard connection methods. 2-48 . 1 In the installation method selection window. • Express Mode • Custom Mode Express Mode In Express Mode. NOTE: While the information shown in Windows 7. Specify whether to share the print system name or set the print system as an existing machine and then click Next. If the installer does not detect a print system. the installation procedure is the same. 3 You can customize the print system name in the installation settings window. select Express Mode. The software install wizard starts up. the procedure differs depending on your version of Windows and your connection method. Windows Vista and Windows XP installation dialog boxes differs slightly. Proceed to the correct procedure for your connection type. This will be the name displayed in the Printer window and in the printer lists displayed in applications. Then return to the print system detection window. IMPORTANT: Step 3 only appears if the print system is connected via a network. the installer automatically detects the machine when it is turned on. check that the print system is connected via USB or a network and that it is turned on. The print system detection window appears and the installer detects the connected machines. Preparation before Use 4 Click Install Software. It does not appear if the print system is connected via a USB.

Click Finish to exit the printer installation wizard and return the CD-ROM main menu. NOTE: Install TWAIN driver or WIA driver on your computer in this mode. 2-49 . If the device setup dialog box appears after you click Finish. refer to Custom Installation in the printer driver operation guide on the CD-ROM. NOTE: If the Windows security window appears. 5 A message appears saying that the printer has been installed successfully. you can specify the settings for items such as optional features installed in the print system. Follow the on-screen instructions to restart the system. Custom Mode Use Custom Mode if you want to specify the printer port and select the software to be installed. For details. select Custom Mode and deselect the Fonts checkbox in the utility tab. etc. Preparation before Use 4 A window appears in which you can check the settings. Check the settings carefully and then click Install. if you do not want fonts installed on your computer to be replaced. select the software packages to be installed and the specify the port. 2 Following the instructions in the install wizard window. You can also specify the device settings after you exit the installation. 1 Select Custom Mode. refer to Device Settings in the printer driver operation guide on the CD-ROM. This completes the printer driver installation procedure. For example. click 2 Install this driver software anyway. if required. For details.

Preparation before Use Installing Printer Driver in Macintosh 1 Turn on the machne and the Macintosh.4 or higher depending on your Mac OS version. 5 Double-click Kyocera OS X vx. 2-50 . 4 Double-click either OS X 10. OS X 10.x. 6 The printer driver installation program starts up. 2 Insert the included CD-ROM (Product Library) into the CD-ROM drive.3 Only.4 Only or OS X 10.2 and 10. 3 Double-click the CD-ROM icon.

the machine is automatically recognized and connected. Next. In addition to Easy Install. Preparation before Use 7 Choose Select Destination. Installation Type and then install the printer driver as directed by the instructions in the installation software. the settings below are required. 9 Click the plus symbol (+) to add the installed printer driver. If an IP or AppleTalk connection is used. 8 Open System Preferences and click Print & Fax. the Installation Type options include Custom Install. which allows you 2 to specify the components to be installed. enter the name and password used to log in to the operating system. specify the print settings. This completes the printer driver installation. If a USB connection is used. 2-51 . IMPORTANT: In the Authenticate screen.

11 Select the options available for the machine and click Continue 12 The selected machine is added. Preparation before Use 10 Click the IP icon for an IP connection or the AppleTalk icon for an AppleTalk connection and then enter the IP address and printer name. This completes the printer setup procedure. 2-52 .

Preparation before Use Setting TWAIN Driver Register this machine to the TWAIN Driver. contact Administrator. NOTE: When the machine’s IP address is unknown. 5 Enter the machine's IP address or host name in the Scanner Address. 2-53 . If user login administration is invalid. 1 Select Start button of the Windows display. 2 Click Add. Kyocera and then TWAIN Driver 2 Setting. All Programs. 6 Click User Authentication Settings. 4 Click T next to the Model field and select this machine from the list. go to Step 8. 3 Enter the machine name in the Name field.

2-54 . Click Edit to change names. 8 Click OK. 9 The machine is registered to the PC and the machine name and model name are displayed in the Scanner List field. enter Login User Name (up to 64 characters) and Password (up to 64 characters) and then click OK. and then Scanners and Cameras. NOTE: Click Delete to delete the added machine. Hardware and Sound. The Scanners and Cameras screen appears. Preparation before Use 7 Select the checkbox beside Authentication. NOTE: The following is not necessary to register when using the machine possesses an IP address or host name that you have specified during installation of WIA Driver. Click Show scanners and cameras in the search list. Control Panel. 1 Click the Windows Start button and enter Scanner in Program and File Search. NOTE: In Windows Vista/Windows Server 2008. select the Windows Start button. Setting WIA Driver (Windows 7. Windows Vista and Windows Server 2008) Register this machine to the WIA Driver.

no trouble should be found with 2 operation after installing the driver and software we have provided. NOTE: If Windows Security and User Account Control are displayed. NOTE: When the machine’s IP address is unknown. The machine is registered to the PC. Continue installation. and press the Properties. If user login administration is invalid. 3 Select the checkbox beside Authentication. contact Administrator. 2-55 . go to Step 4. enter Login User Name (up to 64 characters) and Password (up to 64 characters) and then click OK. Preparation before Use 2 Select the same name as this machine from WIA Drivers. 4 Click Close.

Preparation before Use 2-56 .

.......... 3-50 • Checking Remaining Toner and Paper......................... 3-43 • Specifying Destination ...................................... 3-6 • Copying . 3-48 • Canceling Jobs ..................................... 3-7 • Printing ............................. 3-51 3-1 ............Printing from Applications ............................................................................................................................................................. 3-25 • Preparation for sending a document to a PC ...................................................................... 3-44 • Scanning using TWAIN ......................................... 3-2 • One-Touch Keys and Program Keys ........................... • Login/Logout....................................................... 3-32 • Confirm Destination Screen ............. 3-22 • Sending ..........3 Basic Operation This chapter explains the following operations............... 3-3 • Message Display ...........

In this event. Basic Operation Login/Logout If user login administration is enabled. press the Logout to return to the Login User Name/password entry screen. Login User Name: L b enter the Login User Name. The following are the default user's properties. NOTE: You will be unable to log in if you forget your Login User Name or Login Password. log in with administrator privileges and change your Login User Name or Login Password. User Name: DeviceAdmin Login User Name: 2600 Login Password: 2600 Access Level: Administrator It is recommended to periodically change the user name. ******************* Login Password: [ Login ] 2 Press the V key. it is necessary to enter the Login User Name and Login Password to use the machine. 3-2 . 4 Check the Login User Name and Login Password are correct. one of each default user with machine administrator rights and administrator privileges is already stored. Logout To logout from the machine. Login User Name and Login Password regularly for your security. 3 Enter the Login Password. Press the U key to move the input cursor to Login User Name. 1 If the screen shown appears during operations. By default. The input cursor moves to Login Password. Login NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-7 for details on entering characters. and press [Login] (the Right Select key).

: 1 p :sally@kyoceramitaN IMPORTANT: Any destination already entered is 1-sided 300x300dpi overwritten. and the stored address is Ready to send. 3 Entering Destination with One-touch Key 1 In Address Entry. Although the functions are deleted by overwriting Program 1 key. NOTE: The following functions are already registered in Program 1 key. you can change the current settings of various functions to the registered settings by just pressing the applicable program key. Zoom Options: Auto Zoom Combine: 2 in 1 Continuous Scan: On Original Size: Statement/A5 Paper Selection: Cassette 1 3-3 . and you can enter the desired destination by pressing the applicable one-touch key. 2 Complete. press the one-touch key where Address Entry: B b the desired destination is registered. One-Touch Key Register destinations to one-touch keys. Basic Operation One-Touch Keys and Program Keys The one-touch keys and program keys on the operation panel are described below. Then. Recalling from One-touch Keys 12 to 22 Press the Shift Lock key to turn on the indicator next to the keys. retrieved. Dest. This function allows you to copy the front and back sides of ID card or other document that is smaller than Statement or A5 size onto a single page. [ Duplex ] [ScanRes. appears. and then press the one-touch key where the destination is registered. refer to Adding a Destination on One-touch Key on page 8-145. For registering a destination to a one-touch key. you can register the same settings using the Function Menu key. * Recalling from One-touch Keys 1 to 11 ABC Press the one-touch key where the destination is [ Text ] registered.] Program Keys Settings of various functions frequently used for copying and sending can be collectively registered as a program.

3 Press the Program 1. 3-4 . The current settings are z Program 1 registered to the selected program key. 2 Place the original on the platen. 6 After scanning all originals. The procedure for using ID Card copying is explained below. NOTE: For loading instructions. Put the scanning side facedown in the center of Statement or A5 size scanning area. Scanning begins. 1 Press the Copy key when the Copy key/indicator is off. Basic Operation ID Card Copy is printed on the Program 1 key. press the Power key and wait for the machine to warm up. When the functions are deleted by overwriting Program 1 key. press [End Scan] (the Right Select key) to start copying. NOTE: If the Message Display is turned off. 5 Turn over the original on the platen and press the Start key. refer to Loading Originals on page 2-44. Recalled. The ID Card Copy function is recalled. press and hold the one of the Registered. Program 1 to 4 keys where you want to register the settings for 3 seconds. z Program 1 4 Press the Start key. Registering Settings After making settings. seal the label supplied with the machine and write the function name in it.

A confirmation screen z Program 1 appears. press the U or V key to select [Overwrite] Are you sure? and then press the OK key. [ Yes ] [ No ] Recalling Settings Press the one of the Program 1 to 4 keys where the settings you want to recall are registered. Press [Yes] (the z Program 1 Left Select key) to delete the registered settings. The current settings of various functions are replaced with the registered settings. settings. 2 Delete 3 2 To replace the registered settings with the current Overwrite. Basic Operation Changing and Deleting Settings 1 Press and hold the one of the Program 1 to 4 keys Menu: a b where the settings you want to change/delete are 1 Overwrite ********************* registered for 3 seconds. key to select [Delete] and then press the OK key. Menu appears. press the U or V Delete. 3-5 . [ Yes ] [ No ] To delete the registered settings. Are you sure? A confirmation screen appears. Press [Yes] (the Left Select key) to change the settings.

2 Displays an icon that indicates the currently selected source of paper feed. A The standard paper cassette is currently selected. there is no paper is the MP Tray. 7 Displays the paper size to be copied. B The paper cassette for the optional paper feeder is currently selected. 9 Displays the destination. 5 Displays the title of the corresponding menu that can be selected using the Left or Right Select keys. there is no paper is the cassette. 3-6 . When this icon is displayed as L . F The MP Tray is currently selected. When this icon is displayed as G .: 1 8 3 A4q sA A4a 7 p :sally@kyoceramitaN 9 4 100% 1-sided 4 5 [ Zoom ] [ ] [ Duplex ] [ ] 5 Copier Screen Send Screen Reference Meaning number 1 Indicates the current status of the machine. Also displays the title of the current menu whenever the operation panel is being used. 2 Copies: 1 6 Dest. 1 Ready to send. 6 Displays the number of copies. 8 Displays the number of destinations. 1 Ready to copy. The meaning of each icon is as indicated below. 3 Displays the size of the original(s). 4 Displays the current setting when there is a corresponding menu that can be selected using the Left or Right Select keys. C When this icon is displayed as H or I . there is no paper is the cassette. Basic Operation Message Display The following examples explain the messages and icons used on the message display.

NOTE: If the Message Display is turned off. NOTE: For loading instructions. 3-7 . displayed on the panel. the 1 * Auto ********************* most suitable paper source is automatically 2 A A4a Plain selected. If [Auto] is selected. 3 The paper source for copying is the location Ready to copy. 2 Place the originals on the platen or in the document processor. refer to Loading Originals on page 2-44. press the Power key and wait for the machine to warm up. Copies: 1 Letterq sA Lettera 100% [ Zoom ] [ Paper ] Paper source When you need to change the paper source. Basic Operation Copying Follow the steps as below for basic copying. Part that is operated 3 1 Press the Copy key when the Copy key/indicator is off. refer to Paper Selection on page 4-4. use Paper Selection: a b the Paper Selection menu. 3 B A5a Plain For specifying the paper source.

Auto Color key: Automatically detects whether the original is color or black & white and scans accordingly. Specify the desired number up to 999. 3-8 . Black& White key: Scans all documents in black & white. NOTE: The setting of each key (color mode) is as follows. Basic Operation 4 Press the Auto Color key. 5 Use the numeric keys to enter the copy quantity. Full Color key or Black& White key to select the color mode. 7 Remove the finished copies from the top tray. Full Color key: Scans all documents in full color. 6 Press the Start key to start copying.

automatic setting is not possible. 1 Paper Selection g ********************* 2 Collate T 3 Duplex T [ Exit ] 2 Press the U or V key to select [Density]. Basic Operation Adjusting Density Use this procedure to adjust the density when copying. 3-9 . Density appears. When the color mode is set to full color. Function Menu Function Menu: a b appears. Part that is operated NOTE: You may choose Auto mode as the default setting (refer to Density on page 8-37). 3 Press the OK key. Density Adjustment Option Description Manual Adjust density using 7 levels. 1 Press the Function Menu key. The procedure for adjusting the density of copies is explained below. Density: a b 1 Auto 2 *Manual ********************* 4 Press the U or V key to select [Auto] or [Manual]. Auto Optimum density is selected according 3 to the density of the original.

Manual appears. 3 w Lighter -1 Completed. Manual: a b 1 u Lighter -3 ********************* When [Manual] is selected. 2 v Lighter -2 Press the U or V key to select your desired density and then press the OK key. 3-10 . Copying begins. 6 Press the Start key. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen. Basic Operation 5 Press the OK key.

Part that is operated 3 The table below shows the quality options. Basic Operation Selecting Image Quality Select image quality suited to the type of original. Function Menu Function Menu: a b appears. 1 Press the Function Menu key. 3 Press the OK key. Photo For photos taken with a camera. Original Image: a b 1 *Text+Photo ********************* 2 Photo 3 Text 3-11 . The procedure for selecting the quality of copies is explained below. 1 Paper Selection g ********************* 2 Collate T 3 Duplex T [ Exit ] 2 Press the U or V key to select [Original Image]. Map For maps. Printed Document For documents printed from this machine. Image Quality Option Description Text+Photo For originals with both text and photographs. Text For originals primarily consisting of text. Original Image appears. etc.

5 Press the OK key. 6 Press the Start key. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen. Completed. 3-12 . Copying begins. Basic Operation 4 Press the U or V key to select the image quality suited to the type of original.

3-13 . Letter-R A4: 141 % Statement-R: 64 % A5 A6: 70 % Zoom Entry Manually reduces or enlarges the original image in 1% increments between 25% and 400%. 25 % 400 % Standard Zoom Reduces or enlarges at preset magnifications. The following zoom options are available. Part that is operated 3 Auto Zoom Legal: 129 % Automatically reduces or enlarges the original image suitably to the selected paper size. Basic Operation Zoom Copying Adjust the magnification to reduce or enlarge the original image.

25% (Min. 86% (A4 >> B5). 1 Paper Selection g ********************* 2 Collate T 3 Duplex T [ Exit ] 2 Press the U or V key to select [Zoom]. 400% (Max. 3-14 . Models 115% (B5 >> A4). 25% (Min. 115% (B5 >> A4).). 129% (Statement >> Letter). To select automatic zoom. select [Auto]. 50%. 90% (Folio >> A4). 200%. select [100%]. 400% (Max.) Other 141% (A5 >> A4). 141% (A5 >> A4). Models 78% (Legal >> Letter). 141% (A5 >> A4). 200%. Basic Operation The following magnifications are available. 90% (Folio >> A4).). 1 Press the Function Menu key.) Other 129% (Statement >> Letter). 78% (Legal >> Letter). Model Zoom Level (OriginalCopy) Inch Standard 100%. 64% (Letter >> Statement) The procedure for using zoom copying is explained below. 64% (Letter >> Statement) Metric Standard 100%. 86% (A4 >> B5). 90% (Folio >> A4). 400% (Max. Models 115% (B5 >> A4). To copy in the same size as the original. 25% (Min. (Asia 70% (A4 >> A5). 3 Press the OK key.). 78% (Legal >> Letter). Zoom appears. 50%. Function Menu Function Menu: a b appears. Zoom: a b 1 *100% ********************* 2 Auto 3 Standard Zoom 4 Press the U or V key to select the desired magnification. 70% (A4 >> A5).) Pacific) Other 129% (Statement >> Letter). 50%. 70% (A4 >> A5) Metric Standard 100%. 64% (Letter >> Statement). 200%. 86% (A4 >> B5).

Standard Zoom 1 400% ********************* appears. If you select [Other] and 3 141% A5 >> A4 press the OK key.400) numeric keys to enter the any magnification. select [Standard Standard Zoom: a b Zoom] and press the OK key. To enter a magnification. 3-15 . Press the U or V key to select the 2 200% desired magnification. Zoom Entry appears. select [Zoom Entry] and 3 Zoom Entry: D b press the OK key. 6 Press the Start key. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen. Copying begins. you can select from additional magnifications. *****200% 5 Press the OK key. Use the (25 . Completed. Basic Operation To use fixed magnifications.

def B Original Left/Right to Binding Top: Images on the Original Copy second sides are rotated 180°. facing the same orientation when turning the pages. In 5 case of an odd number of originals. 3 3 4 2 1 2 1 Original Copy The following binding options are available. ghi A B ghi def ghi abc abc abc A Original Left/Right to Binding Left/Right: Images on def the second sides are not rotated. Basic Operation Duplex Copying Produce two-sided copies. the back side of the 4 5 last copy will be blank. Two-sided to One-sided Copies each side of a two-sided original onto two 1 1 2 individual sheets. Part that is operated One-sided to Two-sided Produces two-sided copies from one-sided originals. The document processor is required. Copies can be bound on the top edge. Original Copy 3-16 . 2 The following binding options are available. The following modes are available. The following duplex options are available. You can also create single-sided copies from two-sided originals or originals with facing pages such as books.

Two-sided to Two-sided Produces two-sided copies from two-sided originals. 1 Paper Selection g ********************* 2 Collate T 3 Duplex T [ Exit ] 2 Press the U or V key to select [Duplex]. A4. Duplex appears. The procedure for using two-sided/duplex copying is explained below. B5. If you select [1-sided>>2-sided]. Binding: a b Right Select key) and you can select the binding 1 *o Left/Right ********************* edge of the finished copies and the original setting 2 p Top orientation. The document processor is required. Letter. A5 and Folio. Basic Operation • Binding Left/Right: Images on the second sides are not rotated. • Binding Top: Images on the second sides are rotated 180°. Executive. 3 Press the OK key. 3 Original Copy NOTE: The paper sizes supported in Two-sided to Two-sided are Legal. press [Detail] (the Finish. Oficio II. 3-17 . 1 Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu Function Menu: a b appears. Duplex: a b 1 *1-sided>>1-sided ********************* 2 1-sided>>2-sided 3 2-sided>>1-sided 4 Press the U or V key to select the desired duplex copying mode.

After pressing the OK key.Orientation: a b of the original and finished copies. and the original 1 *c Top Edge Top ********************* setting orientation. After pressing the OK key.Orientation: a b of the finished copies and the original setting 1 *c Top Edge Top ********************* orientation. 2 d Top Edge left 5 Press the OK key. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen. Completed. 2 d Top Edge left After pressing the OK key. press [Detail] (the Orig. and the original 1 *c Top Edge Top ********************* setting orientation. select the binding edge Orig. 2 d Top Edge left If you select [2-sided>>1-sided]. select the binding edge Orig. Basic Operation After pressing the OK key. 3-18 . select the binding edge Orig.Orientation: a b of the original and finished copies. Binding: a b of the finished copies and the original setting 1 *c Top Edge Top ********************* orientation. press [Detail] (the Orig. Binding: a b Right Select key) and you can select the binding 1 *o Left/Right ********************* edge of the original and the original setting 2 p Top orientation. 2 d Top Edge left If you select [2-sided>>2-sided]. select the binding edge Finish. Binding: a b Right Select key) and you can select the binding 1 *o Left/Right ********************* edge of the original and the original setting 2 p Top orientation.

press [End Scan] (the 3 Set original Right Select key). Page(s): 1 [ Cancel ] If there is no next original. and press Start key.. Copying begins.. Basic Operation 6 Press the Start key.: 9999 Page(s): 3 [ Cancel ] [End Scan] 3-19 . If the original is placed on the platen.: 9999 the next one before pressing the Start key. Scanning. replace it with Job No. Copying begins. Job No.

1 Paper Selection g ********************* 2 Collate T 3 Duplex T [ Exit ] 2 Press the U or V key to select [Collate]. Function Menu Function Menu: a b appears. Part that is operated You can use the Collate copy function for tasks such as those shown below. Basic Operation Collate Copying The machine can collate at the same time as it copies. Collate appears. 3 Press the OK key. 3 Scan multiple originals and deliver complete sets of 2 copies as required according to page number. 3 1 3 2 2 1 1 3 2 1 Original Copy The procedure for using collate copying is explained below. Collate: a b 1 Off 2 *On ********************* 4 Press the U or V key to select [Off] or [On]. 3-20 . 1 Press the Function Menu key.

is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen. 3 3-21 . 6 Press the Start key Copying begins. Basic Operation 5 Press the OK key. Completed.

Enter any number up to 999.Printing from Applications Follow the steps below to print documents from applications. NOTE: To print the document from applications. 1 Create a document using an application. The Print dialog box appears. 2 Click File and select Print in the application. 4 Enter the desired print quantity in the Number of copies box. install the printer driver on your computer from the supplied CD-ROM (Product Library). When there is more than one document. 3-22 . select Collate to print out one by one in the sequence of the page numbers. 5 Click Properties button. 3 Click the T button next to the Name field and select this machine from the list. The Properties dialog box appears. Basic Operation Printing .

either Portrait or Landscape. To print on the special paper such as thick paper or transparency. 8 Select paper orientation. Basic Operation 6 Select the Basic tab and click Page Size button to select the paper size. 9 Click OK button to return to the Print dialog box. papers are supplied automatically from the paper source loaded with paper of optimum size and type. 3-23 . click the Media Type menu and select the media type. NOTE: If you choose Auto Select. place it on the multi purpose tray and select MP Tray. To print on special paper such as envelope or thick paper. 10 Click OK button to start printing. to match the orientation of the document. Selecting Rotate 180° will print the document rotated 180°. 3 7 Click Source and select the paper source.

Basic Operation Printer Driver Help The printer driver includes Help. open the printer driver print settings screen and display Help as explained below. To learn about print settings. 3-24 . • Click the item you want to know about and press the [F1] key on your keyboard. • Click the [?] button in the upper right corner of the screen and then click the item you want to know about.

Basic Operation Sending This machine can send a scanned image as an attachment to an E-mail message or to a PC linked to the network. contact your administrator. it is necessary to register the sender and destination (recipient) address on the network.. the host name of the SMTP server.. Refer to Sending to Different Types of Destinations (Multi Sending) on page 3-47. you can also print the image or send it to the Document Box.page 3-28 • Send to Folder (FTP): Stores a scanned original image in a folder of an FTP server. • Detailed transmission settings (to select a Document Box as the destination or to print and send the image at the same time) Follow the steps below for basic sending. and the recipient.. The following four options are available.page 5-31 NOTE: Different sending options can be specified in combination. For setting-up the PC Folder..page 3-28 • Image Data Scanning with TWAIN / WIA: Scan the document using a TWAIN or WIA compatible application program. it is necessary to share the destination folder. It is recommended that a Local Area Network (LAN) be used to assist with transmission speed and security issues. including the E-mail setting on the machine. 3 At the same time as you send a scanned image. To use the Scanning Function perform the following steps: • Program the settings. • Use COMMAND CENTER (the internal HTML web page) to register the IP address..page 3-26 • Send to Folder (SMB): Stores a scanned original image in a shared folder of any PC. In order to do this. • Send as E-mail: Sends a scanned original image as an E-mail attachment.... 3-25 . • Register the destination in the Address Book or One-touch keys. A network environment which enables the machine to connect to a mail server is required. • When the PC Folder (SMB/FTP) is selected.

Address Entry appears. Basic Operation Send as E-mail Sends a scanned original image as an E-mail attachment. Address Entry: B b * ABC [ Text ] 3-26 . • Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-7 for details on entering characters. Displays the screen for sending. 2 Press the U or V key to select [E-mail]. Part that is operated NOTE: • You must have a network environment in which this machine can connect to a mail server. Send to: a b 1 p E-mail ********************* 2 G Folder(SMB) 3 H Folder(FTP) 3 Press the OK key. 1 Press the Send key. • Access the COMMAND CENTER beforehand and specify the settings required for sending e-mail. see COMMAND CENTER (Settings for E-mail) on page 2-23. It is recommended that the machine be used in an environment in which it can connect to the mail server at any time over a LAN. For details.

Repeat steps 2 to 5 to enter additional destinations. 7 Press the Start key. 6 If there are additional destinations. Then. screen returns to the basic screen. Confirm. the Confirm Destination screen appears when the Start key is pressed. is displayed and the 3 Ready to send. press the Confirm/Add Destination key. 5 Press the OK key. refer to Confirm Destination Screen on page 3-43. Completed.: a b confirm or delete the registered destinations. NOTE: Destination can be specified using the Address Book or the One-touch keys. Dest. Up to 100 destinations can be specified. NOTE: If the screen for confirming the destination before transmission (page 8-72) is set to [On]. Enter the same e-mail address again and press the OK key. p Morgan@kyoceramitaN ********************* Press the U or V key to select a destination and p aaaaaaaaa@kyoceramN press the OK key. a screen to [ Duplex ] [ScanRes. For more information. [ Add ] [ Exit ] Press [Exit] (the Right Select key) to return to the basic screen. Press the Confirm/Add Destination key to Dest. Press [Exit] (the Right Select key) to return to the basic screen.: 1 p :sally@kyoceramitaN NOTE: If the screen for confirming the entry of a new 1-sided 300x300dpi destination (page 8-72) is set to [On]. Transmission starts.] confirm the entered e-mail address appears. Refer to Specifying Destination on page 3-44. 3-27 . Basic Operation 4 Enter the destination e-mail address. you can edit or delete the p bbbbbbbbb@kyoceramN destination.

2 Press the U or V key to select [Folder(SMB)] or Send to: a b [Folder(FTP)]. Displays the screen for sending. 1 p E-mail 2 G Folder(SMB) ********************* 3 H Folder(FTP) 3-28 . Part that is operated NOTE: • Refer to Help of your operating system for details on how to share a folder. 1 Press the Send key. refer to the KYOCERA COMMAND CENTER Operation Guide. • Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-7 for details on entering characters. Stores a scanned original image in a folder of an FTP server. Basic Operation Send to Folder (SMB)/Send to Folder (FTP) Stores a scanned original image file in the specified shared folder of any PC. • Be sure that SMB Protocol or FTP in the COMMAND CENTER is On. For details.

A confirmation screen appears. You have to enter the Login User Name: C b account name of the destination PC. Osaka SD* ABC [ Text ] or 4 Enter the host name. Path appears. Are you sure? [ Yes ] [ No ] 3-29 . 3 Host Name(FTP): A b Osaka SD* NOTE: Destination can be specified using the ABC Address Book or the One-touch keys. Login Password appears. Check the connection. that the share Path: A b name but not the folder name on the destination SD3\report* PC has to be typed in. 6 Enter the path name. Basic Operation 3 Press the OK key. Maury* S ABC [ Text ] 9 Press the OK key. Login User Name appears. 11 Press the OK key. 5 Press the OK key. You have to enter the password of the account on the destination PC. Login Password: A b OOOOOOOOOOO* ABC [ Text ] 10 Enter the Login Password. 8 Enter the Login User Name. Host Name(SMB) or Host Host Name(SMB): A b Name(FTP) appears. ABC [ Text ] 7 Press the OK key. Consider. Refer to [ Text ] Specifying Destination on page 3-44.

characters Otherwise the data will be saved in the home directory.. enter using the format “host name: port number” (e. Login User FTP server log-in user name Up to 64 Name characters Login FTP server log-in password Up to 64 Password characters * To specify a port number different from the default (21). Data to be entered are as follows. Up to 128 For example. 3-30 . characters Path Path to the receiving folder such as Up to 128 follows. For send to folder (SMB) Max. For send to folder (FTP) Max.g. FTPhostname: 140). User\Sharename. User\ScanData. Contact your administrator and check your Login User Name or Login Password. abcdnet\james. Item Data to be entered characters Host Name Host name or IP address of FTP server Up to 64 (FTP)* characters Path Path to the receiving folder. Enter the same host name and path name again and press the OK key on their respective screens. Basic Operation NOTE: If the screen for confirming the entry of a new destination (page 8-72) is set to [On].g. screens to confirm the entered host name and path name appear. SMBhostname: 140).smith characters Login Password to access the PC Up to 64 Password characters * To specify a port number different from the default (139). Item Data to be entered characters Host Name Host name or IP address of the PC to Up to 64 (SMB)* receive the data. NOTE: You will be unable to send the data if you forget your Login User Name or Login Password. enter using the format “host name: port number” (e. Login User User name to access the PC Up to 64 Name For example. characters For example..

The screen shown in step 3 reappears. is displayed. For more information. the Confirm Destination screen appears when the Start key is pressed. you can edit or delete the destination. 3-31 . p Morgan@kyoceramitaN b 0667640000 ********************* b 0667741234 [ Add ] [ Exit ] 3 If the connection is successful. OSAKA SD ********************* Press the U or V key to select a destination and press the OK key. Repeat steps 2 to 12 to enter additional destinations. Confirm. This makes a Dest.: a b connection with the entered destination. NOTE: If the screen for confirming the destination before transmission (page 8-72) is set to [On]. Press [OK] (the Right Select key). Up to 100 destinations can be specified. Press [OK] (the Right Select key). [ Add ] [ Exit ] Press [Exit] (the Right Select key) to return to the basic screen. Transmission starts. Connected. 13 If there are additional destinations. Basic Operation 12 Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). Check and re- enter the destination. 15 Press the Start key. is displayed on the screen.: a b confirm the registered destinations. 14 Press the Confirm/Add Destination key to Dest. Cannot connect. Confirm. refer to Confirm Destination Screen on page 3-43. Then. press the Add Destination key. If the connection failed. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen.

Checking what to enter for [Host Name] Check the name of the destination computer. Click the Computer Name tab in the window that appears and check the computer name. select All Programs (or Programs). click the Cancel button to close the System Properties screen. (Example: PC4050) If there is a domain The characters to the left of the first dot (. select Computer and then System Properties. Checking what to enter for [Login User Name] Check the domain name and user name for logging onto Windows. Accessories and then Command Prompt. 3-32 . NOTE: Log on to Windows with administrator privileges.) in "Full computer name" should be entered in Host Name. (Example: pc4050) 2 After checking the computer name. Screens of Windows 7 are used in the following explanation. The System Properties dialog box appears. click the (Close) button to close the System Properties screen. Check the computer name in the window that appears. The Command Prompt window appears. If there is a workgroup All characters appearing in "Full computer name" should be entered in Host Name. In Windows XP. right-click My Computer and select Properties. after checking the computer name. The details of the screens will vary in other versions of Windows. In Windows XP. 1 From the Start menu. Basic Operation Preparation for sending a document to a PC Check the information that needs to be set on the machine and create a folder to receive the document on your computer. 1 From the Start menu.

Screen example: user name "james.smith" and domain name "ABCDNET" 3 3-33 . Basic Operation 2 At the Command Prompt. enter "net config workstation" and then click Enter.

Appearance and Personalization. click My Computer and select Folder Options in Tools. 3-34 . Windows XP. create a folder with the name "scannerdata" on the local disk (C). 3 Click the OK button to close the Folder Options screen. NOTE: For example. The scannerdata Properties dialog box appears. 1 Create a folder on the local disk (C). 2 Click the View tab and remove the checkmark from Use Sharing Wizard (Recommended) in Advanced settings. 2 Right-click the scannerdata folder and click Share and Advanced sharing. 1 From the Start menu. In Windows XP. and then Folder Options. click the View tab and remove the checkmark from Use Simple File Sharing (Recommended) in Advanced settings. configure the settings below to limit folder access to a specific user or group. select Control Panel. Basic Operation Creating a Shared Folder Create a shared folder to receive the document in the destination computer. Click the Advanced Sharing button. NOTE: If there is a workgroup in System Properties.

. (or Sharing). 5 Enter the user name in the text box and click the OK button.. 3 In Windows XP. select Share this folder and click the Permissions button. The Permissions for scannerdata dialog box appears. 3 Select the Share this folder checkbox and click the Permissions button. 4 Click the Add button. 3-35 . Basic Operation In Windows XP. right-click the scannerdata folder and select Sharing and Security.

click the Security tab and then click the Add button. In Windows XP. 8 Click the Security tab and then click the Edit button. NOTE: "Everyone" gives sharing permission to everyone on the network. 9 Proceed in the same way as in step 5 to add a user to Group or user names. In Windows XP. it is recommended that you select Everyone and remove the Read permission checkmark. select the Change and Read permissions. Basic Operation 6 Select the entered user. and click the OK button. 7 Click the OK button in the Advanced Sharing screen to close the screen. 3-36 . go to step 8. To strengthen security.

click Computers or people and then A computer on the network. double-click the scannerdata folder and check the address bar. enter the name of the computer that you checked (pc4050) and then click Search. click Search in the Start menu. In the "Computer name:" text box. 1 Enter "\pc4050" in "Program and File Search" in the Start menu. 2 Click "\pc4050\scannerdata" that appears in the search results. Check the address bar. select the Modify and Read & execute permissions. and then click the OK button. In Windows XP. Basic Operation 10 Select the added user. The third and following text strings (f ) should be entered for the path. double-click the computer ("pc4050") that appears in the search results. The text string to the right of the third backslash (\) should be entered in Path. and search for the destination computer to which the file will be sent. 3 Checking the [Path] Check the share name of the shared folder that will be the destination for the document. (Example: scannerdata) 3-37 . In Search Companion. 3 Check the folder that appears. select All files and folders. The Search Results screen opens. In Windows XP. In Windows XP.

In this case. 3-38 . "share name\name of folder in the shared folder" should be entered for the Path. In the example window above. Basic Operation NOTE: You can also specify a subfolder in the shared folder as the location where data is to be sent. "scannerdata\projectA" is the Path.

and Check firewall status. System and Security. Basic Operation Configuring Windows Firewall (for Windows 7) Permit sharing of files and printers and set the port used for SMB transmission. select Control Panel. click the Continue button. 3-39 . Adding a port 1 From the Start menu. NOTE: If the User Account Control dialog box appears. select Control Panel. System and Security. Checking file and printer sharing 3 1 From the Start menu. 2 Click Change settings. select the File and Printer Sharing checkbox. and Allow a program through Windows Firewall. NOTE: Log on to Windows with administrator privileges. and click OK.

3-40 . 5 Select Port and click Next. 4 Click New Rule. Basic Operation 2 Click Advanced settings. 3 Click Inbound Rules.

3-41 . and click Next. select Specific local ports. 3 7 Select Allow the connection and click Next. Basic Operation 6 Select TCP. 8 Make sure all checkboxes are selected and click Next. enter "139".

If the User Account Control dialog box appears. System and Security (or Security Center). 3 Specify Add a Port settings. button. 3-42 . Enter "139" in "Port Number". 2 Click the Exceptions tab and then the Add port. 4 Click the OK button to close the Add a Port dialog box. click the Continue button.. Basic Operation 9 Enter "Scan to SMB" in "Name" and click Finish. and then Check Firewall Status) (or Windows Firewall). Enter any name in "Name" (example: Scan to SMB). follow the procedure below to set the port. 1 From the Start menu. Select TCP for "Protocol". This will be the name of the new port.. select Control Panel. NOTE: In Windows XP or Windows Vista.

the screen displays Check the list through the end. p Morgan@kyoceramNa b 1 Detail 2 Delete 2 After the checking is finished. [ Cancel ] If there are destinations that are hidden and not yet Check the destination checked. 3-43 . is displayed on the screen. Check all destinations. appears when the Start key is pressed. and returns to the Destination List screen. Check through the all destination and press [Next]. b 0667741234 To add a destination. Press Start key. 1 Press the U or V key to check all destinations. Part that is operated 3 Use the procedure below to operate the Confirm Destination screen. destination list through the end. press [Cancel] (the Left [ Cancel ] [ Next ] Select key) to return to the previous screen. Basic Operation Confirm Destination Screen If the screen for confirming the destination before transmission (page 8-72) is set to [On]. Destination List: a b p Morgan@kyoceramitaN ********************* The OK key can be pressed to check details or b 0667640000 delete the selected address. Right Select key). press [Next] (the Press Start key.

Basic Operation 3 Place the original on the platen or in the document processor. l Maury [ Menu ] 3 Press the U or V key to select the desired user or group.N If you select a group. Address Book appears. select [Ext Address Book]. Transmission starts. t Address Book ********************* t Ext Address Book NOTE: If external address book is not registered. If you select a user. Specifying Destination When specifying destination. Part that is operated Choosing from the Address Book Select a destination registered in the Address Book. the list of destinations l Fiala: a b registered to the user appears. choose from the Address Book or use the One-touch keys. b 0667643277 ********************* p fiala@kyoceramita. press the Address Select Addr Book: a b Book key. k Design ********************* l Fiala To use an address book on the LDAP server. [Ext Address Book] is not displayed. proceed to step 5. SMB-PC [ Menu ] 3-44 . [ Exit ] 2 Press the U or V key to select [Address Book] and Address Book: a b then press the OK key. The Select Addr Book menu appears. and press the Start key. and then press the OK key. 1 In the basic screen for sending.

3 The procedures for using the different search modes are explained below. l Morgan l Sally [ Menu ] 3-45 . Destination Search Destinations registered in the Address Book can be searched. The address book appears with Address Book: a b the user that starts with the entered character l Maury ********************* string at the top. press [Menu] (the Right Select Menu: a b key). Search in Address Book 1 In Address Book. Search(Name): A b ma* S ABC [ Text ] 4 Press the OK key. A search screen k Design ********************* appears. 5 Completed. l Fiala l Maury [ Menu ] 3 Enter the characters you want to search. 1 Select ********************* 2 Detail 3 Search(Name) 2 Press the U or V key to select [Search(Name)] Address Book: a b and then press the OK key. Basic Operation 4 Press the U or V key to select the desired destination and then press the OK key. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen. Menu appears.

NOTE: Refer to Adding a Destination on One-touch Key on page 8-145 for more information on adding one- touch keys. 4 Press the OK key. 3-46 . Menu appears. Basic Operation Search in Extended Address Book 1 In Ext Address Book. press [Menu] (the Right Ext Address Book: a b Select key). Choosing by One-Touch Key Select the destination using the One-touch keys. In the basic screen for sending or the destination entry screen. l Fiala ********************* l Maury l Morgan [ Menu ] 2 Press the U or V key to select [Search] and then Menu: a b press the OK key. The address book appears with Ext Address Book: a b the user that starts with the entered character l Maury ********************* string at the top. Search by appears where you can specify the search key and match condition. press the one-touch key where the destination is registered. Search(Name): A b ma* If you press [Menu] (the Right Select key) and S then the OK key. A search screen appears. Then. l Morgan l Sally NOTE: If you first open the external address book. 1 Select 2 Detail 3 Search ********************* 3 Enter the characters you want to search. operate from step 3. the [ Menu ] search screen appears first. ABC Select the desired item for each and then press the [ Menu ] [ Text ] OK key.

Press the Start key to launch transmission to all destinations at one time. folders (SMB or FTP) and fax numbers (Only on products with the fax function installed). folders. etc. you can send and print at the same time. This is useful for sending to different types of destination (e-mail addresses. No. FTP) : Total of 1 SMB and FTP FAX : Up to 100 3 Also. Procedures are the same as used in specifying the destinations of respective types. of broadcast items E-mail : Up to 100 Folders (SMP. This is referred to as Multi Sending. 3-47 .) in a single operation. Basic Operation Sending to Different Types of Destinations (Multi Sending) You can specify destinations that combine e-mail addresses. depending on the settings. Continue to enter E-mail address or folder path so that they appear in the destination list.

3 Select scanning settings in the TWAIN dialog box that opens. The procedure for scanning using the TWAIN driver is explained as an example. The settings that appear in the TWAIN dialog box are as follows. see the Operation Guide or Help for each application software. 1 Activate the TWAIN compatible application. Basic Operation Scanning using TWAIN This section explains how to scan an original using TWAIN. 3-48 . 2 Select the machine using the application and display the TWAIN dialog box. NOTE: For selecting the machine. The WIA driver is used in the same way.

configuration Delete selected Delete saved settings. Orientation Send Duplex Setting Specify whether the original is one-sided or two-sided. and Delete selected configuration. Settings Select the Auto button to have the exposure set automatically based on the original. Basic Operation Item Detail Original Original Size Select the scan size of the original. Image Quality Select the image quality according to the type of original. 3-49 . a setting screen opens with buttons for Details. Details Current settings can be checked. 5 Click the Scan button The document data is scanned. When the Configuration button is clicked. configuration 4 Place the originals on the platen or in the document processor. Configurations 3 Image Quality Color Setting Select the color mode. Add current Save current settings with a name and comment. Configuration This is used to check current settings and store frequently used settings. Configurations Original Specify the type of binding. Add current configuration. Image Quality Density Select the exposure. Configurations Resolution Select the resolution.

and then press the OK key. 2 Cancel Job 4 Press the U or V key to select [Cancel Job] and Job will be canceled. Canceling Jobs You can also cancel jobs by pressing the Stop key. press the Stop Job Cancel List: a b key. 1 Print Job List ********************* 2 Send Job List NOTE: Pressing the Stop key pauses a printing job 3 Store Job List but does not pause a sending job. To cancel other jobs. The screen displays Canceling. Basic Operation Canceling Jobs Follow the steps below to cancel any print or send job being executed. repeat steps 3 to 5.. 0009 W maury's data s 0010 W MicrosoftworN s [ Resume ] [ Menu ] 3 Press the U or V key to select the job you want to Menu: a b stop. [ Exit ] 2 Press the U or V key to select the type of job you Print Job List: a b want to stop. A confirmation screen Are you sure? appears. The Job Cancel List menu appears. Menu appears.. and returns to the output queue of the selected job type after the job is canceled. 1 During a printing or sending job. z 0008 r Copy [ Yes ] [ No ] 5 Press [Yes] (the Right Select key). then press the OK key. and then press [Menu] (the Right Select 1 Detail ********************* key). An output 0008 r Copy s ********************** queue of the selected job type is displayed. 3-50 ..

The Status Status: a b menu appears. 3-51 . optional cassette (if installed) and MP Plain tray. 1 Print Job Status ********************* 2 Send Job Status 3 Store Job Status [ Pause ] 2 Press the U or V key to select [Paper Status]. Paper Status appears. Toner Status appears. Y VVVVE K VVVVE Checking Remaining Paper 1 Press the Status/Job Cancel key. Toner Status: b The remaining amount of toner is displayed in one C VVVVE M VVVVE of 5 levels. 3 Press the OK key. Basic Operation Checking Remaining Toner and Paper You can check the remaining amount of toner and that of paper in each feeder cassette. Checking Remaining Toner 1 Press the Status/Job Cancel key. Paper Status: C b Cassette 1: 1/ 4 Press the Y or Z key to switch the display of Lettera Empty remaining paper amount among the main unit cassette. 3 Press the OK key. The Status Status: a b menu appears. 1 Print Job Status ********************* 3 2 Send Job Status 3 Store Job Status [ Pause ] 2 Press the U or V key to select [Toner Status].

Basic Operation 3-52 .

................................................ 4-14 • Job Finish Notice ........................................................................................................... 4-15 • File Name Entry.............................. 4-11 • Continuous Scan ....................................................................................... • Original Size ..................................................................... 4-22 • Background Density .................................................................................. 4-8 • EcoPrint ........................ 4-25 4-1 ..4 Copying Functions This chapter explains the functions available for copying....... 4-2 • Paper Selection .......................................................................................................................................................................... 4-17 • Print Override ................ 4-19 • Color Balance ..... 4-20 • Sharpness ............................................ 4-10 • Combine Mode ....................................... 4-23 • Saturation .......................................................................................... 4-4 • Original Orientation.................... 4-18 • Color Selection ......

Youkei 4. Hagaki. 16K. Envelope custom sized Monarch. 1 Paper Selection g ********************* 2 Collate T 3 Duplex T [ Exit ] 4 Press the U or V key to select [Original Size]. Envelope originals*. Envelope #6. Envelope DL. Sizes standard sizes. 1 Press the Copy key. 3 Press the Function Menu key. Envelope #10. Legal. Be sure to select the original size before starting the copying process. C5. Statement. Oufuku Hagaki. A5. ISO B5. Item How to Select Sizes Standard Select from Letter. refer to Custom Original Size Setup on page 8-8. Executive. envelope. A6. Use the procedure below to select the original size. 4-2 . B6. 2 Place the originals on the platen or in the document processor. Folio. B5. Oficio II. Function Menu Function Menu: a b appears. A4. postcard or the Envelope #9. Youkei 2 and Custom * For instructions on how to specify the custom original size. Copying Functions Original Size Specify the size of originals being scanned. Part that is operated The following options are available.

Original Size appears. Original Size: a b 1 *Letterq ********************* 2 Legalq 3 Statementq 6 Press the U or V key to select the desired original Original Size: a b size and then press the OK key. 1 *ISO B5q ********************* 2 Envelope #10 Completed. 3 Envelope #9 7 Press the Start key to start copying. Copying Functions 5 Press the OK key. is displayed and the screen returns to 4 the basic screen for copying. 4-3 .

5 Press the OK key. 1 Press the Copy key. Part that is operated NOTE: Specify in advance the size and type of the paper loaded in the cassette (refer to Original/Paper Settings on page 8-8). 4-4 . 1 Paper Selection g ********************* 2 Collate T 3 Duplex T [ Exit ] 4 Press the U or V key to select [Paper Selection]. Function Menu Function Menu: a b appears. Selecting the Cassette Use the procedure below to select the paper supply cassette. 2 Place the originals on the platen or in the document processor. the paper matching the size of the original is selected automatically. Paper Selection: a b 1 * Auto ********************* 2 A Lettera Plain 3 B Customa Plain 6 Press the U or V key to select the desired paper size. 3 Press the Function Menu key. Paper Selection appears. Copying Functions Paper Selection Select the paper source that contains the required paper size. If [Auto] is selected.

** The input units can be changed in the System menu. Youkei 2 and Custom* Size Enter the Inch models Entry size not Horizontal: 5. Copying Functions 7 Press the OK key. A6.83 to 14. Selecting the Multi Purpose Tray Change the paper size and media type. Color. Recycled. Rough. Hagaki. Horizontal: 148 to 356 mm (in 1 mm increments) Media Plain. Envelope the custom Monarch. Custom 1 to 8*** * For instructions on how to specify the custom paper size (Custom).50" (in 0. Bond. Legal.76 the standard to 8. Envelope postcard or #9. Envelope #6. 4 How to Category Item Sizes Select Paper Standard Select from Letter. B5. Envelope DL. Completed. 16K. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for copying. 4-5 . The available paper sizes and media types are shown in the table below. sized paper Envelope C5. Metric models Vertical: 70 to 216 mm (in 1 mm increments). refer to Paper Weight on page 8-17. Prepunched***. Cardstock. Refer to Switching Unit of Measurement on page 8-26. B6. ISO envelope. Oufuku Hagaki. To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead. Envelope #10. 8 Press the Start key to start copying. B5. Transparency. NOTE: You can conveniently select in advance the size and type of paper that will be used often and set them as default (refer to Paper Size and Media Type Setup for Multi Purpose Tray on page 8-15). Vellum. Oficio II. Envelope. A4. size. refer to Adding a Custom Size and Media Type for Paper to Print on page 8-11. Thick. Labels.02" (in included in 0.01" increments) sizes 1 and 2**. High Quality.01" increments). Statement. refer to Special Paper Action on page 8-23. Folio. Coated. Letterhead***. Type Preprinted***. *** For instructions on how to specify the custom paper types 1 to 8. Youkei 4. A5. Size Sizes the standard Executive. Vertical: 2.

Function Menu Function Menu: a b appears.14.02) and then enter the X (horizontal) size and press the x 11. Copying Functions Use the procedure below to select the paper size and media type. Paper Selection: a b 1 * Auto ********************* 2 A A4a Plain 3 B A5a Plain 6 Press the U or V key to select [MP Tray Set. 3 Rough 4-6 . 2 Place the originals on the platen or in the document processor. 1 Paper Selection g ********************* 2 Collate T 3 Duplex T [ Exit ] 4 Press the U or V key to select [Paper Selection]. If you select [Size Entry].83 . 5 Press the OK key. 1 Press the Copy key.: a b 1 *Standard Size ********************* 2 Size Entry 8 Press the U or V key to select [Standard Size] or [Size Entry] and press the OK key. and then press the OK key. using the numeric keys to Size Entry(Y): D b enter the Y (vertical) size and press the OK key. 9 Press the U or V key to select the desired paper Media Type: a b type and then press the OK key. select the desired paper size. 1 *Plain ********************* 2 Transparency Completed.49 " ****** OK key. 7 Press the OK key. (5.]. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for copying. MP Tray Set. appears. Paper Selection appears. MP Tray Set. 3 Press the Function Menu key.

11 Press the Start key to start copying. Copying Functions 10 Place paper in the multi purpose tray. 4 4-7 . and then press the OK key. is displayed during the copying process. If Add paper in MP tray. add paper in the multi purpose tray. Copying then resumes.

refer to Orig. 4-8 . • Duplex • Combine mode When placing originals on the platen [Top Edge Top] [Top Edge Left] When placing originals on the document processor [Top Edge Top] [Top Edge Left] NOTE: To change the default setting for the original orientation.Orientation on page 8-29. Copying Functions Original Orientation Select the original orientation to use the following functions.

Orientation]. 1 Press the Copy key. 8 Press the Start key to start copying. 2 Place the originals on the platen or in the document processor. 5 Press the OK key. 4-9 . Orig.Orientation: a b 1 c Top Edge Top 2 *d Top Edge Left ********************* 6 Press the U or V key to select [Top Edge Top] or [Top Edge Left]. 7 Press the OK key. Orig. 1 Paper Selection g ********************* 2 Collate T 3 Duplex T 4 [ Exit ] 4 Press the U or V key to select [Orig. 3 Press the Function Menu key. Copying Functions Use the procedure below to select the orientation when placing the originals on the platen.Orientation appears. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for copying. Completed. Function Menu Function Menu: a b appears.

3 Press the Function Menu key. 7 Press the Start key to start copying. EcoPrint appears. Function Menu Function Menu: a b appears. Use this function for test copies or any other occasion where high quality print is unnecessary. 2 Place the originals on the platen or in the document processor. EcoPrint: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On 6 Press the U or V key to select [On] and then press the OK key. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for copying. 1 Paper Selection g ********************* 2 Collate T 3 Duplex T [ Exit ] 4 Press the U or V key to select [EcoPrint]. 5 Press the OK key. 1 Press the Copy key. Completed. Copying Functions EcoPrint Use EcoPrint to save toner when printing. The procedure for making copies using EcoPrint is explained below. 4-10 .

The following 2-in-1 options and output orientations are available. Part that is operated 4 NOTE: Combine mode is available for the copy paper sizes of Folio. The page boundary of each original can be indicated. Oficio II. 2-in-1 mode or 4-in-1 mode. This mode can be used with Duplex mode to copy four originals onto one sheet. A4. be sure to copy the originals in page order. B5. Letter. 4-11 . Copying Functions Combine Mode This mode allows you to copy 2 or 4 originals combined onto a single page. 2-in-1 Mode For copying two originals onto a single sheet. Statement and 16K. Original Copy Orientation of Original Platen Document processor NOTE: When placing the original on the platen. Legal.

Original Copy Orientation of Original Platen Document processor NOTE: When placing the original on the platen. 4-12 . This mode can be used with Duplex mode to copy eight originals onto one sheet. None Solid Dotted Positioning Mark The procedure for using Combine mode copying is explained below. Types of Page Boundary Lines The following types of the boundary lines are available. be sure to copy the originals in page order. 1 Press the Copy key. Copying Functions 4-in-1 Mode For copying four originals onto a single sheet. The following 4-in-1 options and output orientations are available.

If the original is placed on the platen. Combine: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 2 in 1 3 4 in 1 [ Detail ] 6 Press the U or V key to select [2 in1] or [4 in 1]. 7 Press [Detail] (the Right Select key). is displayed and the screen returns to 2 *d Top Edge Left ********************* the basic screen for copying. 11 Press the Start key. 4 5 Press the OK key. 1 Paper Selection g ********************* 2 Collate T 3 Duplex T [ Exit ] 4 Press the U or V key to select [Combine]. Combine appears. press [End Scan] (the Right Select key) to start copying.Orientation: a b the original and then press the OK key. 4-13 . Copying Functions 2 Place the originals on the platen or in the document processor. Scanning begins. 8 Press the U or V key to select the desired layout 2 in 1 Layout: a b and then press the OK key. 1 *g L to R f T to B ********************* 2 e R to L 9 Press the U or V key to select the desired border Border Line: a b line type and then press the OK key. 1 * None ********************* 2 l Solid Line 3 m Dotted Line 10 Press the U or V key to select the orientation of Orig. 3 Press the Function Menu key. After scanning all originals. replace the original and press the Start key. 1 c Top Edge Top Completed. Function Menu Function Menu: a b appears.

Continuous Scan appears. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for copying. 1 Press the Copy key. 4 Press the OK key. 6 Place the originals in the document processor or on the platen and press the Start key. Copying Functions Continuous Scan When a large number of originals cannot be placed in the document processor at one time. Continuous Scan: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On 5 Press the U or V key to select [On] and then press the OK key. press [End Scan] (the Right Select key) to start copying. After scanning all originals. 4-14 . With this function. Completed. 7 Place the next original and press the Start key. the originals can be scanned in separate batches and then copied as one job. 2 Press the Function Menu key. The procedure for making copies using Continuous Scan is explained below. 1 Paper Selection g ********************* 2 Collate T 3 Duplex T [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [Continuous Scan]. originals are scanned until you press [End Scan] (the Right Select key). Function Menu Function Menu: a b appears. Repeat these steps to scan the remaining originals.

net Subject: 1234 Job end report mail Job No. Example of Job Finish Notice 4 To: h_pttr@owl-net. 3 Press the Function Menu key. User can be notified of the completion of a copy job while working at a remote desk. 2 Place the originals on the platen or in the document processor. saving the time spent waiting beside the machine for copying to finish.: 000002 Result: OK End Time: Wed 28 Apr 2010 14:56:08 File Name: doc28042010145608 Job Type: Copy ------------------------------------------------ 1234 [00:c0:ee:d0:01:14] ------------------------------------------------ Use the procedure below to enable job finish notification when making copies. NOTE: PC should be configured in advance so that E-mail can be used. Copying Functions Job Finish Notice Sends a notice by E-mail when a copy job is complete. 4-15 . 1 Press the Copy key. Function Menu Function Menu: a b appears. 1 Paper Selection g ********************* 2 Collate T 3 Duplex T [ Exit ] 4 Press the U or V key to select [JobFinish Notice].

Copying Functions 5 Press the OK key.jp NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on ABC Appendix-7 for details on entering characters. p Maury Press [Menu] (the Right Select key). p Fiala ********************* and then select the notice destination. Completed. enter the address of Address Entry: B b the notice destination. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for copying. an E-mail notice is sent to the selected destination. select p Morgan [Detail] on the next screen and press the OK key to [ Menu ] view the details of the selected notice destination. and then press the OK key. [ Text ] 9 Press the OK key. 7 Press the U or V key to select [Address Book] or Destination: a b [Address Entry]. Upon completion of the job. 4-16 . ******@abcdefg. JobFinish Notice appears. 1 *Address Book ********************* 2 Address Entry 8 If you select [Address Book]. JobFinish Notice: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On 6 Press the U or V key to select [On] and then press the OK key. select [Address Address Book: a b Book] on the next screen and press the OK key. If you select [Address Entry]. 10 Press the Start key to start copying.

7 Enter the date. NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-7 for details on entering characters. date and time. Copying Functions File Name Entry Names a copy job. 4 3 Press the Function Menu key. 5 Press the OK key. NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-7 for details on entering characters. 1 Paper Selection g ********************* 2 Collate T 3 Duplex T [ Exit ] 4 Press the U or V key to select [File Name Entry]. 2 Place the originals on the platen or in the document processor. press the OK key. 4-17 . appears. 1 Press the Copy key. You can check a job history or job status using the job name. etc. File Name Entry: A b File_2010* S ABC [ Text ] 6 Enter the file name. File Name Entry appears. on the screen. or job number specified here. Additional Info. 8 Press the Start key to start copying. Use the procedure below to assign a name to your copy job. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for copying. Function Menu Function Menu: a b appears. Completed. job number. and then press the OK key. Add other information such as date and time or job number as necessary.

5 Press the OK key. 6 Perform the interrupt copy job in the same fashion as a normal copy job. the machine resumes the suspended print job. 3 Press the OK key. 1 Paper Selection g ********************* 2 Collate T 3 Duplex T [ Exit ] 2 Press the U or V key to select [Print Override]. Function Menu Function Menu: a b appears. is displayed. When the interrupt copy job is completed. Completed. the machine resumes the suspended print job. the machine is put into the interruption copy mode. 4-18 . Print Override appears. Copying Functions Print Override This function allows you to suspend the current print job when you need to make copies immediately. 1 Press the Function Menu key. and the basic screen appears. Print Override: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On 4 Press the U or V key to select [On]. When the interrupt copy job is completed.

is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for copying. Copying Functions Color Selection Select the color mode for copying. 4-19 . Color Selection appears. 7 Press the Start key to start copying. 4 1 Paper Selection g ********************* 2 Collate T 3 Duplex T [ Exit ] 4 Press the U or V key to select [Color Selection]. To select the color mode. Full Color key or Black & White key. Color Selection: a b 1 *Auto Color ********************* 2 Full Color 3 Black & White 6 Press the U or V key to select the desired color mode and then press the OK key. 2 Place the originals on the platen or in the document processor. 1 Press the Copy key. you can also select from the Auto Color key. Function Menu Function Menu: a b appears. Completed. 5 Press the OK key. 3 Press the Function Menu key.

5 Press the OK key. Color Balance: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On 6 Press the U or V key to select [On]. yellow. A selection menu for the color to Color Balance: a b be adjusted appears. Refer to the sample image in Color balance adjustment on Appendix-21. 1 Paper Selection g ********************* 2 Collate T 3 Duplex T [ Exit ] 4 Press the U or V key to select [Color Balance]. 1 Press the Copy key. The color adjustment menu Cyan: a b appears. magenta. Function Menu Function Menu: a b appears. Follow the steps below to adjust color balance. 9 Press the OK key. 1 *-5 ********************* 2 -4 3 -3 4-20 . 2 Place the originals on the platen or in the document processor. 3 Press the Function Menu key. This feature can not be used together with Adjusting Density on page 3-9. and black to make fine hue adjustments. Copying Functions Color Balance Adjust the strength of cyan. 1 Cyan ********************* 2 Magenta 3 Yellow 8 Press the U or V key to select the color to be adjusted. 7 Press the OK key. NOTE: This feature is used with full color copying. Color Balance appears.

and a larger positive value makes the color more intense. Completed. 12 Press the Start key to start copying. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for copying. 11 Press the OK key. 4 4-21 . A larger negative value makes the color fainter. Copying Functions 10 Press the U or V key to select the color intensity.

8 Press the Start key to start copying. 1 Press the Copy key. A larger negative value decreases the sharpness. 5 Press the OK key. clear copies can be taken by adjusting sharpness toward [Sharpen]. Copying Functions Sharpness Adjust the sharpness of image outlines. in which moire* patterns appear. Completed. When copying penciled originals with rough or broken lines. Follow the steps below to adjust sharpness. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for copying. 2 Place the originals on the platen or in the document processor. Function Menu Function Menu: a b appears. Sharpness appears. 3 Press the Function Menu key. 1 Paper Selection g ********************* 2 Collate T 3 Duplex T [ Exit ] 4 Press the U or V key to select [Sharpness]. and a larger positive value increases the sharpness. 4-22 . * Patterns that are created by irregular distribution of halftone dots. edge softening and weakening of the moire effect can be obtained by setting the sharpness toward [Unsharpen]. When copying images made up of patterned dots such as magazine photos. Sharpness: a b 1 *-3(Unsharpen) ********************* 2 -2 3 -1 6 Press the U or V key to adjust the sharpness. Refer to the sample image in Appendix-22. 7 Press the OK key.

2 Place the originals on the platen or in the document processor. 1 Press the Copy key. Backgrnd Density appears. NOTE: This feature is used with full color and auto color copying. Copying Functions Background Density Lightens the background of color originals with dark backgrounds. A setting menu for the density of Backgrnd Density: a b the ground color appears. 1 Paper Selection g ********************* 2 Collate T 3 Duplex T [ Exit ] 4 Press the U or V key to select [Backgrnd Density]. Function Menu Function Menu: a b appears. 7 Press the OK key. 1 1 (Lighter) ********************* 2 2 3 3 4-23 . Background Density Adjust is disabled during auto color copying when the a black & white original has been detected. 5 Press the OK key. 3 Press the Function Menu key. Backgrnd Density: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On 6 Press the U or V key to select [On]. 4 Original Copy Follow the steps below to use background density adjust.

and a larger value increases the density. 4-24 . 9 Press the OK key. 10 Press the Start key to start copying. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for copying. Completed. A smaller value decreases the density of the ground color. Copying Functions 8 Press the U or V key to select the density of the ground color.

resulting in more vivid color. 4-25 . 8 Press the Start key to start copying. Completed. 7 Press the OK key. The procedure for adjusting the color saturation is explained below. 2 Place the originals on the platen or in the document processor. A larger positive value increases the saturation. Saturation: a b 1 *-3(Grayish) ********************* 2 -2 3 -1 6 Press the U or V key to adjust the color saturation. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for copying. Function Menu: a b 3 Press the Function Menu key. Copying Functions Saturation Adjust the color saturation of the image. 1 Paper Selection g ********************* 2 Collate T 3 Duplex T [ Exit ] 4 Press the U or V key to select [Saturation]. 1 Press the Copy key. Saturation appears. 5 Press the OK key. Function Menu 4 appears. A larger negative value reduces the saturation. resulting in paler color in the copy.

Copying Functions 4-26 .

........................................... 5-26 • Job Finish Notice ............................................................................ 5-8 • Original Orientation.......................................................... 5-21 • Subject and Body Entry ........... 5-18 • Color / Grayscale / Black and White Selection .............................................................. • Original Size ................................... 5-19 • Continuous Scan ............................ 5-16 • Scan Resolution ................................................ 5-4 • Zoom ................... 5-22 • Sharpness ........................................................................ 5-28 • FTP Encrypted TX . 5-30 • Scanning Image using Application .... 5-31 5-1 ............................................... 5-15 • Adjusting Density.................................................................. 5-6 • Duplex Sending .................................. 5-23 • Background Density .................................................... 5-14 • Original Image ...... 5-24 • WSD Scan ........ 5-12 • File Separation ...................................................................... 5-31 • About Color Profiles......................................... 5-2 • Sending Size .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................5 Sending Functions This chapter explains the functions available for sending originals..................... 5-10 • File Format ............................................................................................. 5-20 • File Name Entry..............................

Be sure to select the original size before starting the sending process. Envelope Monarch. Statement. Hagaki. Oficio II. Legal. Use the procedure below to select the original size when sending scanned images. Envelope DL. Envelope #6. Hagaki and 16K. Part that is operated Choose the original size from the following groups of original size. Oufuku Hagaki. 2 Place the originals on the platen or in the document processor. B6. Function Menu Function Menu: a b appears. Youkei 2 and Custom * Regarding the setting method of Custom Original Size. Executive. 1 Color Selection g ********************* 2 Original Size T 3 Original Image T [ Exit ] 4 Press the U or V key to select [Original Size]. refer to Custom Original Size Setup on page 8-8. Folio. 3 Press the Function Menu key. Youkei 4. A4. Envelope #10. B5. A5. Size *. Sending Functions Original Size Select the size of originals that will serve as the basis for scanning. Envelope Custom Original #9. A6. Item Detail Size Standard Select from Letter. Envelope C5. 5-2 . ISO B5. 1 Press the Send key. Sizes standard sizes.

and press the Start key to start sending. Original Size: a b 1 *Letterq ********************* 2 Legalq 3 Statementq 6 Press the U or V key to select the desired original Original Size: a b size and then press the OK key. ? Envelope #9 5 7 Specify the destination. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for sending. = *ISO B5q ********************* > Envelope #10 Completed. Original Size appears. Sending Functions 5 Press the OK key. 5-3 .

A5. Oufuku Hagaki. and Zoom (page 5-6) are related to each other. Folio and 16K. Use the procedure below to select the size for transmission when sending scanned images. envelope. Letter. refer to Custom Original Size Setup on page 8-8. Legal. ISO B5. Sending Size. originals*. Relationship between Original Size. Envelope #9. Envelope C5. Part that is operated The table below lists the sizes. A4. Item Detail Size Standard Select from Same Same as OrigSize. and Zoom Original Size (page 5-2). Sizes as Original Size. A6. Envelope Monarch. B5. Hagaki. Sending Size. Envelope or the custom sized #6. postcard Envelope #10. you can send the image as the actual size (No Zoom). and select the Zoom [100%]. Statement. Refer to the following table. Offcio II. Original Size and the size you the same different wish to send as are Original Size Specify as Specify as necessary necessary Sending Size Select [Same as Select the OrigSize] required size Zoom Select [100%] Select [Auto] (or [Auto]) NOTE: When you select Sending Size that is different from Original Size. Executive. Standard Size. 5-4 . Sending Functions Sending Size Select the sending size (the size of image to be sent). B6. Envelope DL. Youkei 4 and Youkei 2 * For instructions on how to specify the custom original size.

Sending Functions

1 Press the Send key.

2 Place the originals on the platen or in the
document processor.

3 Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu
Function Menu: a b appears.
1 Color Selection g
*********************
2 Original Size T
3 Original Image T
[ Exit ]

4 Press the U or V key to select [Sending Size].
5
5 Press the OK key. Sending Size appears.
Sending Size: a b
1 *Same as OrigSize
*********************
2 Letter
3 Legal

6 Press the U or V key to select the desired sending
Sending Size: a b size.
= *ISO B5
*********************
> Envelope #10
? Envelope #9

7 Press the OK key.

Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
the basic screen for sending.

8 Specify the destination, and press the Start key to
start sending.

5-5

Sending Functions

Zoom
Scans the original by automatically zooming it depending on the sending size.

Part that is operated

The table below lists the available options.

Item Detail

100% No Zoom (to be scanned at actual size)

Auto Zoomed automatically according to the specified
sending size.

NOTE: When zooming in or out, see Sending Size on page 5-4 when selecting the sending size.

When Custom Size or Size Entry is selected as the original size, the originals are sent at normal size and
zooming cannot be used.

Depending on the combination of original size and sending size, the image is placed at the edge of the paper.

Use the procedure below to enlarge or reduce the original to match the transmission size.

1 Press the Send key.

2 Place the originals on the platen or in the
document processor.

3 Select the transmission size.

4 Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu
Function Menu: a b appears.
1 Color Selection g
*********************
2 Original Size T
3 Original Image T
[ Exit ]

5 Press the U or V key to select [Zoom].

5-6

Sending Functions

6 Press the OK key. Zoom appears.
Zoom: a b
1 *100%
*********************
2 Auto

7 Press the U or V key to select [100%] or [Auto]
and then press the OK key.

Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
the basic screen for sending.

8 Specify the destination, and press the Start key to 5
start sending.

5-7

Sending Functions

Duplex Sending
Select the type and binding of original depending on the original.

Part that is operated

The table below lists the binding directions for each original type.

Original Type Binding

1-sided Sheet Original 1-sided —

2-sided Sheet Original 2-sided Binding Left/Right,
Binding Top

Use the procedure below to select the original type and binding direction when sending scanned originals.

1 Press the Send key.

2 Place the originals on the platen or in the
document processor.

3 Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu
Function Menu: a b appears.
1 Color Selection g
*********************
2 Original Size T
3 Original Image T
[ Exit ]

4 Press the U or V key to select [Duplex].

5 Press the OK key. Duplex appears.
Duplex: a b
1 *1-sided
*********************
2 2-sided

[ Detail ]

5-8

Sending Functions

6 Press the U or V key to select [1-sided] or [2-
sided].

If you select [2-sided], press [Detail] (the Right
Select key), select the binding edge and press the
OK key, and then select the original setting
orientation on the next screen.

7 Press the OK key.

Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
the basic screen for sending.

8 Specify the destination, and press the Start key to
start sending.
5

5-9

Sending Functions

Original Orientation
To send the document in the orientation that can be read properly, specify the upper orientation of original. To
use the functions below, select the orientation in which the original is set on the platen.

• 1-sided / 2-sided Selection

When placing the original on the platen

[Top Edge Top] [Top Edge Left]

When placing the original on the document processor

[Top Edge Top] [Top Edge Left]

Use the procedure below to select the orientation when placing the originals on the platen for sending.

1 Press the Send key.

2 Place the originals on the platen or in the
document processor.

3 Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu
Function Menu: a b appears.
1 Color Selection g
*********************
2 Original Size T
3 Original Image T
[ Exit ]

4 Press the U or V key to select [Orig.Orientation].

5-10

Sending Functions

5 Press the OK key. Orig.Orientation appears.
Orig.Orientation: a b
1 c Top Edge Top
2 *d Top Edge Left
*********************

6 Press the U or V key to select [Top Edge Top] or
[Top Edge Left].

7 Press the OK key.

Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
the basic screen for sending. 5
8 Specify the destination, and press the Start key to
start sending.

5-11

Sending Functions

File Format
Select the file format of the image to send.

Part that is operated

The table below lists the file formats and their details.

Adjustable range of image
File Format Color mode
quality

PDF Auto(Color/Gray), Auto(Color/ 1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to
B&W), Full Color, Grayscale 5 High Quality (Low Comp.)

Black and White -

PDF/A-1a Auto(Color/Gray), Auto(Color/ 1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to
B&W), Full Color, Grayscale 5 High Quality (Low Comp.)

Black and White -

PDF/A-1b Auto(Color/Gray), Auto(Color/ 1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to
B&W), Full Color, Grayscale 5 High Quality (Low Comp.)

Black and White -

TIFF Auto(Color/Gray), Auto(Color/ 1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to
B&W), Full Color, Grayscale 5 High Quality (Low Comp.)

Black and White -

XPS Auto(Color/Gray), Full Color, 1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to
Grayscale 5 High Quality (Low Comp.)

JPEG Auto(Color/Gray), Full Color, 1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to
Grayscale 5 High Quality (Low Comp.)

NOTE: You cannot select [JPEG] if [Black and White] is selected for the color mode.

Use the procedure below to select the file format for transmission.

1 Press the Send key.

5-12

Sending Functions

2 Place the originals on the platen or in the
document processor.

3 Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu
Function Menu: a b appears.
1 Color Selection g
*********************
2 Original Size T
3 Original Image T
[ Exit ]

4 Press the U or V key to select [File Format].

5 Press the OK key. File Format appears.
File Format: a b 5
1 *PDF
*********************
2 TIFF
3 XPS
[ Detail ]

6 Press the U or V key to select the file format from
[PDF], [TIFF], [XPS] or [JPEG].

[Details] (the Right Select key) can be pressed to
select the PDF/A file format. If full color or
grayscale is selected for the scanning color mode,
press [Details] (the Right Select key) to select the
image quality.

7 Press the OK key.

Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
the basic screen for sending.

8 Specify the destination, and press the Start key to
start sending.

5-13

Sending Functions

File Separation
Create several files by dividing scanned original data page by page, and send the files.

Use the procedure below to split scanned original data into separate files when sending scanned originals.

1 Press the Send key.

2 Place the originals on the platen or in the
document processor.

3 Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu
Function Menu: a b appears.
1 Color Selection g
*********************
2 Original Size T
3 Original Image T
[ Exit ]

4 Press the U or V key to select [File Separation].

5 Press the OK key. File Separation appears.
File Separation: a b
1 *Off
*********************
2 Each Page

6 Press the U or V key to select [Each Page].

7 Press the OK key.

Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
the basic screen for sending.

8 Specify the destination, and press the Start key to
start sending. The scanned originals are sent in
files of one page each.

NOTE: Three-digit serial number such as
abc_001.pdf, abc_002.pdf... is attached to the end of
the file name.

5-14

1 Press the Send key. Photo For photos taken with a camera. OCR For documents to be read by OCR. The table below shows the quality options. 5-15 . Original Image appears. Item Detail Text+Photo Text and photos together. 5 Press the OK key. 2 Place the originals on the platen or in the document processor. and press the Start key to start sending. Completed. no photos. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for sending. Text Only text. 8 Specify the destination. 7 Press the OK key. 3 Press the Function Menu key. Sending Functions Original Image Select image quality suitable to the type of original. 1 Color Selection g ********************* 2 Original Size T 3 Original Image T [ Exit ] 4 Press the U or V key to select [Original Image]. 5 Use the procedure below to select the quality when sending scanned originals. Function Menu Function Menu: a b appears. Original Image: a b 1 *Text+Photo ********************* 2 Photo 3 Text 6 Press the U or V key to select the desired image quality.

Item Detail Manual Adjust density using 7 levels. The procedure for adjusting the density is explained below. Sending Functions Adjusting Density Use the procedure below to adjust the density when scanning the originals. 1 Press the Send key. Density appears. Density: a b 1 *Auto ********************* 2 Manual 5-16 . Auto Optimum density is selected according to the density of the original. Function Menu Function Menu: a b appears. 1 Color Selection g ********************* 2 Original Size T 3 Original Image T [ Exit ] 4 Press the U or V key to select [Density]. 5 Press the OK key. Part that is operated The table below shows the available settings. 2 Place the originals on the platen or in the document processor. 3 Press the Function Menu key.

is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for sending. 8 Specify the destination. Sending Functions 6 Press the U or V key to select [Auto] or [Manual]. 5 5-17 . Completed. press the OK key. NOTE: When the color mode is set to full color. and then select the density on the next screen. automatic setting is not possible. 7 Press the OK key. and press the Start key to start sending. If you select [Manual].

or 600x600dpi. However. Part that is operated The procedure for adjusting the scanning resolution when sending a scanned image is explained below. 1 Press the Send key.Fin 4 *300x300dpi ********************* 5 400x400dpi U. the better the image quality becomes. 5 Press the OK key. 5-18 . 7 Press the OK key. Scan Resolution: a b 3 200x400dpi S. 2 Place the originals on the platen or in the document processor. 200x200dpi Fine. Completed. 8 Specify the destination. 200x400dpi Super Fine. 1 Color Selection g ********************* 2 Original Size T 3 Original Image T [ Exit ] 4 Press the U or V key to select [Scan Resolution]. better resolution also results in larger file size (file capacity) and longer scanning and sending times. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for sending. Function Menu Function Menu: a b appears. Scan Resolution appears. 400x400dpi Ultra Fine. 300x300dpi.Fin 6 Press the U or V key to select the desired scan resolution. 3 Press the Function Menu key. The finer the scanning becomes (the larger the number becomes). and press the Start key to start sending. The selectable resolution is 200x100dpi Normal. Sending Functions Scan Resolution Select the fineness of scanning resolution.

Completed. 7 Press the OK key. Use the procedure below to select the color mode when sending scanned images. Color Selection appears. 1 Press the Send key. Auto(Color/B&W). 1 Color Selection g ********************* 5 2 Original Size T 3 Original Image T [ Exit ] 4 Press the U or V key to select [Color Selection]. and press the Start key to start sending. Sending Functions Color / Grayscale / Black and White Selection This feature allows you to select the select the color mode used for scanning when sending images. 5 Press the OK key. 3 Press the Function Menu key. Full Color. Color Selection: a b 1 *Auto(Color/Gray) ********************* 2 Auto(Color/B&W) 3 Full Color 6 Press the U or V key to select the desired color mode. 2 Place the originals on the platen or in the document processor. 5-19 . is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for sending. 8 Specify the destination. Function Menu Function Menu: a b appears. Grayscale or Black & White. You can select from Auto(Color/Gray).

press [End Scan] (the Right Select key) to start sending. originals can be scanned one after another until you press [End Scan] (the Right Select key). Scan the remaining originals by the same procedure. Function Menu Function Menu: a b appears. The procedure for using continuous scanning when sending scanned images is explained below. 1 Press the Send key. Continuous Scan: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On 5 Press the U or V key to select [On] and then press the OK key. 2 Press the Function Menu key. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for sending. and press the Start key. the originals can be scanned in separate batches and then sent as one job. Continuous Scan appears. 7 Place the original. 1 Color Selection g ********************* 2 Original Size T 3 Original Image T [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [Continuous Scan]. 5-20 . 6 Specify the destination. When you have scanned all the originals. 4 Press the OK key. Completed. With this function. Sending Functions Continuous Scan When the multi-page originals cannot be placed in the document processor at one time. and press the Start key. 8 Place the next original.

1 Color Selection g ********************* 5 2 Original Size T 3 Original Image T [ Exit ] 4 Press the U or V key to select [File Name Entry]. etc. NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-7 for details on entering characters. 2 Place the originals on the platen or in the document processor. press the OK key. Use the procedure below to assign names to scanned documents that you are sending. File Name Entry: A b File_2010* S ABC [ Text ] 6 Enter the file name. File Name Entry appears. job number. on the screen. 5-21 . You can specify a default for the document name. 5 Press the OK key. 3 Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu Function Menu: a b appears. Completed. appears. and press the Start key to start sending. 1 Press the Send key. Sending Functions File Name Entry This setting allows you to assign a document name to scanned images. NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-7 for details on entering characters. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for sending. Additional Info. 8 Specify the destination. 7 Enter the date. and then press the OK key.

Body Entry: B b * NOTE: Up to 500 characters can be entered for the body. 2 Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu Function Menu: a b appears. and press the Start key to start sending. ABC [ Text ] Completed. 4 Press the OK key. enter the subject and body of the E-mail. 1 Color Selection g ********************* 2 Original Size T 3 Original Image T [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [Subject/Body]. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for sending. Use the procedure below to enter the subject and body for an E-mail message and then send the E-mail. 5-22 . 7 Specify the destination. Sending Functions Subject and Body Entry When sending E-mail. NOTE: Up to 60 characters can be entered for the subject. Subject Entry appears. 1 Press the Send key. 6 Enter the body and press the OK key. NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-7 for details on entering characters. Subject Entry: B b * ABC [ Text ] 5 Enter the subject and press the OK key.

and press the Start key to start sending. When scanning penciled originals with rough or broken lines. 7 Press the OK key. Sharpness appears. When scanning images made up of patterned dots such as magazine photos. 1 Color Selection g ********************* 2 Original Size T 3 Original Image T [ Exit ] 4 Press the U or V key to select [Sharpness]. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for sending. 8 Specify the destination. 2 Place the originals on the platen or in the 5 document processor. Follow the steps below to adjust sharpness. * Patterns that are created by irregular distribution of halftone dots. A larger negative value decreases the sharpness. Completed. edge softening and weakening of the moire effect can be obtained by setting the sharpness toward [Unsharpen]. Function Menu Function Menu: a b appears. in which moire* patterns appear. 3 Press the Function Menu key. Sending Functions Sharpness Adjust the sharpness of image outlines. clear scanning data can be taken by adjusting sharpness toward [Sharpen]. Refer to the sample image in Appendix-22. Sharpness: a b 1 *-3(Unsharpen) ********************* 2 -2 3 -1 6 Press the U or V key to adjust the sharpness. 1 Press the Send key. and a larger positive value increases the sharpness. 5-23 . 5 Press the OK key.

3 Press the Function Menu key. Background Density Adjust is disabled during auto color sending when the a black & white original has been detected. Sending Functions Background Density Lightens the background of color originals with dark backgrounds. Backgrnd Density: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On 6 Press the U or V key to select [On]. Backgrnd Density appears. 1 1 (Lighter) ********************* 2 2 3 3 5-24 . 7 Press the OK key. A setting menu for the density of Backgrnd Density: a b the ground color appears. Original Scanning Image Follow the steps below to use background density adjust. 1 Press the Send key. Function Menu Function Menu: a b appears. 5 Press the OK key. 1 Color Selection g ********************* 2 Original Size T 3 Original Image T [ Exit ] 4 Press the U or V key to select [Backgrnd Density]. 2 Place the originals on the platen or in the document processor. NOTE: This feature is used with full color and auto color copying.

5 5-25 . 10 Specify the destination. and press the Start key to start sending. Sending Functions 8 Press the U or V key to select the density of the ground color. A smaller value decreases the density of the ground color. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for sending. Completed. and a larger value increases the density. 9 Press the OK key.

click Close. NOTE: For information on operating the computer. refer to the operating system help for your computer. and then Network. 2 Select the machine displayed Multifunctional Devices. WSD Scan appears. Panel ********************* [ Exit ] 5 Press the U or V key to select [From Oper. Displays the screen for sending. Panel]. 3 Press the U or V key to select [WSD Scan]. Installing the driver 1 Select Start button of the Windows display. Procedure using this machine 1 Press the Send key. 2 Place the originals on the platen or in the document processor. and then right-click Install. Sending Functions WSD Scan WSD Scan saves images of originals scanned on this machine as files on a WSD-compatible computer. the address book screen may appear. 3 After installing the driver. WSD Scan: a b 1 From Computer 2 From Oper. NOTE: Depending on the settings. Installing of the driver starts. press [Cancel] to display the screen for sending. WSD Scan Setup (page 8-154) must be set to [On] in the network settings. To use WSD Scan. In this event. Send to: a b 2 G Folder(SMB) 3 H Folder(FTP) 4 P WSD Scan ********************* 4 Press the OK key. 5-26 .

P Computer03 [ Cancel ] [ Detail ] 7 Press the OK key to confirm the destination. Transmission starts. This brings you back to step 6. then press the Start key. press the Back key and then press [Yes] (the Left Select key). P :Computer01 NOTE: To change the destination computer. 5 NOTE: To use WSD Scan from your computer. Sending Functions 6 Select the destination computer from the computer Select Computer: a b list. P Computer01 ********************* P Computer02 Press [Detail] (the Right Select key) to see the information of the selected computer. and Press Start Key. 5-27 . press [From Computer] in step 5 and then scan the original from the computer.

2 Place the originals on the platen or in the document processor. Use the procedure below to specify the Job Finish Notice settings. JobFinish Notice: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On 6 Press the U or V key to select [On] and then press the OK key. 7 Press the U or V key to select [Address Book] or Destination: a b [Address Entry]. select [Address Address Book: a b Book] on the next screen and press the OK key. 1 Press the Send key. select p Morgan [Detail] on the next screen and press the OK key to [ Menu ] view the details of the selected notice destination. 5-28 . 1 *Address Book ********************* 2 Address Entry 8 If you select [Address Book]. Sending Functions Job Finish Notice This feature sends an e-mail providing notification that transmission has been completed. Function Menu Function Menu: a b appears. 1 Color Selection g ********************* 2 Original Size T 3 Original Image T [ Exit ] 4 Press the U or V key to select [JobFinish Notice]. and then press the OK key. 3 Press the Function Menu key. p Fiala ********************* and then select the notice destination. JobFinish Notice appears. 5 Press the OK key. p Maury Press [Menu] (the Right Select key).

******@abcdefg. 5-29 . is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for sending. and press the Start key to start sending.jp* NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on ABC Appendix-7 for details on entering characters. [ Text ] 9 Press the OK key. 5 When the sending is completed. the finish notice is sent to the specified E-mail address. 10 Specify the destination. Completed. Sending Functions If you select [Address Entry]. enter the address of Address Entry: A b the notice destination.

If you select [On] in this option. Function Menu Function Menu: a b appears. 5-30 . 5 Press the OK key. FTP Encrypted TX appears. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for sending. 2 Place the originals in the document processor or on the platen. refer to the KYOCERA COMMAND CENTER Operation Guide. 3 Press the Function Menu key. NOTE: Click Advanced -> Secure Protocols in the COMMAND CENTER. Completed. Use the procedure below to scan and send originals as encrypted files. you can then select the encryption method in the basic send screen. For details. Be sure that SSL of Secure Protocol Settings is On and more than two effective encryptions are selected in Clientside Settings. Sending Functions FTP Encrypted TX This allows you to encrypt documents when you send them. 1 Color Selection g ********************* 2 Original Size T 3 Original Image T [ Exit ] 4 Press the U or V key to select [FTP Encrypted TX]. FTP Encrypted TX: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On 6 Press the U or V key to select [On] and then press the OK key. 1 Press the Send key.

NOTE: Use the indicated color profiles when you chose RGB in color type. NOTE: For WIA. NOTE: When the Login User Name and Login Password entry screen appears. 4 Choose the appropriate settings and click Scan. About Color Profiles The color scanner provides color profiles to adjust color. enter them and click the OK button. in addition to connection via a network. NOTE: The color profile data import method varies for every TWAIN/WIA-compliant software. Operate the WIA Drivers in the same manner. Selecting a color profile compatible with this device 1 Select the color profile found in the CD included with this scanner CD (Product Library) under the Color Profile folder. 5 2 Place the originals in the document processor or on the platen. 1 Connect the machine to a PC via a network. Sending Functions Scanning Image using Application Be sure that you connect your PC with the machine using the USB cable or Network cable and install the Kyocera TWAIN or WIA Driver. the machine can also be connected to a PC by USB cable. The scanned data will be sent to your computer. 5-31 . The following procedure is an example for scan operation using the TWAIN Driver. The scan can be carried out from any TWAIN or WIA compatible application program. 3 Use the TWAIN-compatible application to scan from your computer. Use the color profile after carefully reading the manual included with your TWAIN/WIA-complaint software. For details of installation for TWAIN or WIA driver. refer to Installing Printer Driver on page 2-47.

Sending Functions 5-32 .

... 6-2 • Saving Documents to USB Memory (Scan to USB) .......6 Document Box This chapter explains the typical procedure for utilizing Document Box.................................. • Printing Documents Stored in USB Memory.................. 6-7 • Printing from a Job Box ........................... 6-5 • Removing USB Memory ........ 6-8 6-1 ......................

4 Press the OK key. We do not guarantee that USB memory printing is error free if a USB hub is used. 1 USB Memory ********************* 2 Polling Box 3 Job Box 3 Press the U or V key to select [USB Memory].pdf). USB Memory appears. Document Box Printing Documents Stored in USB Memory Plugging USB memory directly into the machine enables you to quickly and easily print the files stored in the USB memory without having to use a computer. • Plug the USB memory directly into the USB memory slot. Limitations • The following file types can be printed: • PDF file (Version 1. Printing Print documents stored in the removable USB memory. USB Memory: a b N Store File ********************* i Folder-1 j File-1 T [ Menu ] [ Select ] 5 Press the U or V key to select the file you want to print. • Files to be printed should be saved no further down than the top 3 folder levels.5) • TIFF file (TIFF V6/TTN2 format) • XPS file • PDF files you wish to print should have an extension (. 6-2 . 1 Plug the USB memory into the USB memory slot. 2 Press the Document Box key. The Document Box Document Box: a b menu appears.

i Folder-1 j File-1 g ********************* [ Menu ] [ Select ] When you want to print additional files. 9 Press the OK key. Ready to print. repeat steps 5 to 6 to select them. For changing print A4 q sA A4a settings. Change the number of copies. Function Menu Function Menu: a b appears. Document Box Select a folder and press the OK key to view the files in the folder. Printing of the selected file begins. etc. 2 Press the Function Menu key. 1 Collate g ********************* 2 Paper Selection T 3 Duplex T [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [JPEG/TIFF Print]. refer to Copying on page 3-7 and Copying Functions on page 4-1. USB Memory: a b 1 Print ********************* 6 2 Delete 8 Press the U or V key to select [Print]. Documents in the top 3 folder levels including the root directory can be viewed. JPEG/TIFF Print Sets the print mode for JPEG/TIFF files. 1-sided/2-sided Copies: 1 printing.. 6 Press [Select] (the Right Select key). 7 Press the OK key. The USB Memory: a b selected file name is indicated by a checkmark N Store File next to it. A menu appears. as necessary. 6-3 . 1 Follow steps 1 to 8 of Printing on page 6-2. The default setting is [Paper Size]. The basic screen appears. [ Duplex ] [ Paper ] 10 Press the Start key.

Document Box 4 Press the OK key. 2 Press the Function Menu key. XPS FitTo Page appears. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen. Completed. The print modes are as follows: Paper Size (scaled to fit the paper size) Image Resolution (matched to the image resolution) Print Resolution (matched to the print resolution) 6 Press the OK key. 6 Press the OK key. 6-4 . Function Menu Function Menu: a b appears. 4 Press the OK key. Completed. JPEG/TIFF Print: a b 1 *Paper Size g ********************* 2 Image Resolution T 3 Print Resolution T 5 Press the U or V key to select the desire print mode. 1 Collate g ********************* 2 Paper Selection T 3 Duplex T [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [XPS FitTo Page]. 1 Follow steps 1 to 8 of Printing on page 6-2. XPS data is scaled to fit the paper size during printing. XPS FitTo Page If you select [On] in this setting. the data is printed at its original size. JPEG/TIFF Print appears. XPS FitTo Page: a b 1 *Off g ********************* 2 On T T 5 Press the U or V key to select [Off] or [On]. If you select [Off].

including the root folder. 6 2 Press the Document Box key. JPEG or XPS format. NOTE: The maximum number of the storable files is 100. USB Memory appears. 1 USB Memory ********************* 2 Polling Box 3 Job Box 3 Press the U or V key to select [USB Memory]. 1 Plug the USB memory into the USB memory slot . The machine will display documents in the top 3 folder levels. press the U or V key to select the folder. 6-5 . TIFF. Storing Documents The procedure for storing documents in removable USB memory is explained below. USB Memory: a b N Store File ********************* i Folder-1 j File-1 T [ Menu ] [ Select ] 5 Press the U or V key to select [Store File]. The Document Box Document Box: a b menu appears. NOTE: To save the data in the folder of USB memory. You can store files in PDF. 4 Press the OK key. and then press [Select] (the Right Select key). Document Box Saving Documents to USB Memory (Scan to USB) This function allows you to store scanned image files in USB memory connected to the machine.

ensure that you use the correct removal procedure. Ready to scan.. For changing scan settings. as described in Removing USB Memory on page 6-7. Change the original type. file format. as necessary. 1-sided 300x300dpi [2-sided ] [ScanRes. etc. The original is scanned and the data is stored in the USB memory. Document Box 6 Press the OK key. ] 7 Press the Start key. 6-6 . IMPORTANT: When removing the USB memory. The basic screen appears. refer to A4q Sending Functions on page 5-1.

[ OK ] 7 Press [OK] (the Right Select key) or remove the USB memory. 3 Press the OK key. 1 Memory Detail 2 Remove Memory NOTE: This is the image on the screen when a folder is selected. 1 Press the Document Box key. 6-7 . 5 Press the U or V key to select [Remove Memory]. A confirmation message USB memory can be appears. USB Memory appears. A menu Menu(Folder): a b appears. 6 USB Memory: a b N Store File ********************* i Folder-1 j File-1 T [ Menu ] [ Select ] 4 Press [Menu] (the Left Select key). The Document Box Document Box: a b menu appears. 1 USB Memory ********************* 2 Polling Box 3 Job Box 2 Press the U or V key to select [USB Memory]. [Open] is not displayed when a file is selected. safely removed. Document Box Removing USB Memory Remove the USB memory. The screen returns to the Document Box menu. IMPORTANT: Be sure to follow the proper procedure to avoid damaging the data or USB memory. 6 Press the OK key.

For the RAM disk settings. The user selection menu Private: a b appears. 1 USB Memory ********************* 2 Polling Box 3 Job Box 2 Press the U or V key to select [Job Box]. Job Box: a b 1 ********************* Private 2 Quick Copy 4 Press the U or V key to select [Private]. Private Print Private Print is used to allow printing only after the same 4-digit ID that was entered in the printer driver at the time of printing is entered at the operation panel. The Document Box Document Box: a b menu appears. 3 Press the OK key. 1 Press the Document Box key. you can use a Job Box to print. The procedure for printing stored data is explained below. see Help in the printer driver. The data is erased after printing. When an ID is set. 5 Press the OK key. If an ID (4-digit number) is set when printing is executed from the computer. The Job Box menu appears. For information on Private Print. see RAM Disk Mode on page 8-60. Job Box is a function that stores print data on the set RAM disk in the machine. the ID must be entered in order to print the stored data from the machine. 6-8 . enabling the data to be printed as needed from the operation panel of the machine. l ********************* Fiala l Maury 6 Press the U or V key to select the user. the data can be kept more confidential. Document Box Printing from a Job Box When optional memory is installed and RAM Disk Mode is enabled.

select 1 Select All ********************* [Clear All]. press Menu (the Left Select Menu: a b key) and select [Select All]. The file deletion confirmation screen appears. 1216S ********************* If an ID is not set. 1 Print ********************* 2 Delete 10 Press the U or V key to select [Print] and press the OK key. and then press [Select] (the Right Select key). o Data01 ********************* o Data02 o Data03 [ Menu ] [ Select ] 8 Press the U or V key to select the file to be printed. 6-9 . The print file selection menu l Fiala: a b appears. To show file details. Enter the ID and press the OK key. NOTE: To select all files. To deselect all files. 6 2 Clear All 3 Detail 9 Press the OK key. the ID entry screen appears. go to step 12. Completed. select [Delete] and press the OK key. Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). repeat this procedure to select the file. NOTE: To delete the selected file without printing it. The file print and delete Fiala: a b selection menu appears. Document Box 7 Press the OK key. The selected file will be marked. 11 If a file is selected for which an ID was set at the Fiala: b time of printing. appears and the file is deleted. If you need to add another file. select [Detail].

Set the Copies: a b number of copies and press the OK key. 1 USB Memory ********************* 2 Polling Box 3 Job Box 2 Press the U or V key to select [Job Box]. Accepted appears and printing begins. Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). The user selection menu Quick Copy: a b appears. jobs stored in this mode are erased. The Job Box menu appears.copies ******** 13 The file print confirmation screen appears. The Document Box Document Box: a b menu appears. 6-10 .---) --. 3 Press the OK key. the oldest job will be overwritten each time a new job is stored. l ********************* Fiala l Maury 6 Press the U or V key to select the user. When the machine power is turned off. 5 Press the OK key. If a document is printed with Quick Copy selected in the printer driver. For the number of documents that can be stored in Quick Copy mode. the document will be simultaneously stored on the RAM disk. Document Box 12 The number of copies screen appears. 1 Press the Document Box key.999. If more documents than the set maximum are stored. Quick Copy mode This mode is used to print an additional copy of a document that has already been printed. Job Box: a b 1 ********************* Private 2 Quick Copy 4 Press theU or V key to select [Quick Copy]. (1 . The required number of copies can be printed whenever needed from the operation panel. see Quick Copy Jobs on page 8-76.

To deselect all files. 1 Print ********************* 2 Delete 10 Press the U or V key to select [Print] and press the OK key. The file print and delete Fiala: a b selection menu appears. NOTE: To select all files. 6-11 . Document Box 7 Press the OK key. The file deletion confirmation screen appears. The print file selection menu l Fiala: a b appears. and then press [Select] (the Right Select key). select [Delete] and press the OK key. (1 . To show file details. Press [Yes] (the Left Select key).copies ******** 12 The file print confirmation screen appears. press Menu (the Left Select Menu: a b key) and select [Select All]. o Data01 ********************* o Data02 o Data03 [ Menu ] [ Select ] 8 Press the U or V key to select the file to be printed.999. Set the Copies: a b number of copies and press the OK key. appears and the file is deleted. If you need to add another file. 6 2 Clear All 3 Detail 9 Press the OK key. Completed. 11 The number of copies screen appears. Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). repeat this procedure to select the file. select [Detail].---) --. The selected file will be marked. select 1 Select All ********************* [Clear All]. Accepted appears and printing begins. NOTE: To delete the selected file without printing it.

Document Box 6-12 .

.......................................... • Checking Job Status................................................... 7-8 • Sending the Job Log History ....................... 7-18 • Device/Communication........................................... 7-18 • Canceling of Jobs ...... 7-19 7-1 ..................... 7-13 • Pause and Resumption of Jobs....... 7-2 • Checking Job History................................................7 Status / Job Cancel This chapter explains how to check the status and history of jobs and cancel the jobs being processed or waiting to be printed........................................

1 Print Job Status ********************* 2 Send Job Status 3 Store Job Status [ Pause ] 2 Press the U or V key to select [Print Job Status]. Print Job Status appears. The following job statuses are available. Available Status Screens The processing and waiting statuses of jobs are displayed as a list on the Message Display in four different screens . and Scheduled Job. Press Print Job Status: a b the U or V key to check the print queue. Screen Job statuses to be displayed Print Job • Copy • Printer • FAX reception • Document Box • E-mail reception • Job Report /List • Printing data from removable memory Send Job • FAX transmission • PC (SMB/FTP) transmission • E-mail • Application • Multiple destination • Sending Job FAX using Delayed transmission Store Job • Scan • FAX Scheduled Job • FAX Print Job Status Screen 1 Press the Status/Job Cancel key. 0008 r Copy r 0009 r maury’s data 0010 W aaaa [ Pause ] [ Menu ] 1 2 3 4 7-2 . Store Job. Status / Job Cancel Checking Job Status Check the status of jobs being processed or waiting to be printed. Send Job. The Status Status: a b menu appears. 3 Press the OK key.Print Job.

The table below lists the items displayed in the Printing Jobs Status screen. The items displayed are as follows: Status (status of job) Accepted Time Job Name Job Type User Name Page and Copy (number of pages and copies to be printed) Original Page (number of pages of the original) Color Mode 7 When complete job name not displayed in detailed information When the job name in Job Name is displayed in a short form. No. Item / Key Detail 1 Job No. Acceptance No. Press the OK key to return to the original screen. press [Detail] (the Right Select key) to see the complete job name. Status / Job Cancel Press the OK key to check detailed information of 0009 Detail: C b the selected job. of job 2 Type Icons that indicate the job type „Copy job r „Printer job W „FAX reception b „E-mail reception p „Job from Document Box x „Report / List j „Data from Removable Memory Y 3 Job Name Job Name or file name 7-3 . Status: 1/9 Processing NOTE: You can also check the job information by pressing [Menu] (the Right Select key) and selecting [Detail] in the menu that appears. Press the Y or Z key to switch the display to other information items.

Status: 1/8 Processing NOTE: You can also check the job information by pressing [Menu] (the Right Select key) and selecting [Detail] in the menu that appears. 3 Press the OK key. 1 Print Job Status ********************* 2 Send Job Status 3 Store Job Status [ Pause ] 2 Press the U or V key to select [Send Job Status]. The items displayed are as follows: Status (status of job) Accepted Time Job Name Job Type User Name Original Pages (number of pages of the original) Color/B & W (color mode of the original) Destination 7-4 . Press Send Job Status: a b the U or V key to check the send queue. 0010 b 066764333 r 0011 p Broadcast N 0017 b 0324256345 N [ Cancel ] [ Menu ] 1 2 3 4 Press the OK key to check detailed information of 0011 Detail: C b the selected job. Item / Key Detail 4 Status Status of job r: Printing s: Print Waiting no icon: Pausing print job or error R: Preferential print job is running S: Suspended because preferential print job is running Send Job Status screen 1 Press the Status/Job Cancel key. Status / Job Cancel No. Press the Y or Z key to switch the display to other information items. Send Job Status appears. The Status Status: a b menu appears.

of job 2 Type Icons that indicate the job type „Sending Job FAX b „Sending Job PC (SMB/FTP) „Sending Job E-mail p „Sending Job TWAIN2/WSD Scan P When broadcast sending is done. Press the U or V key to select the desired destination and press the OK key. When TWAIN send or WSD send is executed. Press the OK key to return to the original screen. When complete destination name not displayed in detailed information When there is only one destination. press [List] (the Right Select key) in Destination to display the destination list. The table below lists the items displayed in the Sending Jobs Status screen. "Application" appears next to the icon. No. Broadcast is displayed next to the icon. Press the OK key to return to the destination list. When there are two or more destinations. Acceptance No. 3 Destination Destination (Either destination name. Status / Job Cancel When complete job name not displayed in detailed information Press [Detail] (the Right Select key) in Job Name to see the complete job name. Item / Key Detail 7 1 Job No. Pressing [Exit] (the Right Select key) while the destination list is displayed brings you back to the original screen. E-mail address. or server name) 4 Status Status of job r: Sending no icon: Sending Waiting s: Pausing the job X: Stop sending 7-5 . press [Detail] (the Right Select key) in Destination to see the complete destination name. FAX number. Press the OK key to return to the original screen. This displays the complete name of the destination.

The Status Status: a b menu appears. Status / Job Cancel Store Job Status screen 1 Press the Status/Job Cancel key. Status: 1/8 Processing NOTE: You can also check the job information by pressing [Menu] (the Right Select key) and selecting [Detail] in the menu that appears. Press Store Job Status: a b the U or V key to check the store queue. Store Job Status appears. 1 Print Job Status ********************* 2 Send Job Status 3 Store Job Status [ Pause ] 2 Press the U or V key to select [Store Job Status]. 3 Press the OK key. 0008 N Scan r 0009 b maury’s data 0010 b aaaa [ Cancel ] [ Menu ] 1 2 3 4 Press the OK key to check detailed information of 0009 Detail: C b the selected job. (destination information) 7-6 . The items displayed are as follows: Status (status of job) Accepted Time Job Name Job Type User Name Original Pages (number of pages of the original) Color/B & W (color mode of the original) Sender Info. Press the Y or Z key to switch the display to other information items.

of job 2 Type Icons that indicate the job type „Storing Job Scan N „Storing Job FAX b 7 3 Job Name Job name or file name is displayed. No. When complete destination information not displayed in detailed information Press [Detail] (the Right Select key) in Sender Info. Status / Job Cancel When complete job name not displayed in detailed information Press [Detail] (the Right Select key) in Job Name to see the complete job name. to see the complete destination information. Press the OK key to return to the original screen. The table below lists the items displayed in the Storing Jobs Status screen. Acceptance No. 4 Status Status of job s: Storing Data no icon: Storing Waiting 7-7 . Display / Key Details 1 Job No. Press the OK key to return to the original screen.

Status / Job Cancel Checking Job History Check the history of completed jobs. The Status Status: a b menu appears. The following job histories are available. Send Jobs. 1 Print Job Status ********************* 2 Send Job Status 3 Store Job Status [ Pause ] 2 Press the U or V key to select [Print Job Log]. and Scheduled Jobs. refer to the KYOCERA COMMAND CENTER Operation Guide or KMnet Viewer User Guide. Available Job History Screens The job histories are displayed separately in three screens .Print Jobs. 7-8 . For details. Store Jobs. Screen Job histories to be displayed Print Job • Copy • Printer • FAX reception • E-mail reception • Printing from a Document Box • Job Report / List • Printing data from removable memory Send Job • FAX • PC (SMB/FTP) • E-mail • Application • Multiple destination Store Job • Scan • FAX Scheduled Job • FAX Displaying Print Job Log 1 Press the Status/Job Cancel key. NOTE: Job history is also available by COMMAND CENTER or KMnet Viewer from the computer.

(destination information) When complete job name not displayed in detailed information When the job name in Job Name is displayed in a short form. u 0008 r susan’s da. Status / Job Cancel 3 Press the OK key. refer to Print Job Status Screen on page 7-2. 7-9 . press [Detail] (the Right Select key) to see the complete job name. 7 Press the OK key or [Detail] (the Right Select key) 0006 Detail: C b to check the detailed information of the selected Result: 1/9 print log. v 0007 r tom’s da. u : Job completed normally v : Job error t : Job aborted NOTE: For details of other items. Press Print Job Log: a b the U or V key to check the print log. When complete destination information not displayed in detailed information Press [Detail] (the Right Select key) in Sender Info. Press the OK key to return to the original screen. Press the OK key to return to the original screen. 0006 r maury’s da. u [ Detail ] A job result icon is displayed on the extreme right of each job. The items displayed are as follows: Result Accepted Time End Time Job Name Job Type User Name Page and Copy (number of pages and copies to be printed) Original Page (number of pages of the original) Color Mode Sender Info. Print Job Log appears. to see the complete destination information. Error Press the Y or Z key to switch the display to other 00100 information items.

The Status Status: a b menu appears. Send Job Log appears. 1 Print Job Status ********************* 2 Send Job Status 3 Store Job Status [ Pause ] 2 Press the U or V key to select [Send Job Log]. 3 Press the OK key. 0004 p Broadcast u 0003 b 0756545865 u A job result icon is displayed on the extreme right of each job. 0002 p Morgan@kyocN v [ Detail ] u : Job completed normally v : Job error t : Job aborted NOTE: For details of other items. OK Press the Y or Z key to switch the display to other information items. Press the OK key or [Detail] (the Right Select key) 0004 Detail: C b to check the detailed information of the selected Result: 1/9 send log. The items displayed are as follows: Result Accepted Time End Time Job Name Job Type User Name Original Pages (number of pages of the original) Color/B & W (color mode of the original) Destination 7-10 . refer to Send Job Status screen on page 7-4. Status / Job Cancel Displaying Send Job Log 1 Press the Status/Job Cancel key. Press Send Job Log: a b the U or V key to check the send log.

0008 b Scan u 0009 b maury’s data v 0010 Y aaaa v [ Detail ] A job result icon is displayed on the extreme right of each job. This displays the complete name of the destination. The Status Status: 1 a b Print Job Status ********************* menu appears. When there are two or more destinations. 3 Press the OK key. Store Job Log appears. press [Detail] (the Right Select key) in Destination to see the complete destination name. Press the OK key to return to the original screen. Press the U or V key to select the desired destination and press the OK key. press [List] (the Right Select key) in Destination to display the destination list. Press the OK key to return to the destination list. refer to Store Job Status screen on page 7-6. Status / Job Cancel When complete job name not displayed in detailed information Press [Detail] (the Right Select key) in Job Name to see the complete job name. u : Job completed normally v : Job error t : Job aborted NOTE: For details of other items. 7 2 Send Job Status 3 Store Job Status [ Pause ] 2 Press the U or V key to select [Store Job Log]. When complete destination name not displayed in detailed information When there is only one destination. Pressing [Exit] (the Right Select key) while the destination list is displayed brings you back to the original screen. Displaying Store Job Log 1 Press the Status/Job Cancel key. Press Store Job Log: a b the U or V key to check the store queue. 7-11 . Press the OK key to return to the original screen.

(destination information) When complete job name not displayed in detailed information Press [Detail] (the Right Select key) in Job Name to see the complete job name. Press the OK key to return to the original screen. When complete destination information not displayed in detailed information Press [Detail] (the Right Select key) in Sender Info. to see the complete destination information. 7-12 . Error 10200 Press the Y or Z key to switch the display to other information items. Status / Job Cancel Press the OK key or [Detail] (the Right Select key) 0009 Detail: C b to check the detailed information of the selected Result: 1/9 job. The items displayed are as follows: Result Accepted Time End Time Job Name Job Type User Name Original Pages (number of pages of the original) Color/B & W (color mode of the original) Sender Info. Press the OK key to return to the original screen.

[ Login ] 7 NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-7 for details on entering characters. enter the Login User Name and Login Login Password: Password to log in. Report: a b 1 Report Print ********************* 2 Admin Rpt Set. and return to the standby screen. [ Exit ] IMPORTANT: When a time period to prohibit Now. menu 1 Report ********************* appears. The Sys. Menu/Count. 3 Result Rpt Set.: a b unit operation panel.: a b key to select [Report]. 2 In the Sys. a login screen will appear. the machine is acceptance of jobs is set in timer settings. Menu/Count. Displaying Job Log History Menu 1 Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main Sys. You can either send it manually as needed or have it sent automatically whenever a set number of jobs is reached. Status / Job Cancel Sending the Job Log History You can send the job log history by e-mail. Menu/Count. Menu/Count. press the U or V Sys. the screen prohibited to be will display Now.08:30 7-13 . used. the machine is prohibited to be used. 2 Counter 3 System [ Exit ] When you are performing user management and Login User Name: L b have not logged in. 23:00 . menu. ******************** Then. The Report menu appears. 1 Report ********************* 2 Counter 3 System [ Exit ] 3 Press the OK key.

Use the procedure below to set the destination. The Job Log History menu Job Log History: a b appears. 1 Auto Sending 2 Send History 3 Destination ********************* [ Exit ] 2 Press the OK key. 3 Result Rpt Set. 1 Confirmation ********************* 2 Register [ Exit ] 7-14 . 1 Auto Sending ********************* 2 Send History 3 Destination [ Exit ] Setting the destination Set the destination to which job log histories are sent. Status / Job Cancel 4 Press the U or V key to select [Job Log History]. press the U or V key to Destination: a b select [Confirmation]. Report: a b 2 Admin Rpt Set. Destination: a b 1 Confirmation ********************* 2 Register [ Exit ] Confirming Current Destination 1 In the Destination menu. 4 Job Log History ********************* [ Exit ] 5 Press the OK key. press the U or V key Job Log History: a b to select [Destination]. 1 In the Job Log History menu. The Destination menu appears.

press the U or V key to Destination: a b select [Register]. Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-7 for details on entering characters. Dest.: a b p Morgan@kyoceramita *********************N NOTE: Press the OK key to edit/delete the current destination. 7-15 . Registering Destination 1 In the Destination menu. Register appears. The basic screen reappears. Status / Job Cancel 2 Press the OK key. Completed. [ Exit ] 3 Press [Exit] (the Right Select key). Select your desired destination. NOTE: For selecting a destination from the address book. 1 Confirmation 2 Register ********************* [ Exit ] 7 2 Press the OK key. 3 Press the OK key. Confirm. Enter the destination address directly. Confirm. This displays an entry screen. is displayed and the Completed. screen returns to the Destination menu. This displays the address book. Dest. refer to Specifying Destination on page 3-44. Register: a b 1 Address Book ********************* 2 Address Entry To select a destination from the address book. press the U or V key to select [Address Book] and then press the OK key. appears. To directly enter a destination. press the U or V key to select [Address Entry] and then press the OK key.

Status / Job Cancel NOTE: If the address of the selected destination has Register: a b been changed after you selected the destination from 1 Address Book ********************* the address book. Refer to Confirming Current Destination on page 7-14 and reconfirm the destination address. Automatic Job Log History Transmission This function automatically sends the job log history to the specified destinations whenever a set number of jobs has been logged. is displayed and the screen returns to the Job Log History menu. Auto Sending: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On 3 Press the U or V key to select [Off] or [On]. [*] is displayed before [Address 2 *Address Entry Entry]. If you select [On] and press the OK key. 1 Auto Sending ********************* 2 Send History 3 Destination [ Exit ] 2 Press the OK key. press the U or V key Job Log History: a b to select [Auto Sending]. 7-16 . Manual Job Log History Transmission You can also send the job log history to the specified destinations manually.16) number of jobs to be sent at a time. 1 In the Job Log History menu. Use the procedure below to send the job log history manually. Use the numeric keys to enter the (1 . ******16*jobs 4 Press the OK key. Auto Sending appears. Completed. Jobs Jobs: D b appears. Use the procedure below to set automatic job log history transmission.

Subject appears. destination is displayed. Completed. 1 In the Job Log History menu. Send the job log history. 7-17 . is displayed and the job log is sent to the registered destination before the screen returns to the Job Log History menu. ABC [ Text ] 3 Enter the destination address. Status / Job Cancel 1 In the Job Log History menu. Use the procedure below to set the subject. A confirmation screen appears. 2 Send History 3 Destination 4 Subject ********************* [ Exit ] 2 Press the OK key. 1 Auto Sending 2 Send History ********************* 3 Destination [ Exit ] 2 Press the OK key. Accepted. press the U or V key Job Log History: a b to select [Send History]. Are you sure? [ Yes ] [ No ] IMPORTANT: If no destination is registered. is displayed and the screen returns to the Job Log History menu. Subject: B b %printer* NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-7 for details on entering characters. 4 Press the OK key. Refer to Registering Destination on page 7-15 and register the desired destination 7 3 Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). press the U or V key Job Log History: a b to select [Subject]. Enter Enter destination. Setting E-mail Subject Set the subject automatically entered when sending job log histories by e-mail.

The procedure for pausing and resuming jobs is explained below. 7-18 . Press [Yes] (the Left Select key) to Are you sure? resume printing. screen appears. 3 Press the OK key. Print Job Status appears. 1 Press the Status/Job Cancel key. The Status Status: a b menu appears. refer to Canceling Jobs on page 3-50. Printing is Pausing: a b paused. Print Job Status: a b 0008 r Copy r ********************* 0009 r maury’s data 0010 y aaaa [ Pause ] [ Menu ] 4 Press [Pause] (the Left Select key). 1 Print Job Status ********************* 2 Send Job Status 3 Store Job Status [ Pause ] 2 Press the U or V key to select [Print Job Status]. [ Yes ] [ No ] Canceling of Jobs For canceling jobs. 0010 y aaaa s [ Resume ] [ Menu ] NOTE: When you press the Back key. a confirmation Resume paused jobs. Status / Job Cancel Pause and Resumption of Jobs Pause /resume all printing jobs in printing/waiting. 0008 r Copy s ********************* 0009 r maury’s data s When you press [Resume] (the Left Select key) to resume printing.

etc. 7-19 . The screen returns to the Status menu. Printer Information (waiting. FAX: b Ready. Check of Device Status 1 Press the Status/Job Cancel key.) is displayed. etc. pausing. printing. You can also control devices depending on their status.) is displayed. 3 Press the OK key. [Printer] or [FAX]. [ Log ] 4 Press the OK key. 7 Store Job Log 8 Scanner ********************* 9 Printer [ Pause ] 2 Press the U or V key to select [Scanner]. Scanner The information (scanning. 7 Ready. This displays the status of the Scanner: b device selected in step 2. The items you can check are described below. The Status Status: a b menu appears. Status / Job Cancel Device/Communication Configure the devices/lines installed or connected to this machine or check their status. Printer: b Ready.

waiting. Capacity: 1/3 512. 1 Print Job Status ********************* 2 Send Job Status 3 Store Job Status [ Pause ] 2 Press the U or V key to select [USB Memory]. The Status Status: a b menu appears. Status / Job Cancel FAX The information (sending. From this screen. Status: a b < Paper Status = USB Memory ********************* > USB Keyboard [ Pause ] 3 Press the OK key. the Log Log: a b menu appears. If you press [Log] (the Right Select key). the menu for printing the transmission/reception history appears only when you have logged in as an administrator. etc. This is also used when removing the USB memory from the machine. 1 Press the Status/Job Cancel key.0MB [ Remove ] Press the Y or Z key to switch the display to other information items. you can check or 1 Outgoing FAX Log ********************* print the transmission/reception history.) is displayed. 2 Incoming FAX Log 3 Outgoing FAX Rpt NOTE: If you are using a user management function. Handling the Devices USB memory The status of the USB memory that is connected to the machine appears. This displays the status of the USB Memory: C b USB memory. The items displayed are as follows: Capacity Used Area Free Space 7-20 .

[ OK ] 4 Press [OK] (the Right Select key). Indicates whether the USB USB Keyboard: C b keyboard can be used. 1 Press the Status/Job Cancel key. The screen returns to the Status menu. USB keyboard This appears when a USB keyboard is connected to the machine. 7-21 . and indicates whether the keyboard can be used. Available 4 Press the OK key. The screen returns to the Status menu. a USB memory can be confirmation screen appears and you can remove safely removed. The Status Status: a b menu appears. the USB memory. 1 Print Job Status ********************* 2 Send Job Status 3 Store Job Status 7 [ Pause ] 2 Press the U or V key to select [USB Keyboard]. Status: a b < Memory Card = USB Memory > USB Keyboard ********************* [ Pause ] 3 Press the OK key. Status / Job Cancel When you press [Remove] (the Left Select key).

Status / Job Cancel 7-22 .

........ 8-149 • Network Security .......... 8-117 • Editing Destination (Address Book/Adding One-Touch Keys) 8-133 • Restarting the System ................................................................................8 Default Setting (System Menu) This chapter explains how to configure various settings of the machine using the menus on the operation panel.................................................................... • Common Settings .................................................................. 8-70 • Document Box Settings ........................................................................................................... 8-168 • Security Level (Security Level setting) .......................................... 8-62 • Sending Settings ............................................................. 8-148 • Network Setup ........................................... 8-160 • Interface Block Setting............................................ 8-74 • Printer Settings ........................................ 8-79 • Printing Reports/Sending Notice .. 8-101 • Date/Timer .............................................. 8-2 • Copy Settings .......... 8-95 • Adjustment/Maintenance ............................ 8-173 • Optional Functions...................... 8-174 8-1 ...................

Menu/Count. menu …8-2 • Switching the Language for Display [Language] …8-3 • Default Screen …8-5 • Sound …8-6 • Display Bright. [ Login ] NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-7 for details on entering characters. a login screen will appear. • How to display the Sys. Menu/Count. enter the Login User Name and Login Login Password: Password to log in. ******************* Then. 2 The Sys. Menu/Count. …8-7 • Original/Paper Settings …8-8 • Switching Unit of Measurement …8-26 • Error Handling …8-27 • Function Defaults …8-29 • Login Operation …8-58 • Optional Memory …8-59 • RAM Disk Mode …8-60 How to display the Sys. Default Setting (System Menu) Common Settings Common settings include. menu appears. Sys.: a b 1 Report ********************* 2 Counter 3 System [ Exit ] 8-2 . Menu/Count. menu 1 Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main unit operation panel. When you are performing user management and Login User Name: L b have not logged in.

Contact your service technician for information. menu.: a b key to select [Common Settings]. Language: a b 4 Press the OK key. press the U or V Sys. 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [Language]. 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] 2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu Common Settings: a b appears. You can optionally download messages in other languages. Menu/Count. The Language menu appears. 8 1 *English ********************* The available languages are as follows: 2 Deutsch English 3 Français Deutsch Français Español Italiano Nederlands Русский Português The optional languages are as follows: Optional language Message display Turkish Türkçe Greek Ελληνικά Polish Polski Czech Èeský Hungarian Magyar Finnish Suomi Hebrew Arabic 8-3 . Menu/Count. 1 In the Sys. Default Setting (System Menu) Switching the Language for Display [Language] You can select the language of the message display by following the procedure given below.

is displayed and the screen returns to the Common Settings menu. 5 Press the U or V key to select a language. it is displayed in place of Portugues. Default Setting (System Menu) Optional language Message display Swedish Svensk Danish Dansk Norwegian Norsk Romanian Korean Simplified Chinese Traditional Chinese If you are using one of the optional languages. 8-4 . Completed. 6 Press the OK key.

Menu/Count. Item Description Status The Status/Job Cancel screen (the screen shown when the Status/Job Cancel key is pressed) appears. Default Screen: a b 1 Status 2 *Copy ********************* 3 Send 5 Press the U or V key to select the default screen. Default Setting (System Menu) Default Screen Select the screen appearing right after start-up (default screen). 1 In the Sys. menu. Document Box The Document Box screen (the screen shown when the Document Box key is pressed) appears. 8-5 . The Common Settings menu Common Settings: a b appears. The options are as follows. 1 Language 2 Default Screen ********************* 3 Sound [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [Default Screen]. 4 Press the OK key. Default Screen appears. Menu/Count. 8 Use the procedure below to select the default startup screen. press the U or V Sys.: a b key to select [Common Settings]. FAX The FAX screen (the screen shown when the FAX key is pressed) appears. Send The Send screen (the screen shown when the Send key is pressed) appears. Copy The Copy screen (the screen shown when the Copy key is pressed) appears. 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] 2 Press the OK key. The table below lists the available screens.

menu. is displayed and the screen returns to the Common Settings menu. Warning Off. Sound appears. 1 Language 2 Default Screen 3 Sound ********************* [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [Sound]. Ready Off*. Sound Set options for buzzer sound during the machine operations. The table below lists the buzzer types and their settings and details. On Emit a sound when a print job is normally completed. 4 Press the OK key. Item Value Description Key Off. On * Emit a sound when the Confirmation control panel are pressed. Job Finish Off*. On This sounds when the USB Confirm keyboard is used.: a b key to select [Common Settings]. Sound: a b 1 Buzzer ********************* 2 FAX Speaker 3 FAX Monitor [ Exit ] 5 Press the U or V key to select [Buzzer]. 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. On Emit a sound when the warm-up is completed. Completed. 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] 2 Press the OK key. On* Emit a sound when errors occur. The Common Settings menu Common Settings: a b appears. 8-6 . Menu/Count. Default Setting (System Menu) 6 Press the OK key. Keyboard Off*. press the U or V Sys. The asterisk in the table is a default setting.

is displayed and the screen returns to the Buzzer menu. Display Bright.].: a b 3 Darker -1 4 *Normal 0 ********************* 5 Lighter+1 8-7 . appears. Display Bright. Use the procedure below to adjust the display brightness. Buzzer: a b 1 Key Confirmation ********************* 2 Job finish 3 Ready [ Exit ] 7 Press the U or V key to select [Key Confirmation]. Default Setting (System Menu) 6 Press the OK key. Display Bright.: a b key to select [Common Settings]. Menu/Count. menu. press the U or V Sys. 4 Press the OK key. 10 Press the OK key. 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [Display Bright. 8 Press the OK key. 8 Set the brightness of the display. 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] 2 Press the OK key. Completed. Key Confirmation: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On 9 Press the U or V key to select [On] or [Off]. Menu/Count. Buzzer appears. 1 In the Sys. Key Confirmation appears. The Common Settings menu Common Settings: a b appears.

50" (in 0. 1 In the Sys. 8-8 . 4 Press the OK key./Paper Set.01" increments) Y: 1. 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] 2 Press the OK key.Size].01" increments) Metric models X: 50 to 356 mm (in 1 mm increments) Y: 50 to 216 mm (in 1 mm increments) Use the procedure below to set a custom original size.02" (in 0. 6 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu Common Settings: a b appears. Default Setting (System Menu) 5 Press the U or V key to select the display brightness from [Darker -3] to [Lighter +3]. Orig. Size 3 Custom PaperSize [ Exit ] 5 Press the U or V key to select [Custom Orig. Completed. Menu/Count./Paper Set. The dimensions available are as follows. is displayed and the screen returns to the Common Settings menu. The Orig. Original/Paper Settings Register additional types and sizes of originals and paper.97 to 8.: a b key to select [Common Settings]. menu. The table below lists the sizes that can be registered.: a b appears. 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [Orig. Custom Original Size Setup Set up frequently-used custom original size./Paper Set. Menu/Count. 1 Custom Orig. press the U or V Sys.].97 to 14. menu Orig. Input units Dimensions Inch models X: 1.Size ********************* 2 Def.

8. Size Entry(X) appears. Size Entry(X): D b (1. 10 Press the OK key.97 .02) J **11. is displayed and the screen returns to the Orig.50) x ***7.23*" 9 Use the numeric keys to enter the paper width (X)./Paper Set. 8 8-9 . Size Entry(Y): D b (1. Default Setting (System Menu) 6 Press the OK key.00*" 7 Use the numeric keys to enter the paper length (Y).97 . 8 Press the OK key. menu. Completed. Size Entry(Y) appears.14.

8-10 . The Common Settings menu Common Settings: a b appears./Paper Set. menu Orig. Size]. Orig. Size: a b 1 *Letterq ********************* 2 Legalq 3 Statementq 7 Press the U or V key to select the paper size to be used as the default value. press the U or V Sys. Use the procedure below to select the paper size to be used as the default value.: a b key to select [Common Settings]. Def. menu./Paper Set. 6 Press the OK key. menu. 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [Orig. Completed. Orig. Def.]. Size appears. 1 Custom Orig. Orig. 1 In the Sys.Size ********************* 2 Def.: a b appears. is displayed and the screen returns to the Orig./Paper Set. 4 Press the OK key. Default Setting (System Menu) Default Original Size Setup In the screen for setting the paper size for the paper feed cassette or multi purpose tray. 8 Press the OK key. 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] 2 Press the OK key. select the paper size to be used as the default value./Paper Set. Orig. Size 3 Custom PaperSize [ Exit ] 5 Press the U or V key to select [Def. Menu/Count. The Orig. Menu/Count.

The custom size options are displayed on the screen to select paper. Thick. Menu/Count.02" (in 0. 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] 2 Press the OK key. Transparency. Recycled.02" (in 0. Menu/Count. Input units Dimensions Inch models Cassette: X: 4. Color. menu.75 to 8.01" increments) Metric models Cassette: X: 105 to 216 (in 1 mm increments) Y: 148 to 356 (in 1 mm increments) Paper Feeder: X: 148 to 216 (in 1 mm increments) Y: 210 to 356 (in 1 mm increments) MP Tray: X: 70 to 216 (in 1 mm increments) Y: 148 to 356 (in 1 mm increments) 8 Custom paper sizes can be added for each paper source. The Common Settings menu Common Settings: a b appears. The table below lists the sizes that can be registered. Media type: Plain.27 to 14.83 to 14.50" (in 0.50" (in 0.01" increments) Y: 8. Letterhead.13 to 8. 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] 8-11 .83 to 8.83 to 14. Coated.01" increments) Paper Feeder: X: 5. High Quality. Use the procedure below to select a custom paper size and media type. Default Setting (System Menu) Adding a Custom Size and Media Type for Paper to Print Set up a frequently-used custom paper size. Rough. Cardstock.01" increments) MP Tray: X: 2. Preprinted.01" increments) Y: 5. Custom 1-8 NOTE: Refer to Paper Weight on page 8-17 for Custom 1-8 for media type.01" increments) Y: 5. Envelope. Prepunched. Select media type for each paper size. Bond. Labels. Vellum.02" (in 0.: a b key to select [Common Settings]. press the U or V Sys. 1 In the Sys.50" (in 0.

4 Press the OK key./Paper Set. 6 Press the OK key. The Orig. The Custom PaperSize menu Custom PaperSize a b appears./Paper Set. Size (5./Paper Set. 9 Press the OK key. menu. 1 Cassette 1 Size ********************* 2 Cassette 2 Size 3 Cassette 3 Size 7 Select the paper source in which you want to set Size Entry(Y): D b the custom size and press the OK key. 8-12 . 11 Press the OK key.]. is displayed and the screen returns to the Orig. x ***14.13 . Size Entry(X): Db (4.: a b appears.8./Paper Set.83 .02*" 8 Use the numeric keys to enter the paper length (Y). Completed.14. Default Setting (System Menu) 3 Press the U or V key to select [Orig.02) Entry(Y) appears. 1 Custom Orig. menu Orig. Size 3 Custom PaperSize [ Exit ] 5 Press the U or V key to select [Custom PaperSize]. Size Entry(X) appears.Size ********************* 2 Def.50) J ***8. Orig.50*" 10 Use the numeric keys to enter the paper width (X).

Custom 1-8** * Cassette 1 only ** To change to a media type other than Plain. 8 1 In the Sys. Letterhead***.: a b appears.: a b key to select [Common Settings].] or [Cassette 3 Set. Executive./Paper Set. 8-13 . The Common Settings menu Common Settings: a b appears. Preprint***. Orig. Rough. The available paper sizes and media types are shown in the table below. Prepunched***.]. Use the procedure below to select the paper size and media type for each cassette. High Quality. *** To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead.Size ********************* 2 Def. refer to Paper Weight on page 8-17. 1 Custom Orig. press the U or V Sys. Custom Media Type Plain (105 g/m2 or less). 16K. Legal./Paper Set. Thick (163 g/m2 or less). Menu/Count. menu. [Cassette 2 Set. Recycled. 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] 2 Press the OK key. A4. Color. refer to Special Paper Action on page 8-23. Folio. A5. Envelope C5. Item Description Paper Size Letter. B5. Size 3 Custom PaperSize [ Exit ] 5 Press the U or V key to select [Cassette 1 Set. A paper size setting can be specified for a cassette when the Paper Size Dial is set to "Other". 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [Orig. Oficio II. Default Setting (System Menu) Paper Size and Media Type Setup for Cassettes Select the size and type of paper used when cassette 1 and the optional paper feeder (cassettes 2 and 3) are used. menu Orig.]. Statement*./Paper Set.]. Bond**. A6*. 4 Press the OK key. The Orig. Menu/Count.

8 Press the OK key. Completed. 10 Press the OK key. 8-14 . Cassette 1 Type: a b 1 *Plain ********************* 2 Rough 3 Recycled 13 Press the U or V key to select the paper type. Operate in a similar fashion when you select an optional cassette ([Cassette 2 or 3]) 6 The Cassette 1 Set. 14 Press the OK key. menu. Default Setting (System Menu) Follow the steps below when you select the main unit cassette ([Cassette 1]). Cassette 1 Size: a b 1 *Lettera ********************* 2 Legala 3 Statementa 9 Press the U or V key to select the paper size. 12 Press the OK key. Cassette 1 Type appears. is displayed and the screen returns to the Cassette 1 Set. NOTE: This item does not appear when the Paper Size Dial on the cassette is set to other than "Other". The screen returns to the Cassette 1 Set. 1 Cassette 1 Size ********************* 2 Cassette 1 Type [ Exit ] 11 Press the U or V key to select [Cassette 1 Type].: a b Cassette 1 Set. menu. menu appears.: a b 1 Cassette 1 Size ********************* 2 Cassette 1 Type [ Exit ] 7 Press the U or V key to select [Cassette 1 Size]. Cassette 1 Size appears. Cassette 1 Set.

8 from Media Type. B5. A6. The available paper sizes and media types are shown in the table below. Envelope Monarch. Envelope #10. Custom 1-8** * Refer to Adding a Custom Size and Media Type for Paper to Print on page 8-11 for selecting Custom Paper Size.76 to 8. menu. Oficio II. Statement. Color. Legal. A5. Set up frequently-used size and media type before use. Thick (106 g/m2 and more). To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead. Menu/Count. Letterhead**. 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] 8-15 .02" (in 0. ISO B5. refer to Special Paper Action on page 8-23. Folio. Envelope #9. High Quality. Youkei 2.01" increments) Metric models: X: 70 to 216 (in 1 mm increments) Y: 148 to 356 (in 1 mm increments) Media Type Plain (105 g/m2 or less). ** Refer to Paper Weight on page 8-17 for selecting Custom 1. Bond. Size Sizes A4. Executive. B6. Envelope DL. Custom* Size Enter a size not displayed in the standard sizes. Hagaki. 8 Preprinted**. Cardstock. Item Description Paper Standard Letter. Envelope.: a b key to select [Common Settings]. Recycled. Coated. 16K. NOTE: To change to a media type other than Plain.50" (in 0. Envelope C5.83 to 14. 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. Default Setting (System Menu) Paper Size and Media Type Setup for Multi Purpose Tray Select size and media type for multi purpose tray. refer to Paper Weight on page 8-17 Use the procedure below to select the paper size and media type for manual paper feed. Envelope #6. Vellum (63 g/m2 or less). press the U or V Sys. Entry Inch models: X: 2.01" increments) Y: 5. Labels. Prepunched**. Oufuku Hagaki. Transparency. Rough. Youkei 4.

menu MP Tray Set. The MP Tray Set.Size ********************* 2 Def. MP Tray Size appears. 1 MP Tray Size ********************* 2 MP Tray Type [ Exit ] 7 Press the U or V key to select [MP Tray Size].: a b appears./Paper Set. The Orig. 8 Press the OK key. The screen returns to the MP MP Tray Set.]. 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [Orig. Default Setting (System Menu) 2 Press the OK key. 6 Press the OK key. 4 Press the OK key. 1 Custom Orig.]. Orig. MP Tray Size: a b < 16Ka = ISO B5 > *Envelope #10 ********************* 9 Press the U or V key to select the paper size. Size 3 Custom PaperSize [ Exit ] 5 Press the U or V key to select [MP Tray Set. menu Orig./Paper Set. 1 MP Tray Size 2 MP Tray Type ********************* [ Exit ] 8-16 . The Common Settings menu Common Settings: a b appears. MP Tray Size: a b < 16Ka = ISO B5 > *Envelope #10 ********************* 10 Press the OK key./Paper Set.: a b Tray Set.: a b appears. menu.

MP Tray Type appears. 12 Press the OK key. MP Tray Type: a b 1 *Plain ********************* 2 Transparency 3 Rough 13 Press the U or V key to select the paper type. Paper Weight Select weight for each media type. 60g/m2 60g/m2 75g/m2 91g/m2 106g/m2 136g/m2 164g/m2 Trans- Media type to to to to to to to parency 63g/m2 74g/m2 90g/m2 105g/m2 135g/m2 163g/m2 220g/m2 Plain c c z c c c c c c Transparency c c c c c c c z X Vellum z c c c c c c c X Labels c c c c z c c c X Recycled c c z c c c c c c Preprinted c c z c c c c c c Bond c c c z c c c c c Cardstock c c c c z c c c X Color c c z c c c c c c Prepunched c c z c c c c c c Rough c c c z c c c c c Letterhead c c z c c c c c c Coated c c c c z c c c c Thick c c c c c z c c c Envelope c c c c c z c c X High Quality c c c z c c c c c Custom 1-8 c c z c c c c c 8-17 . Default Setting (System Menu) 11 Press the U or V key to select [MP Tray Type]. is displayed and the screen returns to the MP Tray Set. Completed. 14 Press the OK key. menu. The options for media type and weight of paper are as follows. Paper types and weights z: Default value c: Available X: Not available Paper Weight Light Normal 1 Normal 2 Normal 3 Heavy 1 Heavy 2 Heavy 3 Extra Heavy Duplex 8 Weight (g/m2).

4 Press the OK key.: a b appears. Permit Duplex printing allowed. Media type Set.].]. Item Description Duplex Prohibit Duplex printing not allowed. Use the procedure below to set the paper weight. press the U or V Sys.Size ********************* 2 Def./Paper Set. Default Setting (System Menu) For Custom 1-8. 1 In the Sys. Media Type Set. Menu/Count. settings for duplex printing and media type name can be changed. 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [Orig. the name after change will be displayed. menu Orig. Menu/Count. Orig. Name Change names for Custom 1-8. The Orig. 6 Press the OK key. Names should be not more than 16 characters. 8-18 . menu appears. Size 3 Custom PaperSize [ Exit ] 5 Press the U or V key to select [Media Type Set. 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] 2 Press the OK key. menu.: a b key to select [Common Settings]. The Common Settings menu Common Settings: a b appears./Paper Set./Paper Set. Selecting media type at multi purpose tray.: K b 1 Plain ********************* 2 Transparency 3 Rough [ Exit ] 7 Press the U or V key to select the paper type for which you want to make settings. 1 Custom Orig.

14 Press the OK key. The Duplex menu appears. Completed. The Paper Weight menu Paper Weight: a b appears. 8-19 . is displayed and the Plain: a b screen returns to the menu for the selected paper 1 Paper Weight ********************* type. 10 Press the OK key. 1 Paper Weight ********************* [ Exit ] 9 Press the U or V key to select [Paper Weight]. 12 Press the OK key. 2 Duplex 3 Name [ Exit ] 13 Press the U or V key to select [Duplex]. 8 [ Exit ] When the selected paper type is [Custom 1 to 8]. Default Setting (System Menu) 8 Press the OK key. Duplex: a b 1 Permit ********************* 2 Prohibit [ Exit ] 15 Press the U or V key to select whether to enable or disable duplex. Custom 1: a b you can further set whether to enable or disable 1 Paper Weight ********************* duplex and the name of the custom paper type. 1 Extra Heavy ********************* 2 *Heavy 3 3 Heavy 2 11 Press the U or V key to select the weight of paper. The menu for the selected Plain: a b paper type appears.

Completed. Default Setting (System Menu) 16 Press the OK key. 2 Duplex 3 Name [ Exit ] 17 Press the U or V key to select [Name]. Name Entry: C b Osaka SD Kyocer*S Enter the name of the custom paper type. Completed. is displayed and the Custom 1: a b screen returns to the menu for the selected custom 1 Paper Weight ********************* paper type. 18 Press the OK key. 2 Duplex 3 Name [ Exit ] 8-20 . ABC NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on [ Text ] Appendix-7 for details on entering characters. Name Entry is displayed. 19 Press the OK key. is displayed and the Custom 1: a b screen returns to the menu for the selected custom 1 Paper Weight ********************* paper type.

Use the procedure below to select the default paper source. 1 In the Sys. Orig. 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] 8 3 Press the U or V key to select [Orig. 8-21 ./Paper Set. is displayed and the screen returns to the menu for the selected custom paper type.Size ********************* 2 Def. Completed./Paper Set. Def. Menu/Count. 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] 2 Press the OK key. 6 Press the OK key. Size 3 Custom PaperSize [ Exit ] 5 Press the U or V key to select [Def. 8 Press the OK key. Default Setting (System Menu) Default Paper Source Select the default paper source from Cassette 1-3 and Multi Purpose Tray.]. The Common Settings menu Common Settings: a b appears. PaperSource]. 1 Custom Orig. press the U or V Sys. The Orig. menu. PaperSurce: a b 1 *Cassette 1 ********************* 2 Cassette 2 3 Cassette 3 7 Press the U or V key to select the paper source to be used preferentially. PaperSource appears.: a b appears./Paper Set. Menu/Count. menu Orig.: a b key to select [Common Settings]. NOTE: [Cassette 2] and [Cassette 3] are displayed when the optional paper feeder is installed. 4 Press the OK key. Def.

: a b key to select [Common Settings]./Paper Set. 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [Orig. The color selection menu Media for Auto: a b appears./Paper Set. 1 In the Sys. The Common Settings menu Common Settings: a b appears. menu Orig.]. 1 Custom Orig./Paper Set. 4 Press the OK key. Media for Auto appears. 1 Full Color ********************* 2 Black & White 7 Press the U or V key to select [Full Color] or [Black & White]. the paper source that is automatically selected can be limited by media types. Size 3 Custom PaperSize [ Exit ] 5 Press the U or V key to select [Media for Auto]. Menu/Count. Menu/Count. The Orig. 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] 2 Press the OK key. Media for Auto: a b 1 All Media Type 2 *Plain ********************* 3 Transparency 8-22 .: a b appears.If Plain is selected. Default Setting (System Menu) Media for Auto Selection When [Auto] is selected in Paper Selection. 6 Press the OK key. Orig.Size ********************* 2 Def. menu. Select [All Media Types] for the paper source with any kind of paper loaded in the specific size. 8 Press the OK key. the paper source with plain paper loaded in the specific size is selected. press the U or V Sys. Use the procedure below to select the paper size and media type used by Auto Selection.

10 Press the OK key. Preprint. 8 If you select [Adj. PrintDirect Adjust print direction. Completed. upward. In such a case. Preprint and Letterhead. load the face. Default Setting (System Menu) 9 Press the U or V key to select [All Media Type] or the paper type to be used for paper selection. Example: copying on Letterhead Original Paper Finished Cassette Multi Purpose Tray Original Paper Finished Cassette Multi Purpose Tray NOTE: When loading cover paper in a cassette or multi purpose tray. 8-23 . PrintDirect]. on which printing is supposed to be done. punch-holes might not be aligned or the print direction might be upside-down depending on how originals are set and the combination of copying functions. is displayed and the screen returns to the Orig. menu. load paper according to the steps below./Paper Set. The table below lists the available settings and their details. Speed Priority Give the job speed top priority and disregard the paper orientation. When paper orientation is not important. Select this item to print on Prepunched. and Letterhead. Select this item when paper orientation is not important. Print speed is a little slower. PrintDirect] to adjust the print direction. select [Speed Priority]. select [Adj. Item Description Adj. Special Paper Action When printing on Prepunched.

menu. appears. 6 Press the OK key.: a b 1 *Adj. SpcialPaper Act. Completed. The Common Settings menu Common Settings: a b appears. Menu/Count. Size 3 Custom PaperSize [ Exit ] 5 Press the U or V key to select [SpcialPaper Act. Menu/Count. PrintDirect ********************* 2 Speed Priority 7 Press the U or V key to select [Adj.: a b key to select [Common Settings]. menu. Orig. PrintDirect 2 *Speed Priority ********************* 8 Press the OK key. menu Orig. Default Setting (System Menu) Use the procedure below to specify the actions performed for special paper types. 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] 2 Press the OK key. 8-24 .]./Paper Set. is displayed and the screen returns to the Orig. press the U or V Sys. PrintDirect] or SpcialPaper Act.]. SpcialPaper Act. 1 Custom Orig./Paper Set. 1 In the Sys./Paper Set. 4 Press the OK key. 1 Adj. 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [Orig.Size ********************* 2 Def.: a b appears. The Orig.: a b [Speed Priority]./Paper Set.

8-25 . The Preset Limit menu appears. 1 In the Sys. is displayed and the screen returns to the Common Settings menu. The Common Settings menu Common Settings: a b appears.: a b key to select [Common Settings]. Use the procedure below to set the limit on the number of copies. Menu/Count. menu. press the U or V Sys. 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] 2 Press the OK key.999) **999* 5 Press the U or V key to enter the number of copies. Completed. 4 Press the OK key. 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [Preset Limit]. 8 Preset Limit: D b (1 . 6 Press the OK key. Default Setting (System Menu) Preset Limit Restrict the number of copies that can be made at one time. Menu/Count. Options are 1-999 copies.

Menu/Count. Default Setting (System Menu) Switching Unit of Measurement Select inch or metric for the unit for paper dimensions. 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [Measurement]. 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] 2 Press the OK key. 6 Press the OK key. Completed. Menu/Count. press the U or V Sys. is displayed and the screen returns to the Common Settings menu. Use the procedure below to change the input units. The Common Settings menu Common Settings: a b appears. menu.: a b key to select [Common Settings]. 1 In the Sys. 1 *inch ********************* 2 mm 5 Press the U or V key to select [inch] or [mm]. 8-26 . The Measurement menu Measurement: a b appears. 4 Press the OK key.

Menu/Count. Item Description Ignore Printing continues. The possible errors and what to do for the errors are as follows. Item Description 1-sided Printed in 1-sided Display Error Error message to cancel printing is displayed. 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [Error Handling]. 8 Display Error Error message to cancel printing is displayed. Duplexing Error Select what to do when duplex printing is not possible for the selected paper size and media type. press the U or V Sys. 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. Paper Mismatch Error Select the method to handle if the selected paper size or paper type does not match the paper size or paper type set in the paper source when printing from your computer. The Common Settings menu Common Settings: a b appears. menu. 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] 2 Press the OK key.: a b key to select [Common Settings]. Default Setting (System Menu) Error Handling Select whether to cancel or continue the job when error has occurred. Use the procedure below to specify the settings for error handling. 8-27 .

6 Press the OK key. PaperMismatchErr: a b 1 Ignore 2 *Display Error ********************* 11 Press the U or V key to select the method to handle paper mismatch. is displayed and the Error Handling: a b screen returns to the Error Handling menu. 12 Press the OK key. Completed. 8-28 . PagerMismatchErr appears. 10 Press the OK key. 1 DuplexPaperError 2 PaperMismatchErr ********************* [ Exit ] 9 Press the U or V key to select [PagerMismatchErr]. The Error Handling menu Error Handling: a b appears. is displayed and the screen returns to the Error Handling menu. DuplexPaperError: a b 1 1-sided 2 *Display Error ********************* 7 Press the U or V key to select the method to handle if duplex is disabled. Completed. 1 DuplexPaperError ********************* 2 PaperMismatchErr [ Exit ] 5 Press the U or V key to select [DuplexPaperError]. Default Setting (System Menu) 4 Press the OK key. DuplexPaperError appears. 8 Press the OK key.

8-29 . menu. Menu/Count. Refer to page 4-8 for Original Orientation. d Top Edge Left Select the original's top edge at the left. Item Description c Top Edge Top Select the original's top edge at the top. Default Setting (System Menu) Function Defaults Defaults are the values automatically set after the warm-up is completed or the Reset key is pressed. 4 Press the OK key. 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [Function Default]. 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. 4 User/Job Account 8 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] 2 Press the OK key.Orientation Set the original orientation defaults. The Common Settings menu Common Settings: a b appears.: a b key to select [Common Settings]. Use the procedure below to select the default orientation when originals are placed on the platen. Setting the frequently-used values as defaults makes subsequent jobs easier. The available default settings are shown below. Set the defaults for available settings such as copying and sending.Orientation]. press the U or V Sys. Orig. 1 Color Selection ********************* 2 Scan Resolution 3 FAX Resolution [ Exit ] 5 Press the U or V key to select [Orig. The Function Default menu Function Default: a b appears.

The available default settings are shown below. Orig.Orientation: a b 1 c Top Edge Top 2 *d Top Edge Left ********************* 7 Press the U or V key to select [c Top Edge Top] or [d Top Edge Left] . 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [Function Default]. Menu/Count. The Function Default menu Function Default: a b appears. is displayed and the screen returns to the Function Default menu. 1 Color Selection ********************* 2 Scan Resolution 3 FAX Resolution [ Exit ] 8-30 . menu. 8 Press the OK key. Default Setting (System Menu) 6 Press the OK key. Menu/Count. 1 In the Sys. Completed. 4 Press the OK key. Continuous Scan Set the continuous scan defaults. Orig. The Common Settings menu Common Settings: a b appears. Item Description Off Continuous scan not performed On Continuous scan performed Refer to page 4-14 for Continuous Scan. Use the procedure below to select the default settings for continuous scanning.: a b key to select [Common Settings]. press the U or V Sys. 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] 2 Press the OK key.Orientation appears.

Default Setting (System Menu)

5 Press the U or V key to select [Continuous Scan].

6 Press the OK key. Continuous Scan appears.
Continuous Scan: a b
1 *Off
*********************
2 On

7 Press the U or V key to select [Off] or [On].

8 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Function Default menu.

Original Image

Set the default original document type. The available default settings are shown below.

Item Description

Text+Photo Text and photos together.

Photo For photos taken with a camera. 8
Text Only text, no photos.

Map For maps, etc.

Printed Document For documents printed from this machine.

for OCR Image quality suitable for OCR software.

Use the procedure below to select the default quality setting for originals.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b key to select [Common Settings].
4 User/Job Account
5 User Property
6 Common Settings
*********************
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu
Common Settings: a b appears.
1 Language
*********************
2 Default Screen
3 Sound
[ Exit ]

3 Press the U or V key to select [Function Default].

8-31

Default Setting (System Menu)

4 Press the OK key. The Function Default menu
Function Default: a b appears.
1 Color Selection
*********************
2 Scan Resolution
3 FAX Resolution
[ Exit ]

5 Press the U or V key to select [Original Image].

6 Press the OK key. Original Image appears.
Original Image: a b
1 *Text+Photo
*********************
2 Photo
3 Text

7 Press the U or V key to select [Text+Photo],
[Photo], [Text] or [for OCR].

8 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Function Default menu.

Scan Resolution

Select the default scanning resolution. The options are 600x600dpi, 400x400dpi U.Fin (Ultra Fine), 300x300dpi,
200x400dpi S.Fin (Super Fine), 200x200dpi Fine, 200x100dpi Norm. (Normal).

Use the procedure below to select the default resolution setting.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b key to select [Common Settings].
4 User/Job Account
5 User Property
6 Common Settings
*********************
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu
Common Settings: a b appears.
1 Language
*********************
2 Default Screen
3 Sound
[ Exit ]

3 Press the U or V key to select [Function Default].

8-32

Default Setting (System Menu)

4 Press the OK key. The Function Default menu
Function Default: a b appears.
1 Color Selection
*********************
2 Scan Resolution
3 FAX Resolution
[ Exit ]

5 Press the U or V key to select [Scan Resolution].

6 Press the OK key. Scan Resolution appears.
Scan Resolution: a b
1 200x100dpi Norm.
*********************
2 200x200dpi Fine
3 200x400dpi S.Fin

7 Press the U or V key to select [200x100dpi
Norm.], [200x200dpi Fine], [200x400dpi S.Fin],
[300x300dpi], [400x400dpi U.Fin] or [600x600dpi].

8 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Function Default menu. 8
Color Selection

Select the default color mode setting. The available default settings are shown below.

<Copy>

Color mode Description

Auto Color Automatically recognize whether
documents are color or black and white.

Full Color Scan document in full color.

Black & White Scan document in black and white.

<FAX/Scan>

Color mode Description

Auto(Color/Gray) Color and black & white originals are
automatically detected. Color originals are
scanned in full color, and black & white
originals are scanned in shades of black &
white.

8-33

Default Setting (System Menu)

Color mode Description

Auto(Color/B&W) Color and black & white originals are
automatically detected. Color originals are
scanned in full color, and black & white
originals are scanned in binary black &
white.

Full Color Scan document in full color.

Grayscale Scan document in grayscale for smoother
and finer finish.

Black & White Scan document in black and white.

Use the procedure below to select the default color mode setting.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b key to select [Common Settings].
4 User/Job Account
5 User Property
6 Common Settings
*********************
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu
Common Settings: a b appears.
1 Language
*********************
2 Default Screen
3 Sound
[ Exit ]

3 Press the U or V key to select [Function Default].

4 Press the OK key. The Function Default menu
Function Default: a b appears.
1 Color Selection
*********************
2 Scan Resolution
3 FAX Resolution
[ Exit ]

5 Press the U or V key to select [Color Selection].

6 Press the OK key. Color Selection appears.
Color Selection: a b
1 Copy
*********************
2 Send/Store

8-34

Default Setting (System Menu)

7 Press the U or V key to select [Copy] or [Send/
Store].

8 Press the OK key. Color Selection appears.
Copy: a b
1 *Auto Color
*********************
2 Full Color
3 Black & White

9 If the U or V key was pressed to select Copy,
select [Auto Color], [Full Color], or [Black & White].
If Send or Save was selected, select [Auto (Color/
Gray)], [Auto (Color/B&W)], [Full Color],
[Grayscale], or [Black & White].

10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Function Default menu.

8

8-35

Default Setting (System Menu)

File Format

Select the default file type to send the scanned originals. The available default settings are shown below.

File Format Description

PDF Send files in PDF format.

TIFF Send files in TIFF format.

XPS Send files in XPS format.

JPEG Send files in JPEG format.

NOTE: Refer to page 5-12 for file formats.

Use the procedure below to select the default file format.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b key to select [Common Settings].
4 User/Job Account
5 User Property
6 Common Settings
*********************
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu
Common Settings: a b appears.
1 Language
*********************
2 Default Screen
3 Sound
[ Exit ]

3 Press the U or V key to select [Function Default].

4 Press the OK key. The Function Default menu
Function Default: a b appears.
1 Color Selection
*********************
2 Scan Resolution
3 FAX Resolution
[ Exit ]

5 Press the U or V key to select [File Format].

8-36

Default Setting (System Menu)

6 Press the OK key. File Format appears.
File Format: a b
1 *PDF
*********************
2 TIFF
3 XPS

7 Press the U or V key to select [PDF], [TIFF],
[XPS] or [JPEG].

8 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Function Default menu.

Density

Set the default density. The available default settings are shown below.

Item Description

Manual (Normal 0) Set to (Normal 0) in the Manual density.

Auto Set to Auto density.
8
Use the procedure below to select the default zoom setting.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b key to select [Common Settings].
4 User/Job Account
5 User Property
6 Common Settings
*********************
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu
Common Settings: a b appears.
1 Language
*********************
2 Default Screen
3 Sound
[ Exit ]

3 Press the U or V key to select [Function Default].

4 Press the OK key. The Function Default menu
Function Default: a b appears.
1 Color Selection
*********************
2 Scan Resolution
3 FAX Resolution
[ Exit ]

5 Press the U or V key to select [Density].

8-37

Default Setting (System Menu)

6 Press the OK key. Density appears.
Density: a b
1 Auto
2 *Manual
*********************

7 Press the U or V key to select [Auto] or [Manual].

8 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Function Default menu.

Zoom

Select the enlarged/reduced default when paper size/sending size changed after the originals set. The available
default settings are shown below.

Item Description

100% Copy (send/save) at actual size (100%).

Auto Automatically reduce or enlarge the
originals to match paper size/ sending size.

Use the procedure below to select the default zoom setting.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b key to select [Common Settings].
4 User/Job Account
5 User Property
6 Common Settings
*********************
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu
Common Settings: a b appears.
1 Language
*********************
2 Default Screen
3 Sound
[ Exit ]

3 Press the U or V key to select [Function Default].

4 Press the OK key. The Function Default menu
Function Default: a b appears.
1 Color Selection
*********************
2 Scan Resolution
3 FAX Resolution
[ Exit ]

5 Press the U or V key to select [Zoom].

8-38

Default Setting (System Menu)

6 Press the OK key. Zoom appears.
Zoom: a b
1 *100%
*********************
2 Auto

7 Press the U or V key to select [100%] or [Auto].

8 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Function Default menu.

File Name Entry

Set an automatically entered name (default) for jobs. Additional information such as Date and Time and Job No.
can also be set.

The table below lists the additional information available.

Item Description

None No additional information available.

Date Adds date and time.
8
Job No. Adds the job number.

Job No. + Date Adds the job number plus date and time.

Date + Job No. Adds date and time plus the job number.

NOTE:
• Refer to page 4-17 and page 5-21 for name entry.
• Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-7 for details on entering characters.

Use the procedure below to set the default file name.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b key to select [Common Settings].
4 User/Job Account
5 User Property
6 Common Settings
*********************
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu
Common Settings: a b appears.
1 Language
*********************
2 Default Screen
3 Sound
[ Exit ]

8-39

Default Setting (System Menu)

3 Press the U or V key to select [Function Default].

4 Press the OK key. The Function Default menu
Function Default: a b appears.
1 Color Selection
*********************
2 Scan Resolution
3 FAX Resolution
[ Exit ]

5 Press the U or V key to select [File Name Entry].

6 Press the OK key. File Name Entry appears. Enter
File name Entry: A b the document name (up to 32 characters).
doc 1*
S
ABC
[ Text ]

7 Press the OK key. Additional Info appears.
Additional Info.: a b
1 None
*********************
2 Date
3 Job No.

8 Press the U or V key to select [None], [Date],
[JobNo.], [JobNo. + Date] or [Date + JobNo.].

9 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Function Default menu.

Subject/Body

Set the subject and body automatically entered (default subject and body) when sending the scanned originals
by E-mail.

NOTE:
• Refer to Send as E-mail on page 3-26.
• Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-7 for details on entering characters.

Use the procedure below to set the default e-mail subject and message body.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b key to select [Common Settings].
4 User/Job Account
5 User Property
6 Common Settings
*********************
[ Exit ]

8-40

you can return to the Function Default menu. 1 Color Selection ********************* 2 Scan Resolution 3 FAX Resolution [ Exit ] 5 Press the U or V key to select [Subject/Body]. 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [Function Default]. abcdefghijklmnopqrstu vwxyzABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP If you press the Back key. you can return to Subject Entry. 6 Press the OK key. 4 Press the OK key. The Function Default menu Function Default: a b appears. Completed. Enter e- Body Entry: a b mail body text (up to 500 characters). 8-41 . 8 QRSTUVWXYZ* S ABC [ Text ] 7 Press the OK key. QRSTUVWXYZ* ABC [ Text ] 8 Press the OK key. Subject Entry appears. abcdefghijklmnopqrstu vwxyzABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP If you press the Back key. The Common Settings menu Common Settings: a b appears. is displayed and the screen returns to the Function Default menu. Default Setting (System Menu) 2 Press the OK key. Enter Subject Entry: K b the e-mail subject (up to 60 characters). Body Entry appears.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. On Collate performed. The table below shows the available settings. Use the procedure below to set the default Collate/Offset settings. 8-42 . Menu/Count. 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [Function Default]. 1 Color Selection ********************* 2 Scan Resolution 3 FAX Resolution [ Exit ] 5 Press the U or V key to select [Collate]. 4 Press the OK key. 6 Press the OK key. The Function Default menu Function Default: a b appears. press the U or V Sys. NOTE: Refer to page 3-20 for Collate/Offset. menu. 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] 2 Press the OK key.: a b key to select [Common Settings]. Collate appears. Item Description Collate Off Collate not performed. The Common Settings menu Common Settings: a b appears. Collate: a b 1 Off 2 *On ********************* 7 Press the U or V key to select [Off] or [On]. Default Setting (System Menu) Collate Set the defaults for Collate.

press the U or V Sys. Completed. Menu/Count. 8-43 . 1 Color Selection ********************* 2 Scan Resolution 3 FAX Resolution [ Exit ] 5 Press the U or V key to select [EcoPrint]. NOTE: Refer to page 4-10 for EcoPrint. The table below shows the available settings. Item Description Off No EcoPrint performed. 4 User/Job Account 8 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] 2 Press the OK key. This is recommended for test copies where faded printing is not a problem. 4 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu Common Settings: a b appears. menu. Menu/Count.: a b key to select [Common Settings]. Select the EcoPrint default. The Function Default menu Function Default: a b appears. Default Setting (System Menu) 8 Press the OK key. 1 In the Sys. is displayed and the screen returns to the Function Default menu. On EcoPrint performed. EcoPrint EcoPrint conserves toner when printing. 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [Function Default]. Use the procedure below to set the default EcoPrint setting.

Completed. JPEG/TIFF Print Select the JPEG/TIFF Print default. The table below shows the available settings.: a b key to select [Common Settings]. Item Description Paper Size Scaled to fit the paper size. Use the procedure below to set the default JPEG/TIFF Print setting. press the U or V Sys. NOTE: Refer to page 6-3 for JPEG/TIFF Print. The Common Settings menu Common Settings: a b appears. 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] 2 Press the OK key. Menu/Count. EcoPrint appears. 8-44 . menu. Menu/Count. 1 In the Sys. Default Setting (System Menu) 6 Press the OK key. Image Resolution Matched to the image resolution. EcoPrint: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On 7 Press the U or V key to select [Off] or [On]. is displayed and the screen returns to the Function Default menu. Print Resolution Matched to the print resolution. 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [Function Default]. 8 Press the OK key.

press the U or V Sys. Completed. 1 Color Selection ********************* 2 Scan Resolution 3 FAX Resolution [ Exit ] 5 Press the U or V key to select [JPEG/TIFF Print]. 8 Press the OK key. menu. 6 Press the OK key. Default Setting (System Menu) 4 Press the OK key.: a b key to select [Common Settings]. JPEG/TIFF Print appears. 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [Function Default]. 8 XPS FitTo Page Reduces or enlarges the image size to fit to the selected paper size when printing XPS file. 8-45 . Menu/Count. Menu/Count. The Common Settings menu Common Settings: a b appears. Use the procedure below to set the default XPS FitTo Page setting. The Function Default menu Function Default: a b appears. is displayed and the screen returns to the Function Default menu. [Image Resolution] or [Print Resolution]. 1 In the Sys. 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] 2 Press the OK key. JPEG/TIFF Print: a b 1 *Paper Size g ********************* 2 Image Resolution T 3 Print Resolution T 7 Press the U or V key to select [Paper Size]. NOTE: Refer to page 6-4 for XPS FitTo Page.

1 Color Selection ********************* 2 Scan Resolution 3 FAX Resolution [ Exit ] 5 Press the U or V key to select [XPS FitTo Page]. Use the procedure below to split scanned original data into separate files when sending scanned originals. 4 Press the OK key. 1 Color Selection ********************* 2 Scan Resolution 3 FAX Resolution [ Exit ] 8-46 . 8 Press the OK key. File Separation Create several files by dividing scanned original data page by page. Menu/Count. The Function Default menu Function Default: a b appears. menu. The Common Settings menu Common Settings: a b appears. XPS FitTo Page appears. 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] 2 Press the OK key. 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [Function Default]. and send the files. The Function Default menu Function Default: a b appears. Default Setting (System Menu) 4 Press the OK key.: a b key to select [Common Settings]. is displayed and the screen returns to the Function Default menu. 1 In the Sys. 6 Press the OK key. press the U or V Sys. XPS FitTo Page: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On 7 Press the U or V key to select [Off] or [On]. Completed. Menu/Count.

Menu/Count. 2 in 1 Layout Select the default value for layout when [2 in 1 Layout] is selected for Combine. Items available for the default value are as follows: Item Description g L to R f T to B Arranges from left to right or top to bottom. Default Setting (System Menu) 5 Press the U or V key to select [File Separation]. 1 Color Selection ********************* 2 Scan Resolution 3 FAX Resolution [ Exit ] 8-47 . Completed. 8 e R to L Arranges from right to left. The Function Default menu Function Default: a b appears. 1 In the Sys. The Common Settings menu Common Settings: a b appears. Menu/Count. 6 Press the OK key. 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] 2 Press the OK key. 4 Press the OK key. is displayed and the screen returns to the Function Default menu. menu. 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [Function Default].: a b key to select [Common Settings]. press the U or V Sys. File Separation: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 Each Page 7 Press the U or V key to select [Off] or [Each Page]. Use the procedure below to select the default value for layout. File Separation appears. 8 Press the OK key.

4 in 1 Layout Select the default value for layout when [4 in 1 Layout] is selected for Combine. i Down then Right Arranges from upper left to bottom. menu. Items available for the default value are as follows: Item Description h Right then Down Arranges from upper left to right. k Down then Left Arranges from upper right to bottom. 2 in 1 Layout a b 1 *g L to R f T to *********************B 2 e R to L 9 Press the U or V key to select [g L to R f T to B] or [e R to L]. Menu/Count. 6 Press the OK key. 1 In the Sys.: a b key to select [Common Settings]. 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] 8-48 . Default Setting (System Menu) 5 Press the U or V key to select [Detail Setting]. Use the procedure below to select the default value for layout. The Detail Setting menu Detail Setting: a b appears. j Left then Down Arranges from upper right to left. 1 2 in 1 Layout ********************* 2 4 in 1 Layout 3 Border Line [ Exit ] 7 Press the U or V key to select [2 in 1 Layout]. press the U or V Sys. 8 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Detail Setting menu. 2 in 1 Layout appears. Menu/Count. 10 Press the OK key.

10 Press the OK key. 1 Color Selection ********************* 2 Scan Resolution 3 FAX Resolution [ Exit ] 5 Press the U or V key to select [Detail Setting]. 1 2 in 1 Layout ********************* 2 4 in 1 Layout 8 3 Border Line [ Exit ] 7 Press the U or V key to select [4 in 1 Layout]. The Detail Setting menu Detail Setting: a b appears. 6 Press the OK key. The Function Default menu Function Default: a b appears. 4 Press the OK key. Completed. Default Setting (System Menu) 2 Press the OK key. 8 Press the OK key. 8-49 . [j Left then Down] or [k Down then Left]. [i Down then Right]. 4 in 1 Layout: a b 1 *h Right then Down ********************* 2 i Down then Right 3 j Left then Down 9 Press the U or V key to select [h Right then Down]. is displayed and the screen returns to the Detail Setting menu. 4 in 1 Layout appears. 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [Function Default]. The Common Settings menu Common Settings: a b appears.

4 Press the OK key. Default Setting (System Menu) Border Line Select the default value for border line when [2 in 1 Layout] is selected for Combine. l Solid Line Draws solid border lines. Menu/Count. Menu/Count. The Common Settings menu Common Settings: a b appears. menu. 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] 2 Press the OK key. Use the procedure below to select the default value for border line. The Detail Setting menu Detail Setting: a b appears. 1 2 in 1 Layout ********************* 2 4 in 1 Layout 3 Border Line [ Exit ] 7 Press the U or V key to select [Border Line]. n Positioning Mark Puts a mark on the border line position. 1 In the Sys. m Dotted Line Draws dotted border lines. Items available for the default value are as follows: Item Description None No border line. 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [Function Default].: a b key to select [Common Settings]. 6 Press the OK key. 1 Color Selection ********************* 2 Scan Resolution 3 FAX Resolution [ Exit ] 5 Press the U or V key to select [Detail Setting]. The Function Default menu Function Default: a b appears. press the U or V Sys. 8-50 .

Menu/Count. 1 In the Sys. press the U or V Sys. 8-51 .: a b key to select [Common Settings]. menu. is displayed and the screen returns to the Detail Setting menu. Orig. 10 Press the OK key. Items available for the default value are as follows: Item Description o Left/Right Left/right binding 8 p Top Top binding Use the procedure below to select the default value for the binding edge of the original. Border Line: a b 1 * None ********************* 2 l Solid Line 3 m Dotted Line 9 Press the U or V key to select [ None]. [l Solid Line]. [m Dotted Line] or [n Positioning Mark]. Menu/Count. Border Line appears. Default Setting (System Menu) 8 Press the OK key. Binding Select the default value for the binding edge of the original when [2-sided>>1-sided] or [2-sided>>2-sided] is selected for Duplex. Completed. 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [Function Default]. The Common Settings menu Common Settings: a b appears. 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] 2 Press the OK key.

Binding]. 6 Press the OK key. Completed. Binding appears. Default Setting (System Menu) 4 Press the OK key. Binding: a b 1 *o Left/Right ********************* 2 p Top 9 Press the U or V key to select [o Left/Right] or [ p Top]. 8 Press the OK key. 1 Color Selection ********************* 2 Scan Resolution 3 FAX Resolution [ Exit ] 5 Press the U or V key to select [Detail Setting]. is displayed and the screen returns to the Detail Setting menu. 8-52 . Orig. 1 2 in 1 layout ********************* 2 4 in 1 Layout 3 Border Line [ Exit ] 7 Press the U or V key to select [Orig. The Detail Setting menu Detail Setting: a b appears. 10 Press the OK key. Orig. The Function Default menu Function Default: a b appears.

The Function Default menu Function Default: a b appears. 6 Press the OK key. Menu/Count. 1 Language ********************* 8 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [Function Default]. The Common Settings menu Common Settings: a b appears.: a b key to select [Common Settings]. Default Setting (System Menu) Finish Binding Select the default value for the binding edge of the finished copies when [1-sided>>2-sided] or [2-sided>>2- sided] is selected for Duplex. Menu/Count. menu. 1 Color Selection ********************* 2 Scan Resolution 3 FAX Resolution [ Exit ] 5 Press the U or V key to select [Detail Setting]. Items available for the default value are as follows: Item Description o Left/Right Left/right binding p Top Top binding Use the procedure below to select the default value for the binding edge of the finished copies. 1 2 in 1 Layout ********************* 2 4 in 1 Layout 3 Border Line [ Exit ] 7 Press the U or V key to select [Finish Binding]. 8-53 . 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] 2 Press the OK key. 1 In the Sys. press the U or V Sys. The Detail Setting menu Detail Setting: a b appears. 4 Press the OK key.

10 Press the OK key. 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] 2 Press the OK key. Menu/Count. Binding: a b 1 *o Left/Right ********************* 2 p Top 9 Press the U or V key to select [ o Left/Right] or [p Top]. 1 Color Selection ********************* 2 Scan Resolution 3 FAX Resolution [ Exit ] 5 Press the U or V key to select [Detail Setting]. Completed.. Finish Binding appears. The Common Settings menu Common Settings: a b appears. Menu/Count. 8-54 . press the U or V Sys. Select the default value in the range from [1 Low(High Comp)] (high compression) to [5 High(Low Comp)] (low compression).: a b key to select [Common Settings]. The Function Default menu Function Default: a b appears. 1 In the Sys. Finish. 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [Function Default]. 4 Press the OK key. is displayed and the screen returns to the Detail Setting menu. menu. Default Setting (System Menu) 8 Press the OK key. Image Quality Select the default value for image quality when File Format is selected. Use the procedure below to select the default value for image quality.

Image Quality: a b 1 *1 Low(High Comp) ********************* 2 2 3 3 9 Press the U or V key to select from [1 Low(High Comp)] to [5 High(Low Comp)]. is displayed and the screen returns to the Detail Setting menu. 8 Press the OK key. 10 Press the OK key. Image Quality appears. Menu/Count. 1 2 in 1 layout ********************* 2 4 in 1 Layout 3 Border Line [ Exit ] 7 Press the U or V key to select [Image Quality]. The Common Settings menu Common Settings: a b appears. 8-55 . 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] 2 Press the OK key. press the U or V Sys. 8 Color TIFF Comp. The Detail Setting menu Detail Setting: a b appears. menu. Completed. Use the procedure below to set the default value for color TIFF compression method. Default Setting (System Menu) 6 Press the OK key. 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [Function Default].: a b key to select [Common Settings]. 1 In the Sys. Set the default value for compression method for TIFF images handled by this machine. Menu/Count.

press the U or V Sys. Completed. 1 In the Sys. 1 2 in 1 layout ********************* 2 4 in 1 Layout 3 Border Line [ Exit ] 7 Press the U or V key to select [Color TIFF Comp. menu. 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] 8-56 . The Function Default menu Function Default: a b appears. The Detail Setting menu Detail Setting: a b appears.: a b 1 *TIFF V6 ********************* 2 TTN2 9 Press the U or V key to select [TIFF V6] or [TTN2]. Color TIFF Comp.]. appears.: a b key to select [Common Settings]. 10 Press the OK key. The procedure for specifying the default PDF/A setting is explained below. Default Setting (System Menu) 4 Press the OK key. is displayed and the screen returns to the Detail Setting menu. Menu/Count. Menu/Count. 8 Press the OK key. 6 Press the OK key. 1 Color Selection ********************* 2 Scan Resolution 3 FAX Resolution [ Exit ] 5 Press the U or V key to select [Detail Setting]. Color TIFF Comp. PDF/A setting You can set the default PDF/A setting used in the machine.

1 Color Selection ********************* 2 Scan Resolution 3 FAX Resolution [ Exit ] 5 Press the U or V key to select [Detail Setting]. is displayed and the screen returns to the Detail Setting menu. The Detail Setting menu Detail Setting: a b appears. The PDF/A menu appears. 1 2 in 1 layout ********************* 2 4 in 1 Layout 8 3 Border Line [ Exit ] 7 Press the U or V key to select [PDF/A]. 8-57 . [PDF/A-1a]. The Common Settings menu Common Settings: a b appears. Completed. Default Setting (System Menu) 2 Press the OK key. 6 Press the OK key. 8 Press the OK key. 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [Function Default]. or [PDF/A-1b]. 4 Press the OK key. 10 Press the OK key. The Function Default menu Function Default: a b appears. PDF/A: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 PDF/A-1a 3 PDF/A-1b 9 Press the U or V key to select [Off].

: a b key to select [Common Settings]. 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [Login Operation]. Completed. menu. Default Setting (System Menu) Login Operation Specify the character entry method in the login screen that appears when user management is enabled. 6 Press the OK key. 4 Press the OK key. Menu/Count. Use the procedure below to adjust the Login Operation. Login Operation appears. 8-58 . is displayed and the screen returns to the Common Settings menu. Login Operation: a b 1 *Use Numeric Key ********************* 2 Select Character 5 Press the U or V key to select [Use Numeric Key] or [Select Character]. 1 In the Sys. Select Character Enter characters by selecting them from the character palette that appears. Item Description Use Numeric Key Use the numeric keys to select and enter characters. Menu/Count. 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] 2 Press the OK key. press the U or V Sys. The Common Settings menu Common Settings: a b appears.

Optional Memory: a b 1 *Normal ********************* 2 Printer Priority 3 Copy Priority 5 Press the U or V key to select [Normal]. you can specify whether most of the memory is allocated to the copy function or the print function. 8 1 In the Sys. press the U or V Sys. 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] 2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu Common Settings: a b appears. Item Description Normal The optional memory is allocated to the copy function or the print function based on a previously selected setting. Menu/Count.: a b key to select [Common Settings]. Copy Priority This allocates most memory to data spooling for sort copy. 4 Press the OK key. menu. Optional Memory appears. 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [Optional Memory]. Menu/Count. Default Setting (System Menu) Optional Memory If optional memory is installed. Printer Priority The amount of memory allocated to RAM disk memory and the amount of memory allocated to drawing can be increased. Use the procedure below to adjust the Optional Memory. the number of pages that can be printed in sort copying increases. [Printer Priority] or [Copy Priority]. When copy priority is specified. When print priority is specified. the maximum value that can be set in RAM disk mode increases. 8-59 .

menu. Default Setting (System Menu) 6 Press the OK key. 4 Press the OK key. If [On] is selected. RAM Disk Mode: D b appears and you return to the Common Settings (1 . Creating a RAM disk makes it possible to print from a Job Box. 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [RAM Disk Mode]. the RAM disk size screen **216* MB appears.: a b key to select [Common Settings]. 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. The machine is restarted. press the U or V Sys.512) menu. 8-60 . Are you sure? [ Yes ] [ No ] 7 Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] 2 Press the OK key. 6 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu Common Settings: a b appears. If [Off] is selected. The procedure for setting the RAM Disk Mode is explained below. RAM Disk Mode appears. Completed. RAM Disk Mode: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On 5 Press the U or V key to select [Off] or [On]. Menu/Count. Restart. a RAM disk can be created and its size can be set. A confirmation screen appears. RAM Disk Mode When optional memory is installed.

8 8-61 . 8 Press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears. Restart. The machine is restarted. Default Setting (System Menu) 7 Enter the size of the RAM disk with the numeric keys. Are you sure? [ Yes ] [ No ] 9 Press [Yes] (the Left Select key).

menu. [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [Photo Processing]. Menu/Count. Dithering(Rough) Sets the resolution to low. Use the procedure below to set Photo Processing. Photo Processing Set the resolution for copying a photo. Default Setting (System Menu) Copy Settings The following settings are available for copying functions. • Photo Processing …8-62 • Paper Selection …8-63 • Auto Paper Selection …8-64 • Auto % Priority …8-65 • DP Read Action …8-66 • Select Key Set …8-68 NOTE: If user login administration is enabled. 1 In the Sys. you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges. Item Description Dithering(Normal) Sets the resolution to standard. The Copy menu appears. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Copy]. 8-62 . press the U or V Sys. Copy: a b 1 Photo Processing ********************* 2 Paper Selection 3 AutoPaperSelect. 7 Copy ********************* 8 Printer 9 Send [ Exit ] 2 Press the OK key.

8 Def. Paper Selection Set the default paper selection. menu. 1 In the Sys. Copy: a b 1 Photo Processing ********************* 2 Paper Selection 3 AutoPaperSelect. press the U or V Sys. Menu/Count. The Copy menu appears. 6 Press the OK key. Photo Processing appears. The table below shows the available settings. [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [Paper Selection].:a b key to select [Copy]. Item Description Auto Automatically select the cassette containing paper in the same size as originals. PaperSource Select paper source set by Default Paper Source (refer to page 8-21). 7 Copy ********************* 8 Printer 9 Send [ Exit ] 2 Press the OK key. Photo Processing:a b 1 *Dithering(Normal) ********************* 2 Dithering(Rough) 5 Press the U or V key to select [Dithering(Normal)] or [Dithering(Rough)]. is displayed and the screen returns to the Copy menu. Completed. 8-63 . Default Setting (System Menu) 4 Press the OK key. Menu/Count. Use the procedure below to set the default paper selection.

Auto Paper Selection If [Auto] is selected for Paper Selection. menu. 8-64 . is displayed and the screen returns to the Copy menu.]. 6 Press the OK key. PaperSource 5 Press the U or V key to select [Auto] or [Def. Paper Source]. Copy: a b 1 Photo Processing ********************* 2 Paper Selection 3 AutoPaperSelect. Menu/Count. The table below shows the available settings. regardless the zoom. Paper Selection: a b 1 *Auto ********************* 2 Def. 1 In the Sys. Item Description MostSuitableSize Select paper based on the current zoom and the size of the original. [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [AutoPaperSelect. Default Setting (System Menu) 4 Press the OK key. Menu/Count. set the paper size selection method when the zoom changes. Completed. 7 Copy ********************* 8 Printer 9 Send [ Exit ] 2 Press the OK key. The Copy menu appears. press the U or V Sys.:a b key to select [Copy]. Use the procedure below to specify the action performed for Auto Paper Selection. Paper Selection appears. Same as OrigSize Select paper that matches the size of the original.

8 On Automatic zoom performed as appropriate. menu. Use the procedure below to specify the automatic zoom priority.:a b key to select [Copy]. 1 In the Sys. Default Setting (System Menu) 4 Press the OK key. 8-65 . The default setting is Off.:a b 1 *MostSuitableSize ********************* 2 Same as OrigSize 5 Press the U or V key to select [MostSuitableSize] or [Same as OrigSize]. [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [Auto % Priority]. AutoPaperSelect. The table below shows the available settings. Auto % Priority When a paper source of different size from the original is selected. is displayed and the screen returns to the Copy menu. Completed. The Copy menu appears. Menu/Count. Menu/Count. select whether automatic zoom (reduce/ zoom) is performed. Item Detail Off No zoom performed (copied in original size). AutoPaperSelect. Copy: a b 1 Photo Processing ********************* 2 Paper Selection 3 AutoPaperSelect. 6 Press the OK key. press the U or V Sys. appears. 7 Copy ********************* 8 Printer 9 Send [ Exit ] 2 Press the OK key.

1 In the Sys. The table below shows the available settings. menu. Item Detail Speed Priority Priority is given to speed when scanning Quality Priority Priority is given to image quality when scanning Use the procedure below to specify the DP Read Action. AutoPaperSelect. Default Setting (System Menu) 4 Press the OK key. Auto % Priority: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On 5 Press the U or V key to select [Off] or [On]. DP Read Action appears. [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [DP Read Action]. appears. 4 Press the OK key. Menu/Count. 7 Copy ********************* 8 Printer 9 Send [ Exit ] 2 Press the OK key.:a b key to select [Copy]. Completed. DP Read Action You can set whether priority is given to speed or image quality when scanning an original on the document processor. 6 Press the OK key. is displayed and the screen returns to the Copy menu. The Copy menu appears. Copy: a b 1 Photo Processing ********************* 2 Paper Selection 3 AutoPaperSelect. press the U or V Sys. DP Read Action: a b 1 *Speed Priority ********************* 2 Quality Priority 8-66 . The default setting is Speed Priority. Menu/Count.

6 Press the OK key. Completed. 8 8-67 . is displayed and the screen returns to the Copy menu. Default Setting (System Menu) 5 Press the U or V key to select [Speed Priority] or [Quality Priority].

Menu/Count. You can register one of the following functions to each key.]. The Copy menu appears. Default Setting (System Menu) Select Key Set If you register a function to the Left Select key or Right Select key. 8-68 . menu. you can quickly set the function when using copy functions. Menu/Count.Orientation • Original Image • Density • EcoPrint • Continuous Scan • File Name Entry • JobFinish Notice • Print Override • Color Selection • Color Balance • Sharpness • Backgrnd Density • Saturation Use the procedure below to set Select Key Set. [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [Select Key Set. 7 Copy ********************* 8 Printer 9 Send [ Exit ] 2 Press the OK key. 1 In the Sys.:a b key to select [Copy]. Copy: a b 1 Photo Processing ********************* 2 Paper Selection 3 AutoPaperSelect. press the U or V Sys. • None • Paper Selection • Collate • Duplex • Zoom • Combine • Original Size • Orig.

Completed. appears. 8 Press the OK key. 8-69 .: a b 1 Left ********************* 2 Right [ Exit ] 5 Press the U or V key to select [Left] or [Right]. Select Key Set. 6 Combine 7 Press the U or V key to select the function you want to register to the flexible key. 6 Press the OK key. The screen shown is the one when [Left] is 5 *Zoom ********************* selected. This function is already registered. is displayed and the screen returns to the Copy menu. IMPORTANT: If you try to set the function that is 8 This function is registered to the other flexible key. Select Key Set. you cannot set it and already registered. Default Setting (System Menu) 4 Press the OK key. is displayed. This displays the function Left: a b selection screen for the flexible key selected in 4 Duplex step 5.

Select Key Set If you register a function to the Left Select key or Right Select key. you can quickly set the function when using sending functions. you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges. • None • Color Selection • Original Size • Original Image • Scan Resolution • Sending Size • Zoom • Orig. • Select Key Set …8-70 • Destination confirmation screen before transmission …8-72 NOTE: If user login administration is enabled. Default Setting (System Menu) Sending Settings The sending settings allow you to specify the following sending function options. You can register one of the following functions to each key.Orientation • Continuous Scan • File Format • File Name Entry • Subject/Body • JobFinish Notice • FAX Resolution • FAX Direct TX • FAX Delayed TX • FAX RX Polling • Density • Duplex • FTP Encrypted TX • File Separation • Sharpness • Backgrnd Density 8-70 .

Send: a b 1 Select Key Set. 8 Press the OK key.]. is displayed and the screen returns to the Send menu. The screen shown is the one when [Left] is 3 Original Size ********************* selected. Select Key Set. ********************* 2 DestinationCheck [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [Select Key Set. Completed. is displayed. This displays the function Left: a b selection screen for the flexible key selected in 2 Color Selection step 5. Default Setting (System Menu) Use the procedure below to set Select Key Set. 7 Copy 8 Printer 9 Send ********************* [ Exit ] 2 Press the OK key. IMPORTANT: If you try to set the function that is This function is registered to the other flexible key. Menu/Count. Select Key Set.:a b key to select [Send]. press the U or V Sys. Menu/Count. 8-71 . 1 In the Sys.: a b 1 Left ********************* 2 Right 8 [ Exit ] 5 Press the U or V key to select [Left] or [Right]. This function is already registered. 4 Original Image 7 Press the U or V key to select the function you want to register to the flexible key. you cannot set it and already registered. menu. appears. 6 Press the OK key. 4 Press the OK key. The Send menu appears.

Default Setting (System Menu)

Destination confirmation screen before transmission
You can specify whether or not the destination confirmation screen appears after the Start key is pressed or
after a destination is added or edited before transmission.

The table below shows the available settings..

Item Detail

Check beforeSend Specify whether or not the destination
confirmation screen appears before
transmission.

Check New Dest. Specify whether or not the destination
confirmation screen appears when the
destination is new.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Send].
7 Copy
8 Printer
9 Send
*********************
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Send menu appears.
Send: a b
1 Select Key Set.
*********************
2 DestinationCheck

[ Exit ]

3 Press the U or V key to select
[DestinationCheck].

4 Press the OK key. The destination confirmation
DestinationCheck:a b menu appears.
1 Check beforeSend
*********************
2 Check New Dest.

[ Exit ]

5 Press the U or V key to select [Check before
Send] or [Check New Dest.].

8-72

Default Setting (System Menu)

6 Press the OK key. The menu of the selected
Check beforeSend:a b function appears.
1 *OFF
*********************
2 On The screen when the Check before Send menu is
selected is shown.

7 Press the U or V key to select the desired
function.

8 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Send menu.

8

8-73

Default Setting (System Menu)

Document Box Settings
The following settings are available for Document Box.

• Select Key Set …8-74
• Job Box …8-76

Select Key Set
If you register a function to the Left Select key or Right Select key, you can quickly set the function when
printing from or saving to a document box.

You can register one of the following functions to each key for either of printing from and saving to a document
box.

Print
• None
• Collate
• Paper Selection
• Duplex
• File Name Entry
• JobFinish Notice
• Print Override
• Color Selection
• Encrypted PDF
• JPEG/TIFF Print
• XPS FitTo Page
• Del. afterPrint

Store
• None
• Color Selection
• Original Size
• Original Image
• Scan Resolution
• Storing Size
• Zoom
• Orig.Orientation
• Continuous Scan
• File Format
• File Name Entry
• JobFinish Notice
• Density
• Duplex

8-74

Default Setting (System Menu)

• Sharpness
• Backgrnd Density

Use the procedure below to set Select Key Set.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Document Box].
; Document Box
*********************
< Edit Destination
= Adjust/Maint.
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Document Box menu
Document Box: a b appears.
1 Sub Address Box
*********************
2 Select Key Set.
3 Polling Box
[ Exit ]

3 Press the U or V key to select [Select Key Set.].

4 Press the OK key. Select Key Set. appears. 8
Select Key Set.: a b
1 Print
*********************
2 Store

[ Exit ]

5 Press the U or V key to select [Print] or [Store].

6 Press the OK key. This displays the flexible key
Print: a b selection screen for the function selected in step 5.
1 Left
********************* The screen shown is the one when [Print] is
2 Right selected.

[ Exit ]

7 Press the U or V key to select [Left] or [Right].

8 Press the OK key. This displays the function
Left: a b selection screen for the flexible key selected in
1 None
********************* step 7. The screen shown is the one when [Left] is
2 Collate selected.
3 Paper Selection

9 Press the U or V key to select the function you
want to register to the flexible key.

8-75

Default Setting (System Menu)

10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Document Box menu.

IMPORTANT: If you try to set the function that is
This function is registered to the other flexible key, you cannot set it and
already registered. This function is already registered. is displayed.

Job Box
Job Box settings can be set. Select settings for Quick Copy Jobs and Job Retention Deletion. Quick Copy Jobs
sets the number of files that can be saved using Quick Copy. Job Ret. Deletion sets the period of time a job
retention file can be saved. When a file has been saved for longer than the period, it is automatically deleted.

Quick Copy Jobs

The procedure for setting Quick Copy Jobs is explained below.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Document Box].
; Document Box
*********************
< Edit Destination
= Adjust/Maint.
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Document Box menu
Document Box: a b appears.
1 Sub Address Box
*********************
2 Select Key Set.
3 Polling Box
[ Exit ]

3 Press the U or V key to select [Job Box].

4 Press the OK key. The Job Box screen appears.
Job Box: a b
1 Quick Copy Jobs
*********************
2 JobRet. Deletion

5 Press the U or V key to select [Quick Copy Jobs].

8-76

Default Setting (System Menu)

6 Press the OK key. The Quick Copy Jobs screen
Quick Copy Jobs: D b appears.
(1 - 50)
****0* job(s)

7 Enter the number of Quick Copy Jobs that can be
saved with the numeric keys.

8 Press the OK key. Completed. appears and you
return to the Common Settings menu.

Job Retention Deletion

The procedure for setting Job Retention Deletion is explained below.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Document Box].
; Document Box
*********************
< Edit Destination
= Adjust/Maint.
[ Exit ] 8
2 Press the OK key. The Document Box menu
Document Box: a b appears.
1 Sub Address Box
*********************
2 Select Key Set.
3 Polling Box
[ Exit ]

3 Press the U or V key to select [Job Box].

4 Press the OK key. The Job Box screen appears.
Job Box: a b
1 Quick Copy Jobs
*********************
2 JobRet. Deletion

5 Press the U or V key to select [Job Ret. Deletion].

6 Press the OK key. The Job Retention Deletion
JobRet. Deletion:a b screen appears.
1 *Off
*********************
2 1 hour
3 4 hours

8-77

Default Setting (System Menu)

7 Press the U or V key to select the period that jobs
are retained.

8 Press the OK key. Completed. appears and you
return to the Common Settings menu.

8-78

Default Setting (System Menu)

Printer Settings
Printing from computers, settings are generally made on the application software screen. However, the
following settings are available for configuring the defaults to customize the machine.

• Emuration Set …8-79
• Color Setting …8-82
• EcoPrint …8-82
• Override A4/LTR …8-83
• Duplex …8-84
• Copies …8-85
• Orientation …8-87
• Gloss Mode …8-88
• Wide A4 …8-89
• FormFeed Timeout …8-89
• LF Action …8-90
• CR Action …8-91
• Print Offset …8-92
• Paper Feed Mode…8-93

8
NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with
administrator privileges.

Emuration Set
Select the emulation for operating this machine by commands oriented to other types of printers.

Selection of emulation

This machine can emulate the following printers:

• PCL6
• KPDL
• KPDL(Auto)

NOTE: When [KPDL (Auto)] is selected for the emulation mode, automatic switching between KPDL and
PCL6 (substitute emulation) takes place based on the print data.

Use the procedure below to select the emulation.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Printer].
7 Copy
8 Printer
*********************
9 Send
[ Exit ]

8-79

Default Setting (System Menu)

2 Press the OK key. The Printer menu appears.
Printer: a b
1 Emulation Set.
*********************
2 Color Setting
3 EcoPrint
[ Exit ]

3 Press the U or V key to select [Emuration Set.].

4 Press the OK key. Emuration Set. appears.
Emulation Set.: a b
1 *PCL6
*********************
2 KPDL
3 KPDL(Auto)

5 Press the U or V key to select the printer you want
to emulate.

6 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Printer menu.

NOTE: If you select [KPDL] or [KPDL(Auto)], the
operation after selecting the emulation is different from
others.

If you select [KPDL], refer to page 8-80.
If you select [KPDL(Auto)], refer to page 8-81.

When KPDL Is Selected for Emulation

When you use the KPDL emulation mode, set whether or not to output KPDL error reports. The default setting
is Off.

Use the procedure below to make the setting.

1 In Emulation Set, press the U or V key to select
Emulation Set.: a b [KPDL].
1 PCL6
2 KPDL
*********************
3 KPDL(Auto)

2 Press the OK key. KPDL Error Rpt appears.
KPDL Error Rpt: a b
1 *Off
*********************
2 On

8-80

Default Setting (System Menu)

3 Press the U or V key to select [Off] or [On].

4 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Printer menu.

When KPDL(Auto) Is Selected for Emulation

When you select [KPDL(Auto)], set whether or not to output KPDL error reports. The default setting is Off.

Use the procedure below to make the setting.

1 In Emulation Set, press the U or V key to select
Emulation Set.: a b [KPDL(Auto)].
1 PCL6
2 KPDL
3 KPDL(Auto)
*********************

2 Press the OK key. KPDL Error Rpt appears.
KPDL Error Rpt: a b
1 *Off
*********************
2 On
8

3 Press the U or V key to select [Off] or [On].

4 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Printer menu.

8-81

menu. Default Setting (System Menu) Color Setting You can select whether status reports are printed in color or black & white. Menu/Count. Color Setting appears. press the U or V Sys. Menu/Count. Use the procedure below to specify the EcoPrint setting. 2 Color Setting 3 EcoPrint [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [Color Setting].:a b key to select [Printer]. is displayed and the screen returns to the Printer menu. menu. Color Setting: a b ********************* 1 *Color 2 Black & White 5 Press the U or V key to select to select [Color] or [Black & White]. Printer: a b ********************* 1 Emulation Set. Menu/Count. Completed. Menu/Count. press the U or V Sys. Use the procedure below to select the Color Setting. 6 Press the OK key.:a b key to select [Printer]. EcoPrint EcoPrint conserves toner when printing. 1 In the Sys. The Printer menu appears. 4 Press the OK key. 7 Copy 8 Printer ********************* 9 Send [ Exit ] 2 Press the OK key. 1 In the Sys. This is recommended for test copies where faded printing is not a problem. 7 Copy 8 Printer ********************* 9 Send [ Exit ] 8-82 .

:a b key to select [Printer]. The default setting is On. Menu/Count. Printer: a b ********************* 1 Emulation Set. 6 Press the OK key. EcoPrint: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On 5 Press the U or V key to select [Off] or [On]. The Printer menu appears. The table below shows the available settings. Menu/Count. as the same size when printing. Off A4 and Letter are not regarded as the same in size. menu. which are similar in size. 7 Copy 8 Printer ********************* 9 Send [ Exit ] 8-83 . Override A4/LTR 8 Select whether to treat A4 size and Letter. is displayed and the screen returns to the Printer menu. Completed. The machine will use whichever size is in the paper source. EcoPrint appears. press the U or V Sys. Item Description On A4 and Letter are regarded as the same in size. Default Setting (System Menu) 2 Press the OK key. Use the procedure below to specify the override A4/Letter setting. 2 Color Setting 3 EcoPrint [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [EcoPrint]. 1 In the Sys. 4 Press the OK key.

Override A4/LTR: a b 1 Off 2 *On ********************* 5 Press the U or V key to select [Off] or [On]. Item Description Finish Off No duplex mode Bind Long Longer edge Edge bound Bind Short Shorter edge Edge bound Use the procedure below to select a duplex setting. Default Setting (System Menu) 2 Press the OK key. menu. The Printer menu appears. Menu/Count. 4 Press the OK key. is displayed and the screen returns to the Printer menu. The table below shows the available settings. 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. Completed.:a b key to select [Printer]. 2 Color Setting 3 EcoPrint [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [Override A4/LTR]. Override A4/LTR appears. 7 Copy 8 Printer ********************* 9 Send [ Exit ] 8-84 . 6 Press the OK key. Printer: a b ********************* 1 Emulation Set. press the U or V Sys. Duplex Select binding orientation for duplex mode.

Duplex appears. Printer: a b ********************* 1 Emulation Set. [Bind Long Edge] or [Bind Short Edge]. 6 Press the OK key. Printer: a b ********************* 1 Emulation Set. is displayed and the screen returns to the Printer menu. from 1 to 999. 8-85 . press the U or V Sys. menu. 1 In the Sys. Duplex: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 Bind Long Edge 3 Bind Short Edge 5 Press the U or V key to select [Off]. 4 Press the OK key. The Printer menu appears. The Printer menu appears. Completed. Menu/Count. 2 Color Setting 3 EcoPrint [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [Copies]. Menu/Count. Default Setting (System Menu) 2 Press the OK key. 8 Copies Set the default number of copies.:a b key to select [Printer]. Use the procedure below to specify the default number of copies. 2 Color Setting 3 EcoPrint [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [Duplex]. 7 Copy 8 Printer ********************* 9 Send [ Exit ] 2 Press the OK key.

Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Printer menu. Copies: D b (1 . 6 Press the OK key. Copies appears. 8-86 . Default Setting (System Menu) 4 Press the OK key.999) *******1*copies 5 Press the U or V key or the numeric keys to set the default number of copies.

Portrait or Landscape. Menu/Count. Default Setting (System Menu) Orientation Set the default orientation. Orientation appears. Menu/Count. 8-87 . The Printer menu appears. Portrait Landscape Printer Printer Use the procedure below to set the default orientation for printing. 2 Color Setting 3 EcoPrint [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [Orientation]. press the U or V Sys. 4 Press the OK key. is displayed and the screen returns to the Printer menu.:a b key to select [Printer]. Orientation: a b 1 *Portrait ********************* 2 Landscape 5 Press the U or V key to select [Portrait] or [Landscape]. Printer: a b ********************* 1 Emulation Set. 1 In the Sys. Completed. 7 Copy 8 Printer ********************* 9 Send [ Exit ] 8 2 Press the OK key. menu. 6 Press the OK key.

1 In the Sys. Printer: a b ********************* 1 Emulation Set. is displayed and the screen returns to the Printer menu. Default Setting (System Menu) Gloss Mode Gloss Mode. Use the procedure below to select Gloss mode.:a b key to select [Printer]. Gloss Mode appears. 7 Copy 8 Printer ********************* 9 Send [ Exit ] 2 Press the OK key. Menu/Count. 4 Press the OK key. increases the effect of glossiness in printing by reducing the printing speed by half. Menu/Count. 6 Press the OK key. 8-88 . 2 Color Setting 3 EcoPrint [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [Gloss Mode]. menu. IMPORTANT: Gloss Mode is not available when Labels and Transparency is selected as the paper type setting. when set to High. Depending on the paper used. try using thicker paper. The Printer menu appears. printing in gloss mode may cause wrinkle in paper. Gloss Mode: a b 1 *Low ********************* 2 High 5 Press the U or V key to select [Low] or [High]. To reduce wrinkle. press the U or V Sys. Completed.

1 In the Sys. press the U or V Sys. When the preset timeout passes. Menu/Count. Use the procedure below to set the form feed timeout. menu.:a b key to select [Printer]. the machine automatically prints paper. Menu/Count. 7 Copy 8 Printer ********************* 9 Send [ Exit ] 2 Press the OK key. 4 Press the OK key. Wide A4 appears. the machine may sometimes wait if there is no information signalling that the last page does not have any more data to be printed. Default Setting (System Menu) Wide A4 Turn this to on to increase the maximum number of characters that can be printed in a line for an A4 page (78 characters at 10 pitch) and Letter size page (80 characters at 10 pitch). Menu/Count. FormFeed Timeout Receiving print data from the computer. 2 Color Setting 3 EcoPrint [ Exit ] 8 3 Press the U or V key to select [Wide A4]. The options are between 5 and 495 seconds.:a b key to select [Printer]. 7 Copy 8 Printer ********************* 9 Send [ Exit ] 8-89 . Menu/Count. press the U or V Sys. 6 Press the OK key. is displayed and the screen returns to the Printer menu. This setting is only effective in PCL 6 emulation. menu. The Printer menu appears. Wide A4: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On 5 Press the U or V key to select [Off] or [On]. Printer: a b ********************* 1 Emulation Set. Completed. Use the procedure below to select Wide A4. 1 In the Sys.

Use the procedure below to specify a LF action. 2 Color Setting 3 EcoPrint [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [FormFeed Timeout]. Menu/Count. 5 Press the U or V key to set the Form Feed Timeout. The Printer menu appears. 1 In the Sys. Ignore LF No line feed performed. Completed. LF Action Set the line feed action when the machine receives the line feed code (character code 0AH). LF and CR Line feed and character return performed. menu. Default Setting (System Menu) 2 Press the OK key. You can set the timeout delay in seconds. Printer: a b ********************* 1 Emulation Set. You cannot use the numeric keys to enter this value. FormFeed Timeout appears. press the U or V Sys. Menu/Count. 4 Press the OK key. The default setting is LF Only. The table below shows the available settings. FormFeed TimeOut: D b (5 . is displayed and the screen returns to the Printer menu. 7 Copy 8 Printer ********************* 9 Send [ Exit ] 8-90 .:a b key to select [Printer]. Item Description LF Only Only line feed performed. 6 Press the OK key.495) ******30*Sec.

Menu/Count. Completed. Ignore CR No character return performed. 1 In the Sys. LF Action appears. 7 Copy 8 Printer ********************* 9 Send [ Exit ] 8-91 . is displayed and the screen returns to the Printer menu. 8 CR Action Set the character return action when the machine receives the character return code (character code 0DH). 4 Press the OK key. press the U or V Sys. The Printer menu appears. LF and CR Character return and line feed performed. menu. Default Setting (System Menu) 2 Press the OK key. ********************* 2 EcoPrint 3 Override A4/LTR [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [LF Action]. The table below shows the available settings. [LF and CR] or [Ignore LF]. Use the procedure below to specify a CR action. Item Description CR Only Only character return performed.:a b key to select [Printer]. Printer: a b 1 Emulation Set. The default setting is CR Only. LF Action: M b 1 *LF Only ********************* 2 LF and CR 3 Ignore LF 5 Press the U or V key to select [LF Only]. Menu/Count. 6 Press the OK key.

8-92 . 7 Copy 8 Printer ********************* 9 Send [ Exit ] 2 Press the OK key. 6 Press the OK key. ********************* 2 EcoPrint 3 Override A4/LTR [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [CR Action]. is displayed and the screen returns to the Printer menu. Completed. 4 Press the OK key. The Printer menu appears. Default Setting (System Menu) 2 Press the OK key. 2 Color Setting 3 EcoPrint [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [Print Offset]. The Printer menu appears. Menu/Count. Use the procedure below to set the Print Offset. Printer: a b ********************* 1 Emulation Set.:a b key to select [Printer]. [LF and CR] or [Ignore CR]. menu. 1 In the Sys. CR Action: a b 1 *CR Only ********************* 2 LF and CR 3 Ignore CR 5 Press the U or V key to select [CR Only]. Print Offset Print range correction can be used to correct the horizontal and vertical print ranges in order to correct image skew. press the U or V Sys. Printer: a b 1 Emulation Set. Menu/Count.

Menu/Count. 7 Press the U or V key to set the horizontal range correction value.+76. 8 Press the OK key.0) - J ****76. menu. 6 Press the OK key. 7 Copy 8 Printer ********************* 9 Send [ Exit ] 2 Press the OK key. 5 Press the U or V key to set the vertical range correction value. is displayed and the screen returns to the Printer menu.:a b key to select [Printer]. The Printer menu appears.0 . 1 In the Sys.0 .0) - x ****76. The default setting is Auto. Item Description Auto Sets the paper feed direction automatically. Menu/Count. (-76. The vertical print range Print Offset(V): D b correction menu appears. 8 Paper Feed Mode Set the default value of the paper feed direction used for the printer functions. (-76. Fixed Sets the paper feed direction the same as in the previous printing operation. The horizontal print range Print Offset(H): D b correction menu appears. Default Setting (System Menu) 4 Press the OK key.+76. Completed. Printer: a b 1 Emulation Set.0*mm.0*mm. ********************* 2 EcoPrint 3 Override A4/LTR [ Exit ] 8-93 . Use the procedure below to set Paper Feed Mode. press the U or V Sys.

4 Press the OK key. 8-94 . Completed. Default Setting (System Menu) 3 Press the U or V key to select [Paper Feed Mode]. Paper Feed Mode: a b 1 *Auto ********************* 2 Fixed 5 Press the U or V key to select [Auto] or [Fixed]. 6 Press the OK key. is displayed and the screen returns to the Printer menu. Paper Feed Mode appears.

You can select whether status reports are printed in color or black & white. Refer to Color Setting on 8-82 Printing Reports Printable reports are as follows. Menu Map Statu s Page FS-C2126MFP Firmware Versio n 8 Status Page Check the information including current settings. and optional equipment installed. NOTE: If user login administration is enabled. available memory space. Statu s Page FS-C2126MFP Firmware Versio n 8-95 . Menu map Outputs a menu map of this machine. you can only print by logging in with administrator privileges. Default settings for printing the result reports can also be configured. Default Setting (System Menu) Printing Reports/Sending Notice Print reports to check the machine settings and status.

:a b key to select [Report]. The Report Print menu appears. 8-96 . Report: a b 1 Report Print ********************* 2 Admin Rpt Set. Use the procedure below to print a Menu Map / Status Page / Font List. Menu/Count. Report Print: a b 1 Menu Map ********************* 2 Status Page 3 Font List [ Exit ] 5 Press the U or V key to select [Menu Map]. 1 Report ********************* 2 Counter 3 System [ Exit ] 2 Press the OK key. Default Setting (System Menu) Font List Check the font samples installed in the machine. 4 Press the OK key. [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [Report Print]. menu. The Report menu appears. [Status Page] or [Font List]. 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. 3 Result Rpt Set. press the U or V Sys.

[ Yes ] [ No ] 7 Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). menu. 8 FS-C2126MFP Use the procedure below to print a Service Status / Network Status. Service Status Page More detailed information is available than on the Status Page. network address and protocol.:a b key to select [Adjust/Maint. The selected report is output. A confirmation screen appears. Service personnel usually print the service status pages for maintenance purpose. Menu/Count. ********************* [ Exit ] 8-97 . Are you sure? The screen shown is the one when Status Page is z Status Page selected. is displayed and the screen returns to the Report Print menu. Accepted. the machine is prohibited to be used. .]. Now. Print. press the U or V Sys. NOTE: When acceptance of jobs is prohibited. 1 In the Sys. is displayed and the output is canceled. Default Setting (System Menu) 6 Press the OK key. Menu/Count. Document Box < Edit Destination = Adjust/Maint. Network Status Page Check the information including network interface firmware version.

menu. Adj. 6 Press the OK key. The Adjust/Maint. 4 Press the OK key. the machine is prohibited to be used. ********************* 2 Send/Box Density 3 AutoColorCorrect [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [Service Setting]. A confirmation screen appears. Service Setting appears. Print. 8-98 . menu Adjust/Maint.: a b appears. is displayed and the output is canceled. Service Setting: a b 1 Service Status ********************* 2 Network Status 3 Test Page [ Exit ] 5 Press the U or V key to select [Service Status] or [Network Status]. Accepted. NOTE: When acceptance of jobs is prohibited. Now. is displayed and the screen returns to the Adjust/Maint. Default Setting (System Menu) 2 Press the OK key. The selected report is output. Are you sure? The screen shown is the one when Network Status z Network Status is selected. [ Yes ] [ No ] 7 Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). 1 Copy Denst.

1 Send Result ********************* 2 FAX RX Result 3 JobFinish Notice [ Exit ] 8-99 .: a b appears. The Result Rpt Set. Item Description Off No result report printed. press the U or V Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Report]. 1 In the Sys. The Report menu appears. On Result report automatically printed. 3 Result Rpt Set. Transmitted images can also be attached. 1 Report ********************* 8 2 Counter 3 System [ Exit ] 2 Press the OK key. The default setting is Error Only. The table below shows the available settings. Use the procedure below to send a Result Report. [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [Result Rpt Set. Menu/Count. menu Result Rpt Set. 4 Press the OK key. Transmitted images can also be attached. Report: a b 1 Report Print ********************* 2 Admin Rpt Set. the reports are printed only for the destinations with the errors. menu. If two or more destinations are registered. Error Only Result report printed only when a transmission ends in an error. Default Setting (System Menu) Send Result Report Automatically print a report of transmission result when a transmission is complete.].

1 E-mail/Folder ********************* 2 FAX 3 CancelBeforeSend [ Exit ] 6 Press the U or V key to select [E-mail/Folder]. [CancelBeforeSend] is not displayed. Default Setting (System Menu) 5 Press the U or V key to select [Send Result]. is displayed and the screen returns to the Send Result menu. 8-100 . When selecting [Off] in both E-mail/Folder and FAX menu. When selecting [CancelBeforeSend]. press the U or V key to select [Off] or [On] 8 Press the OK key. 2 On 3 *Error Only ********************* NOTE: Selecting [CancelBeforeSend] can be specified whether the machine prints the report when canceling the operation before sending. 7 Press the U or V key to select [Off]. Completed. E-mail/Folder: a b [FAX] or [CancelBeforeSend]. A Result Report is sent. [On] or [Error Only]. Selected menu 1 Off appears. The Send Result: a b Send Result menu appears.

: Document Box . menu. Copy Denst.: a b 1 Auto ********************* 2 Manual [ Exit ] 8-101 .]. Adj. Adj. (Altitude adjustment setting) …8-114 • MC (Main charger output setting) …8-115 NOTE: If user login administration is enabled. ********************* [ Exit ] 2 Press the OK key. Copy Denst. press the U or V Sys. Adjustment can be made in 7 levels both in auto and manual density modes.]. Default Setting (System Menu) Adjustment/Maintenance Adjust printing quality and conduct machine maintenance. Adj. 4 Press the OK key. 1 In the Sys. …8-104 • Correct. • Copy Denst. Menu/Count. 1 Copy Denst. Edit Destination < Adjust/Maint. Adj. Copy Denst. The Adjust/Maint. ********************* 2 Send/Box Density 3 AutoColorCorrect [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [Copy Denst. Use the procedure below to adjust the copy density. appears. Adj. 8 Adjust copy density. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Adjust/Maint. menu Adjust/Maint. Bk Line …8-111 • LaserScanner Cln (Laser scanner cleaning mode setting) …8-112 • Drum Refresh (Drum refresh mode setting) …8-113 • Altitude Adj. …8-101 • Send/Box Density …8-102 • AutoColorCorrect …8-103 • ColorCalibration …8-104 • Color Regist.: a b appears. Adj. you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges.

The Adjust/Maint. 6 Press the OK key. ********************* 2 Send/Box Density 3 AutoColorCorrect [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [Send/Box Density]. 8 Press the OK key. : Document Box . 5 +1 7 Press the U or V key to select the density from [- 3 Lighter] to [+3 Darker]. ********************* [ Exit ] 2 Press the OK key. Send/Box Density Adjust scan density when sending or storing the data in Document Box. menu Adjust/Maint. Menu/Count. 4 Press the OK key. This displays the density Manual: a b selection screen for the mode selected in step 5. Completed. press the U or V Sys. Send/Box Density:a b 1 Auto ********************* 2 Manual [ Exit ] 5 Press the U or V key to select [Auto] or [Manual]. Menu/Count. 8-102 . Default Setting (System Menu) 5 Press the U or V key to select [Auto] or [Manual]. Edit Destination < Adjust/Maint. 1 Copy Denst.: a b appears.:a b key to select [Adjust/Maint.]. menu. Send/Box Density appears. is displayed and the screen returns to the Adjust/Maint. 3 -1 The screen shown is the one when [Manual] is 4 * 0 Normal ********************* selected. 1 In the Sys. menu. Adjustment can be made in 7 levels both in auto and manual density modes. Adj.

Sys. 6 Press the OK key. The Adjust/Maint. menu Adjust/Maint. Edit Destination < Adjust/Maint. 8 Press the OK key. menu. while a larger value will tend to increase the number of originals being identified as black and white. ********************* 2 Send/Box Density 3 AutoColorCorrect [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [AutoColorCorrect]. AutoColorCorrect: a b ********************* 1 5 2 4 3 3 5 Press theU or V key to select a value from [5] to [1]. 4 Press the OK key. 5 +1 7 Press the U or V key to select the density from [- 3 Lighter] to [+3 Darker]. Setting a lower value will result in more originals being identified as color. menu. AutoColorCorrect appears. is displayed and the screen returns to the Adjust/Maint. press the U or V key to select [Adjust/Maint. Menu/Count. Default Setting (System Menu) 6 Press the OK key.:a b 1 In the Sys. menu. ********************* [ Exit ] 2 Press the OK key. This displays the density Manual: a b selection screen for the mode selected in step 5. 8-103 . 8 : Document Box . is displayed and the screen returns to the Adjust/Maint. AutoColorCorrect This setting allows you to adjust the detection level used by the machine to determine whether the original is color or black and white during Auto Color Mode.: a b appears. Use the procedure below to set the Auto Color Detection Level.]. Completed. 1 Copy Denst. Adj. Completed. Menu/Count. 3 -1 The screen shown is the one when [Manual] is 4 * 0 Normal ********************* selected.

Start the color calibration. Menu/Count. 1 Copy Denst. is displayed and the screen returns to the Adjust/Maint. menu Adjust/Maint. ********************* 2 Send/Box Density 3 AutoColorCorrect [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [ColorCalibration]. this color calibration operation is carried out automatically each time the power to the machine is turned on. When first installing the machine or moving it to a new location. Color drift can be largely corrected through normal registration. if it is not resolved or to perform more detailed settings. . ********************* [ Exit ] 2 Press the OK key. Color Regist. Use the procedure below to set the Color Calibration.:a b key to select [Adjust/Maint. 1 In the Sys. 6 Completed. Default Setting (System Menu) ColorCalibration This machine contains a calibration function that automatically makes adjustments to compensate for changes that occur over time due to variations in the ambient temperature and humidity. The Adjust/Maint. perform color print position correction on page 8-104. If color tone does not improve or color drift does not improve after executing this color adjustment. magenta and yellow to resolve color drift. Document Box < Edit Destination = Adjust/Maint. Menu/Count. Normal registration and detailed settings are available for Color Registration. verify that either Letter or A4 paper is loaded into a cassette. 8-104 . color drift during printing may occur. NOTE: To perform color registration. However. 4 Press the OK key. menu. ColorCalibration appears. Use this function to correct the color position of each of cyan. Adj.]. So that the highest quality color printing can be maintained. Are you sure? [ Yes ] [ No ] 5 Press [Yes] (the Left Select key) to execute Color Calibration. use the detailed settings.: a b appears. press the U or V Sys. menu.

:a b key to select [Adjust/Maint. 2 Adjust Magenta 3 Adjust Cyan 7 Press the OK key. The Adjust/Maint. Document Box < Edit Destination = Adjust/Maint. The chart print confirmation Print. perform color registration. 6 Press the OK key.: a b 1 Normal ********************* 2 Detail [ Exit ] 5 Press the U or V key to select [Normal]. Menu/Count. [ Yes ] [ No ] 8-105 . The normal registration Normal: a b appears. 1 Copy Denst. Press the U or V key to select [Print 1 Print Chart ********************* Chart]. 1 In the Sys. appears. menu. press the U or V Sys. . Default Setting (System Menu) IMPORTANT: Before performing color registration. Color Regist. Menu/Count. however. menu appears. Are you sure? w Registration chart. Adj. 4 Press the OK key. By performing color registration without performing color calibration.: a b appears. Normal Registration Follow the steps below to correct normal color drift. ********************* 2 Send/Box Density 3 AutoColorCorrect [ Exit ] 8 3 Press the U or V key to select [Color Regist.]. If color drift remains. Color Regist. it may cause the serious color drift later. the color drift will be resolved once. be sure to perform color calibration (see page 8-104). ********************* [ Exit ] 2 Press the OK key. menu Adjust/Maint.].

<Chart Example> Color Registration Correction Chart MV MH-L MH-R I G E C A 1 3 5 7 9 I I G E C A 1 3 5 7 9 H H F D B 0 2 4 6 8 G H F D B 0 2 4 6 8 F E D C B A 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 CV CH-L CH-R I I G E C A 1 3 5 7 9 H I G E C A 1 3 5 7 9 H F D B 0 2 4 6 8 G H F D B 0 2 4 6 8 F E D C B A 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 YV YH-L YH-R I I G E C A 1 3 5 7 9 H I G E C A 1 3 5 7 9 H F D B 0 2 4 6 8 G H F D B 0 2 4 6 8 F E D C B A 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 8-106 . C (cyan). and Y (yellow). and H-R (right) are printed on one sheet of paper for each of the colors M (magenta). you will return to the standard menu of color print position correction. H-L (left). V (center). Three charts. After the charts are printed. Default Setting (System Menu) 8 Press [Yes] (the Left Select key) to execute chart printing.

By pressing V. Normal: a b Press the OK key. the value changes from 0 to alphabetic letters. menu. V and H- Adjust Magenta: a b R). the value would be B. To decrease.]. Default Setting (System Menu) 9 Press the U or V key to select [Adjust Magenta].9) the chart and press [OK]. Detailed Settings Follow the steps below to perform more detailed correction. press U. 1 In the Sys. note the numbers of the sections in the magenta H and V charts where the lines most closely coincide as a single straight line.A. 8 Press U key to increase the value from 0 to 9. ********************* [ Exit ] 8-107 . Menu/Count. You cannot use the numeric keys to enter these values. Document Box < Edit Destination = Adjust/Maint. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Adjust/Maint. After a brief 0 V: 0 interval you will return to the standard menu of H-L:*** H-R: 0 color print position correction. . press the U or V Sys. 0 . In the left example. press V. 2 Adjust Magenta 3 Adjust Cyan 10 In the color registration correction chart printed in Print Registration Chart above. Press U or V key to enter the value read from (I . Magenta correction is performed. To move in the reverse direction. 11 Press Y or Z key to change items (H-L. The magenta correction menu 1 Print Chart ********************* appears. going from A to I. 12 Repeat steps 9 to 11 to correct cyan and yellow.

H-1 to H-5V (upper) and V-3 (lower) are printed on one sheet of paper for each of the colors M (magenta). and Y (yellow). Are you sure? w Registration chart. The Adjust/Maint. [ Yes ] [ No ] 8 Press [Yes] (the Left Select key) to execute chart printing. Color Regist.: a b 1 Normal ********************* 2 Detail [ Exit ] 5 Press the U or V key to select [Detail]. 8-108 . C (cyan). Color Regist. Default Setting (System Menu) 2 Press the OK key. menu Adjust/Maint. The chart print confirmation Print. Press the U or V key to select [Print 1 Print Chart ********************* Chart]. 2 Adjust Magenta 3 Adjust Cyan 7 Press the OK key. Adj.]. ********************* 2 Send/Box Density 3 AutoColorCorrect [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [Color Regist. 6 Press the OK key.: a b appears. The normal registration Detail: a b appears. you will return to the standard menu of color print position correction. Two charts. After the charts are printed. 1 Copy Denst. menu appears. 4 Press the OK key. appears.

Detail: a b Press the OK key. The magenta correction menu 1 Print Chart ********************* appears. 2 Adjust Magenta 3 Adjust Cyan 8-109 . Default Setting (System Menu) <Chart Example> 8 9 Press the U or V key to select [Adjust Magenta].

12 Repeat steps 9 to 11 to correct cyan and yellow. Default Setting (System Menu) 10 In the color registration correction chart printed in Print Registration Chart above. press V. note the numbers of the sections in the magenta H and V charts where the lines most closely coincide as a single straight line. Press U or V key to enter the value read from (I . By pressing V. going from A to I. the value changes from 0 to alphabetic letters. 8-110 .9) the chart and press [OK]. Press U key to increase the value from 0 to 9. 11 Press Y or Z key to change items (H-1 to H-5. H-1:***H-2: 0 0 H-3: 0 Magenta correction is performed. 0 . To decrease.A. To move in the reverse direction. V- Adjust Magenta: a b 3). In the left example. the value would be B. press U. After a brief H-4:***H-5:   0 0 V-3: 0 interval you will return to the standard menu of color print position correction. You cannot use the numeric keys to enter these values.

which may appear on the copies. Default Setting (System Menu) Correct. Bk Line Correct fine black lines (black streaks caused by contamination). K Paper feed direction The table below shows the available settings. Menu/Count.]. On(High) Correction performed. 1 In the Sys. press the U or V Sys. menu. Document Box < Edit Destination = Adjust/Maint. . On(Low) Correction performed. Use the procedure below to specify the setting for correcting fine black lines. It is recommended to keep the default ([Off]). Select this item if black streak remains after using On (Low). ********************* [ Exit ] 8-111 . NOTE: Using Correcting Fine Black Line can impair reproduction of fine characters. The reproduction of the image becomes lower when using Off.:a b key to select [Adjust/Maint. when the document processor is used. Item Description 8 Off No correction performed. The reproduction of the image becomes lower when using On (Low). Menu/Count.

menu Adjust/Maint. Correct.: a b appears. menu. 1 Copy Denst. Completed. Bk Line: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On(Low) 3 On(High) 5 Press the U or V key to select [Off]. The Adjust/Maint. is displayed and the screen returns to the Adjust/Maint. Bk Line]. Adj. Default Setting (System Menu) 2 Press the OK key. ********************* [ Exit ] 2 Press the OK key. When the printing quality declines. ********************* 2 Send/Box Density 3 AutoColorCorrect [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [Correct. menu Adjust/Maint. 8-112 . press the U or V Sys. cleaning the laser scanner can restore the printing quality. 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. Bk Line appears. ********************* 2 Send/Box Density 3 AutoColorCorrect [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [Service Setting]. Adj. Document Box < Edit Destination = Adjust/Maint. Correct. 1 Copy Denst. Use the procedure below to set the laser scanner cleaning mode setting. The Adjust/Maint.]. menu. . LaserScanner Cln (Laser scanner cleaning mode setting) This sets the cleaning mode for the laser scanner. 4 Press the OK key.: a b appears.:a b key to select [Adjust/Maint. 6 Press the OK key. Menu/Count. [On(Low)] or [On(High)].

Completed. 1 In the Sys. is displayed and the screen returns to the Adjust/ Maint. Menu/Count. When the printing quality declines. 1 Copy Denst. refreshing the drum can restore the printing quality. Drum Refresh (Drum refresh mode setting) 8 This sets the refresh mode for the drum. The Service Setting menu Service Setting: a b appears. 6 Press the OK key. The Adjust/Maint. menu Adjust/Maint. ********************* 2 Send/Box Density 3 AutoColorCorrect [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [Service Setting]. ********************* [ Exit ] 2 Press the OK key.]. Start the laser scanner cleaning. Use the procedure below to set the drum refresh mode setting.:a b key to select [Adjust/Maint. 8-113 . menu. Document Box < Edit Destination = Adjust/Maint. press the U or V Sys. . A confirmation screen appears. Menu/Count. menu. Are you sure? [ Yes ] [ No ] 7 Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). Adj. 1 Service Status ********************* 2 Network Status 3 Test Page [ Exit ] 5 Press the U or V key to select [LaserScanner Cln]. Default Setting (System Menu) 4 Press the OK key.: a b appears.

Menu/Count. 1 In the Sys. ********************* 2 Send/Box Density 3 AutoColorCorrect [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [Service Setting]. (Altitude adjustment setting) This sets the altitude adjustment mode. If you are using the machine at an altitude of 1500 m or higher and print quality has deteriorated. Use the procedure below to set the altitude adjustment setting. menu Adjust/Maint. 1 Service Status ********************* 2 Network Status 3 Test Page [ Exit ] 5 Press the U or V key to select [Drum Refresh]. . Altitude Adj. menu. 8-114 . Start the drum refresh. Menu/Count. Adj. Completed. 6 Press the OK key. Default Setting (System Menu) 4 Press the OK key. 1 Copy Denst. The Service Setting menu Service Setting: a b appears. Document Box < Edit Destination = Adjust/Maint. press the U or V Sys.:a b key to select [Adjust/Maint. The Adjust/Maint. the Altitude Adjustment mode setting can be used to restore print quality.]. ********************* [ Exit ] 2 Press the OK key. Are you sure? [ Yes ] [ No ] 7 Press [Yes] (the Left Select key).: a b appears. is displayed and the screen returns to the Adjust/ Maint. A confirmation screen appears. menu.

Adj. Menu/Count. 8 Press the OK key. Default Setting (System Menu) 4 Press the OK key.]. 1 Service Status ********************* 2 Network Status 3 Test Page [ Exit ] 5 Press the U or V key to select [Altitude Adj. . Use the procedure below to set the main charger output setting. Menu/Count. Altitude Adj. The Service Setting menu Service Setting: a b appears. When print quality has deteriorated. menu. menu Adjust/Maint. ********************* 2 Send/Box Density 3 AutoColorCorrect [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [Service Setting]. 1 Copy Denst. ********************* [ Exit ] 2 Press the OK key. NOTE: This menu only appears when the Altitude Adj.:a b key to select [Adjust/Maint. 6 Press the OK key. Altitude Adj. 8 MC (Main charger output setting) This sets the output of the main charger.: a b appears. press the U or V Sys. Document Box < Edit Destination = Adjust/Maint. 1 In the Sys.]. menu. Completed. 8-115 . the output of the main charger can be changed to restore print quality. The Adjust/Maint. [High 1] or [High 2]. appears.: a b 1 *Normal ********************* 2 High 1 3 High 2 7 Press the U or V key to select [Normal]. (Altitude adjustment setting) on page 8-114 is set to [Normal]. is displayed and the screen returns to the Adjust/Maint.

The Service Setting menu Service Setting: a b appears. 1 Service Status ********************* 2 Network Status 3 Test Page [ Exit ] 5 Press the U or V key to select [MC]. menu. MC appears. 6 Press the OK key. is displayed and the screen returns to the Adjust/Maint. Default Setting (System Menu) 4 Press the OK key. Completed. MC: a b 1 1 2 2 3 *3 ********************* 7 Press the U or V key to select [1] to [3]. 8 Press the OK key. 8-116 .

1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [Date Setting]. 8-117 . the date and 8 time set here will be displayed on the header. Default Setting (System Menu) Date/Timer Date/Timer settings include: • Date/Time …8-117 • Date Format …8-119 • Time Zone …8-120 • Summer Time …8-121 • Auto Error Clear …8-122 • Sleep Timer …8-125 • Sleep Level …8-126 • Auto Panel Reset …8-128 • Unusable Time …8-130 NOTE: If user login administration is enabled. The Common Settings menu Common Settings: a b appears. menu. Date/Time Set the date and time for the location where you use the machine. you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges. 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] 2 Press the OK key. Use the procedure below to set the date and time. Menu/Count. If you perform Send as E-mail. Menu/Count. press the U or V Sys.:a b key to select [Common Settings]. and press the OK key. CAUTION: Be sure to set Time Zone before the Date/Time setup. 1 In the Sys.

Date Setting: a b 1 Date/Time ********************* 2 Date Format 3 Time Zone [ Exit ] 5 Press the U or V key to select [Date/Time]. Press the Y or Z key to move to the item (Year / Month / Day) you want to enter. a login screen will appear. is displayed and the screen returns to the Date Settings menu. The screen to enter the time of Date/Time: a b Date/Time appears. 10 Press the OK key. 8 Press the OK key. enter the Login User Name and Login Login Password: Password to log in. Completed. Hour Min. Default Setting (System Menu) When you are performing user management and Login User Name: L b have not logged in. ******************* Then. [ Login ] 4 The Date Settings menu appears. / Second) you want to enter. 8-118 . Press the Y or Z key to move to the item (Hour / Min. The screen to enter the date of Date/Time: a b Date/Time appears. Second ****11 : 45: 50 (Time Zone:Tokyo ) 9 Set the time. 6 Press the OK key. Press the U or V key to set each item. Press the U or V key to set each item. Year Month Day *2009* 01 01 (Time Zone:Tokyo ) 7 Set the date.

4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] 2 Press the OK key. the If you change Date/Time setting. and press [Login] (the Right Select key). To change the date/time. Menu/Count. Date Setting: a b 1 Date/Time ********************* 2 Date Format 3 Time Zone [ Exit ] 5 Press the U or V key to select [Date Format] 8-119 . The year is displayed in Western notation. Use the procedure below to select the date format. and date. press [Yes](the Left Select key). trial functions will be unavailable. press the U or V Sys. Are you sure? message is displayed. month. and press the OK key.:a b key to select [Common Settings]. a login screen will appear. enter the Login User Name and Login Login Password: Password to log in. 1 Language ********************* 8 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [Date Setting]. ******************* Then. Date Format Select the display format of year. Default Setting (System Menu) NOTE: If you try to change the date/time when a trial application is running. When you are performing user management and Login User Name: L b have not logged in. menu. Menu/Count. [ Login ] 4 The Date Settings menu appears. The Common Settings menu Common Settings: a b appears. 1 In the Sys.

press the U or V Sys. [ Menu ] [ Login ] 4 The Date Settings menu appears. The Common Settings menu Common Settings: a b appears. Default Setting (System Menu) . Date Format appears. Menu/Count. menu. Date Setting: a b 1 Date/Time ********************* 2 Date Format 3 Time Zone [ Exit ] 8-120 . and press [Login] (the Right Select key). 6 Press the OK key. 8 Press the OK key. 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [Date Setting]. a login screen will appear. When you are performing user management and Login User Name: L b have not logged in. Completed. enter the Login User Name and Login Login Password: Password to log in. Use the procedure below to set the time difference. and press the OK key. 1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] 2 Press the OK key. ******************* Then. Time Zone Set the time difference in the location you are from GMT. Date Format: a b 1 *Month/Day/Year ********************* 2 Day/Month/Year 3 Year/Month/Day 7 Press the U or V key to select [Month/Day/Year].:a b key to select [Common Settings]. [Day/Month/Year] or [Year/Month/Day]. is displayed and the screen returns to the Date Settings menu.

******************* Then. Menu/Count. 6 Press the OK key. Time Zone appears. Completed. Time Zone: a b 1 -12:00 Internati ********************* 2 -11:00 Midway 3 -10:00 Hawaii 7 Press the U or V key to select your location. is displayed and the screen returns to the Date Settings menu. 8 Press the OK key. [ Menu ] [ Login ] 8-121 . Default Setting (System Menu) 5 Press the U or V key to select [Time Zone]. and press [Login] (the Right Select key). menu. Summer Time Set whether or not to apply summer time to the display of the date. and press the OK key.:a b key to select [Common Settings]. NOTE: If you select a region that does not utilize summer time. enter the Login User Name and Login Login Password: Password to log in. The Common Settings menu Common Settings: a b appears. press the U or V Sys. Menu/Count. 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [Date Setting]. When you are performing user management and Login User Name: L b have not logged in. 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] 2 Press the OK key. a login screen will appear. 1 In the Sys. 8 Use the procedure below to set Summer Time. the summer time setting screen will not appear.

Summer Time appears. Cannot scan. Incorrect account ID. Print job cannot be processed completely. Job is canceled. Cannot connect to Authentication Server. Press [OK]. Cannot duplex print on this paper. Auto Error Clear If an error occurs during printing. is displayed and the screen returns to the Date Settings menu. Job Accounting restriction exceeded. Job is canceled. Sub address/Polling box limit exceeded. Default Setting (System Menu) 4 The Date Settings menu appears. Cannot print. Job Accounting restriction exceeded. In the Auto Error Clear mode. 8 Press the OK key. Press [OK]. Send error. Completed. Job is canceled. Print overrun. Maximum Number of scanned pages. Summer Time: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On 7 Press the U or V key to select [Off] or [On]. Job is canceled. 8-122 . Job is canceled. The following errors are automatically cleared. Date Setting: a b 2 Date Format ********************* 3 Time Zone 4 Summer Time [ Exit ] 5 Press the U or V key to select [Summer Time]. KPDL error. Use the procedure below to specify the auto error clear setting. USB memory error. Job not stored. automatically clear the error after a set amount of time elapses. No multi copies. Auto Error Clear ON/OFF Select whether to use Auto Error Clear or not. Memory is full. 6 Press the OK key. Job Accounting restriction exceeded. the print job stops to wait for the next step to be taken by the user.

8 [ Login ] 4 The Timer Settings menu appears. Menu/Count. Error Clear Timer If you select [On] for Auto Error Clear. a login screen will appear. 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [Timer Setting]. Timer Setting: a b 1 Err. When you are performing user management and Login User Name: L b have not logged in. Auto Err. 8-123 . menu. Clear appears. Clear Timer ********************* 2 Sleep Timer 3 PanelReset Timer [ Exit ] 5 Press the U or V key to select [Auto Err. press the U or V Sys. and press [Login] (the Right Select key). is displayed and the screen returns to the Timer Settings menu. Auto Err. 6 Press the OK key. and press the OK key. Default Setting (System Menu) 1 In the Sys. 8 Press the OK key. Clear]. Options are between 5 and 495 seconds (every five seconds).:a b key to select [Common Settings]. Menu/Count. The default setting is 30 minutes. 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] 2 Press the OK key. set the amount of time to wait before automatically clearing errors. Completed. ******************* Then. The Common Settings menu Common Settings: a b appears. Clear: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On 7 Press the U or V key to select [Off] or [On]. enter the Login User Name and Login Login Password: Password to log in.

******************* Then. errors are not displayed. Set the amount of time before clearing errors in 8-124 . and press the OK key. Clear Timer: * b (5 . Clear Timer ********************* 2 Sleep Timer 3 PanelReset Timer [ Exit ] 5 Press the U or V key to select [Err. When you are performing user management and Login User Name: L b have not logged in. 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] 2 Press the OK key. 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [Timer Setting]. The Common Settings menu Common Settings: a b appears.:a b key to select [Common Settings].495) ******30*sec. Err. NOTE: If you select [Off] for Auto Error Clear. Use the procedure below to set the automatic error clear delay. Menu/Count. Default Setting (System Menu) If you set 0 as the time. press the U or V Sys. Clear Timer appears. 1 In the Sys. Clear Timer]. menu. [ Login ] 4 The Timer Settings menu appears. a login screen will appear. enter the Login User Name and Login Login Password: Password to log in. Err. the time display does not appear. Menu/Count. 6 Press the OK key. 7 Press the U or V key to set the Error Clear Timer. and press [Login] (the Right Select key). Timer Setting: a b 1 Err.

Clear Timer ********************* 2 Sleep Timer 3 PanelReset Timer [ Exit ] 5 Press the U or V key to select [Sleep Timer]. Options are between 1 and 240 minutes (every one minute) Use the procedure below to set the Auto Sleep time. Timer Setting: a b 1 Err. menu. Menu/Count. You cannot use the numeric keys to enter this value. 8-125 . a login screen will appear. Completed. Default Setting (System Menu) seconds. press the U or V Sys. ******************* Then. 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 8 3 Sound [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [Timer Setting]. Menu/Count. [ Login ] 4 The Timer Settings menu appears. and press [Login] (the Right Select key). 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] 2 Press the OK key. enter the Login User Name and Login Login Password: Password to log in. 8 Press the OK key.:a b key to select [Common Settings]. When you are performing user management and Login User Name: L b have not logged in. The default setting is 1 minute. The Common Settings menu Common Settings: a b appears. Sleep Timer Set the amount of time to wait before Auto Sleep. is displayed and the screen returns to the Timer Settings menu. 1 In the Sys. and press the OK key.

Energy Saver The machine does not wake from sleep mode when it receives print data and printing does not take place. is displayed and the screen returns to the Timer Settings menu. 8 Press the OK key. Use the procedure below to specify the Sleep Level. 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [Timer Setting]. NOTE: On a product with the fax function. Sleep Level Detailed settings can be selected for sleep mode. menu. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Common Settings]. Default Setting (System Menu) 6 Press the OK key. Example: When print data is sent from a PC connected by USB Quick Recovery When the machine receives print data. Sleep Timer appears. Set the amount of time before entering the sleep state in minutes. 1 In the Sys. When Quick Recovery is specified.240) ******15*min. The Common Settings menu Common Settings: a b appears. and press the OK key. the setting is fixed at Quick Recovery. Detailed settings for sleep mode are called Energy Saver mode. Sleep Timer: D b (1 . Menu/Count. 8-126 . You cannot use the numeric keys to enter this value. Completed. When a function is set in Energy Saver mode and the function sends data to the machine. press the U or V Sys. 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] 2 Press the OK key. 7 Press the U or V key to set the Sleep Timer. the machine wakes from sleep mode when any kind of data is received. the machine does not execute the function. it wakes from sleep mode and starts printing.

1 *Permit ********************* 2 Prohibit 8-127 . The following functions can be set: • Network • USB Cable • Card Reader • RAM Disk • NIC 10 Press the OK key. ******************* Then. and press [Login] (the Right Select key). Energy Saver: a b Completed. Sleep level: a b 1 Quick Recovery ********************* 2 Energy Saver 8 7 Press the U or V key to select [Quick Recovery] or [Energy Saver]. Clear Timer ********************* 2 Sleep Timer 3 PanelReset Timer [ Exit ] 5 Press the U or V key to select [Sleep Level]. Sleep Level appears. Timer Setting: a b 1 Err. 6 Press the OK key. appears and you return to the timer 1 Network ********************* settings menu. [ Login ] 4 The Timer Settings menu appears. The 3 Card Reader detailed settings screen of Energy Saver mode appears. Default Setting (System Menu) When you are performing user management and Login User Name: L b have not logged in. enter the Login User Name and Login Login Password: Password to log in. 2 USB Cable Select [Energy Saver] and press the OK key. 8 Select [Quick Recovery] and press the OK key. a login screen will appear. 9 Press the U or V key to select the desired function for energy saver. The setting screen of each item Network: a b appears.

******************* Then. Auto Panel Reset If no jobs are run for a certain period of time. NOTE: Refer to page 8-29 for the default settings. When you are performing user management and Login User Name: L b have not logged in. 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] 2 Press the OK key. Menu/Count. is displayed and the screen returns to the Timer Settings menu. a login screen will appear. Auto Panel Reset ON/OFF Select to use Auto Panel Reset or not. Use the procedure below to specify the auto panel reset setting. enter the Login User Name and Login Login Password: Password to log in. automatically reset settings and return to the default setting. The Common Settings menu Common Settings: a b appears. Completed. press the U or V Sys. The default setting is On. menu. Default Setting (System Menu) 11 Press the U or V key to select [Permit] or [Prohibit] for the energy saver. and press [Login] (the Right Select key). 12 Press the OK key.:a b key to select [Common Settings]. and press the OK key. the machine will not execute the function. 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [Timer Setting]. [ Login ] 8-128 . 1 In the Sys. When [Permit] is set for a function and that function sends data to the machine when the machine is in Energy Saver mode. Menu/Count.

8 Press the OK key.:a b key to select [Common Settings]. set the amount of time to wait before Auto Panel Reset. 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] 2 Press the OK key. Auto Panel Reset: a b 1 Off 2 *On ********************* 7 Press the U or V key to select [Off] or [On]. press the U or V Sys. the time display does not appear. The default setting is 90 seconds. NOTE: If you select [Off] for Auto Panel Reset. Use the procedure below to set the reset time. Default Setting (System Menu) 4 The Timer Settings menu appears. Menu/Count. and press the OK key. Menu/Count. Auto Panel Reset appears. Options are between 5 and 495 seconds (every five seconds). Panel Reset Timer 8 If you select [On] for Auto Panel Reset. Completed. Clear Timer ********************* 2 Sleep Timer 3 PanelReset Timer [ Exit ] 5 Press the U or V key to select [Auto Panel Reset]. 1 In the Sys. 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [Timer Setting]. is displayed and the screen returns to the Timer Settings menu. 6 Press the OK key. 8-129 . The Common Settings menu Common Settings: a b appears. Timer Setting: a b 1 Err. menu.

[ Login ] 4 The Timer Settings menu appears.495) ******90*sec. Use the procedure below to set the Unusable Time. Default Setting (System Menu) When you are performing user management and Login User Name: L b have not logged in. 8 Press the OK key. 1 In the Sys. Timer Setting: a b 1 Err. press the U or V Sys. a login screen will appear. menu. 7 Press the U or V key to set the Panel Reset Timer. Unusable Time You can specify the prohibition period to use. is displayed and the screen returns to the Timer Settings menu. PanelReset Timer:D b (5 . Menu/Count. Menu/Count. enter the Login User Name and Login Login Password: Password to log in. You cannot use the numeric keys to enter this value. Set the amount of time before resetting the message display on the panel in seconds. Clear Timer ********************* 2 Sleep Timer 3 PanelReset Timer [ Exit ] 5 Press the U or V key to select [Panel Reset Timer]. 6 Press the OK key. and press [Login] (the Right Select key).:a b key to select [Common Settings]. Panel Reset Timer appears. Completed. 4 User/Job Account 5 User Property 6 Common Settings ********************* [ Exit ] 8-130 . ******************* Then.

a login screen will appear. ***11*: 45 (Current Time 11:45) 9 Press the U or V key or numeric keys to set the Start Time. 8 Press the OK key. 8-131 . Start Time appears. and press [Login] (the Right Select key). Unusable Time: a b 7 Off 8 On ********************* [ Exit ] 7 Press the U or V key to select [On]. 1 Language ********************* 2 Default Screen 3 Sound [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [Timer Setting]. Clear Timer ********************* 2 Sleep Timer 3 PanelReset Timer 8 [ Exit ] 5 Press the U or V key to select [Unusable Time]. Unusable Time appears. 6 Press the OK key. When you are performing user management and Login User Name: L b have not logged in. [ Login ] 4 The Timer Settings menu appears. and press the OK key. Start Time: a b Hour Min. The Common Settings menu Common Settings: a b appears. enter the Login User Name and Login Login Password: Password to log in. Timer Setting: a b 1 Err. Default Setting (System Menu) 2 Press the OK key. ******************* Then.

Unlock Code appears. 14 Press the OK key. 8-132 . End Time: a b Hour Min. Unlock Code: a b (0000 . Default Setting (System Menu) 10 Press the OK key. Completed. 12 Press the OK key. is displayed and the screen returns to the Timer Settings menu. ***07*: 00 (Current Time 11:45) 11 Press the U or V key or numeric keys to set the End Time. End Time appears.0000) ********99*** 13 Press the U or V key or numeric keys to set the unlock code.

4 Press the OK key. Default Setting (System Menu) Editing Destination (Address Book/Adding One-Touch Keys) Save frequently used destinations to Address Book or One-touch keys. The Address Book list screen Addressbook: a b appears. • Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-7 for details on entering characters. 1 Detail Edit ********************* 2 Delete 3 Add Address 4 Search(Name) 8-133 .:a b key to select [Edit Destination]. Document Box < Edit Destination ********************* = Adjust/Maint. and FAX No. press the U or V Sys. k Design ********************* l Fiala l Maury [ Menu ] 5 Press [Menu] (the Right Select key). NOTE: • If user login administration is enabled. The destinations are available for Send as E-mail. Send to Folder. . E-mail address. Menu/Count. The saved destinations can be changed. FTP server folder path. and Fax Transmission. refer to the KYOCERA COMMAND CENTER Operation Guide. For details. Use the procedure below to register a new individual contact. menu.. Each address can include the information such as destination name. you can only edit destinations in the Address Book by logging in with administrator privileges. 1 Addressbook ********************* 2 Print List [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [Address Book]. Adding an Individual Destination A maximum of 100 individual addresses can be registered. 8 [ Exit ] 2 Press the OK key. The Edit Destination menu Edit Destination:a b appears. Menu/Count. 1 In the Sys. Menu Menu: a b appears. computer folder path.

Add Address appears. If creating a new contact name. the address number allocated to the destination is already entered. Sally* S ABC [ Text ] 3 Enter the contact name. 7 Press the OK key. Refer to the descriptions below for how to enter each item. Detail: C b Contact Name 1/7 Sally [ Edit ] 2 Press [Edit] (the Right Select key). Entering Contact Name 1 Press the Y or Z key to select [Contact Name]. The contact name is registered. and return to the Address Book. An entry Contact Name: A b screen appears. is displayed and the screen returns to the Address Book list screen. This displays the screen for Detail: C b editing destinations. the screen will display [ Edit ] Registered numbers exceeded. Registered. Add Address: a b 1 Contact ********************* 2 Group 8 Press the U or V key to select [Contact]. 4 Press the OK key. 10 Enter each item and then press the OK key. 8-134 . Default Setting (System Menu) 6 Press the U or V key to select [Add Address]. 9 Press the OK key. Contact Name 1/7 Sally NOTE: If the maximum number of destinations has already been registered.

Item Description Max.smith Login Password Password for folder access 64 chars * If you specify a port number other than the default (139). 8 4 Press the OK key. The e-mail address is registered. abcdnet\james. Refer to Specifying Destination on page 3-44. Entering Folder (SMB/FTP) Address Folder (SMB) Address The table below explains the items to be entered. * ABC [ Text ] 3 Enter the e-mail address. Default Setting (System Menu) Entering E-mail Address 1 Press the Y or Z key to display E-mail Address.g. (E. Detail: C b p E-mail Address: 4/7 t_maury@kyoceramita. No. NOTE: Destination can be specified using the Address Book or the One-touch keys. of Characters Host Name* Host name or IP address of the 64 chars sending computer Path Path to the folder used to save 128 chars files E.g. use the "Host name: port number" format. An entry Address Entry: B b screen appears. "\User\ScanData" Login User Name User name for folder access 64 chars For example. SMBhostname: 140) 8-135 .N [ Edit ] 2 Press [Edit] (the Right Select key).

Item Description Max.g. No. use the "Hostname: port number" format. "\User\ScanData" Login User Name User name for folder access 64 chars For example. Refer to Osaka SD* Specifying Destination on page 3-44. Folder(SMB): 4/6 Ntid7004 [ Edit ] 2 Press [Edit] (the Right Select key). FTPhostname: 140) 1 Press the Y or Z key to display Folder(SMB) or Detail: C b Folder(FTP). [ Text ] or Host Name(FTP): A b NOTE: Destination can be specified using the Address Book or the One-touch keys. of Characters Host Name* Host name or IP address of the 64 chars sending computer Path Path to the folder used to save 128 chars files E.g. An entry Host Name(SMB): A b screen appears. Default Setting (System Menu) Folder (FTP) Address The table below explains the items to be entered. ABC Enclose the IPv6 address in brackets [ ]. abcdnet\james. - encryption method can be selected from Auto. 3DES and AES. (E. DES. Osaka SD* ABC 3 Enter the host name. [ Text ] 8-136 . * If you specify a port number other than the default (21).smith Login Password Password for folder access 64 chars Encryption If secure communication is On.

A confirmation screen appears. Login User Name appears. Login Password appears. Check the connection. 8 Press the OK key. screens to confirm the entered host name and path name appear. 8-137 . Enter the same host name and path name again and press the OK key on their respective screens. Login Password: A b OOOOOOOOOOO* 8 ABC [ Text ] 9 Enter the Login Password. Default Setting (System Menu) 4 Press the OK key. 10 Press the OK key. Are you sure? [ Yes ] [ No ] NOTE: If the screen for confirming the entry of a new destination (page 8-72) is set to [On]. Login User Name: A b Maury* S ABC [ Text ] 7 Enter the Login User Name. Path appears. Path: A b SD3\report* ABC [ Text ] 5 Enter the path name. 6 Press the OK key.

If the connection failed. the smallest unused address number is automatically allocated. Check and re- enter the destination. Confirm. An entry Address Number: D b screen appears. is displayed and the folder (SMB/FTP) address is registered. Cannot connect. Default Setting (System Menu) 11 Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). 4 Press the OK key. Press [OK] (the Right Select key). Detail: C b Address Number: 6/6 053 [ Edit ] 2 Press [Edit] (the Right Select key). 8-138 . Address Number Address Number is an ID for a destination. is displayed. NOTE: If you enter an address number that is already registered. 1 Press the Y or Z key to display Address Number. This makes a Dest.: a b connection with the entered destination. When creating a new destination. Completed. and return to the screen of step 2. Press [OK] (the Right Select key). You can select any available number out of 100 numbers for individuals and 20 numbers for groups. is displayed on the screen. (001 .120) *****053* 3 Press the U or V key or the numeric keys to enter the address number. p Morgan@kyoceramitaN b 0667640000********* b 0667741234 [ Exit ] If the connection is successful. Connected. the screen will display This address number is already registered. The address number is registered. The screen shown in step 2 reappears.

Before adding a group in the Address Book. The Edit Destination menu 8 Edit Destination:a b appears. a maximum of 20 groups can be added in the Address Book. Use the procedure below to register a group. Menu/Count. Among them. 4 Press the OK key. The available addresses will then be 99 in total for email and/or fax addresses. you can add 75 email addresses. the individuals to be included in the group must be added first. Designations in the group can be added at the same time. 1 Detail/Edit 2 Delete 3 Add Address ********************* 6 Press the U or V key to select [Add Address]. Default Setting (System Menu) Adding a Group Compile two or more individuals into a group. Menu/Count. 24 fax addresses. menu. you can only edit destinations in the Address Book by logging in with administrator privileges. [ Exit ] 2 Press the OK key.Up to 100 destinations can be added as the addresses. k Design ********************* l Fiala l Maury [ Menu ] 5 Press [Menu] (the Right Select key). and a FTP address. When adding a group. 8-139 . NOTE: If user login administration is enabled.:a b key to select [Edit Destination]. press the U or V Sys. Document Box < Edit Destination ********************* = Adjust/Maint. For example. 1 Addressbook ********************* 2 Print List [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [Address Book]. one destination can be assigned for a FTP or SMB address. . The Address Book list screen Addressbook: a b appears. 1 In the Sys. Menu Menu: a b appears.

If creating a new group name. An entry Group Name: A b screen appears. This displays the screen for Detail: C b editing groups. The group name is registered. Default Setting (System Menu) 7 Press the OK key. Add Address: a b 1 Contact 2 Group ********************* 8 Press the U or V key to select [Group]. is displayed and the screen returns to the Address Book list screen. Add Address appears. Refer to the descriptions below for how to enter each item. 4 Press the OK key. 8-140 . the screen will display Registered [ Edit ] numbers exceeded. Group Name: 1/4 GUI Section NOTE: If the maximum number of groups has already been registered. and return to the Address Book. Registered. GUI* S ABC [ Text ] 3 Enter the group name. 10 Enter each item and then press the OK key. Entering Group Name 1 Press the Y or Z key to display Group Name. the address number allocated to the destination is already entered. 9 Press the OK key. Detail: C b Group Name: 1/4 GUI Section [ Edit ] 2 Press [Edit] (the Right Select key).

1 Detail 2 Delete 3 Add Member ********************* 8 4 Press the U or V key to select [Add Member]. This displays the sending l Sally: a b address registered to the selected destination.N Ntid7004 [ Menu ] 8 Press the U or V key to select the sending address. p Sally ********************* b Morgan G Morgan [ Menu ] 3 Press [Menu] (the Right Select key). and return to the Group Member. 5 Press the OK key. 6 Press the U or V key to select the destination you want to add to the group. 7 Press the OK key. Detail: C b Group Member: 2/4 30 [ Edit ] 2 Press [Edit] (the Right Select key). l Fiala ********************* l Maury NOTE: If 100 members have already been registered l Morgan in the group. 10 Press the Back key to retuen to the Detail. the screen will display Registered [ Menu ] numbers exceeded. 9 Press the OK key. 8-141 . This displays the list of Contacts: a b destinations registered in the Address Book. This displays Group Member: a b the list of destinations registered to the group. Default Setting (System Menu) Entering Group Member 1 Press the Y or Z key to display Group Member. b 0667643277 p sally@kyoceramita. The group Menu: a b editing menu appears.

press [Edit] (the Group Member: a b Right Select key). When creating a new destination. 3 Press [Menu] (the Right Select key). Are you sure? z p Sally [ Yes ] [ No ] 6 Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). The group Menu: a b editing menu appears. The group is added to the Address Book. Deleting member from group To delete a member registered to the group. NOTE: If you select an individual destination that has already been registered to the group. follow the procedure below. You can select any available number out of 100 numbers for individuals and 20 numbers for groups. the screen will display This address is already registered. is displayed and the screen returns to Group Member. 5 Press the OK key. A confirmation message Delete. Default Setting (System Menu) 11 Use the Y or Z key to check if the group was set correctly. Entering Address Number Address Number is an ID for a destination. 1 While Group Member is displayed. appears. 8-142 . the smallest unused address number is automatically allocated. Completed. b Morgan Morgan [ Menu ] 2 Press the U or V key to select the destination you want to delete. This displays the list of p Sally ********************* destinations registered to the group. 12 Press the OK key. and return to the screen of step 7. 1 Detail 2 Delete ********************* 3 Add Member 4 Press the U or V key to select [Delete].

menu.:a b key to select [Edit Destination]. [ Exit ] 2 Press the OK key. Menu/Count. Default Setting (System Menu) 1 Press the Y or Z key to display Address Number. and return to the screen of step 2. Document Box < Edit Destination ********************* = Adjust/Maint. NOTE: If you enter an address number that is already registered. The Edit Destination menu Edit Destination:a b appears. The address number is registered. 8-143 . Editing a Destination Edit/delete the destinations (individuals) you added to the Address Book. An entry Address Number: D b screen appears. (001 . 4 Press the OK key. 1 In the Sys. the screen will display This address 8 number is already registered. Menu/Count. . Use the procedure below to edit a destination. 1 Addressbook ********************* 2 Print List [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [Address Book].120) *****053* 3 Press the U or V key or the numeric keys to enter the address number. press the U or V Sys. Detail: C b Address Number: 4/4 019 [ Edit ] 2 Press [Edit] (the Right Select key).

6 Press [Menu] (the Right Select key). A Overwrite. k Design ********************* l Fiala l Maury [ Menu ] 5 Press the U or V key to select the destination you want to edit. refer to Adding an Individual Destination on page 8-133 and Adding a Group on page 8-139. The Address Book list screen Addressbook: a b appears. This displays the screen for Detail: A b editing the selected destination. Are you sure? z p Sally [ Yes ] [ No ] 11 Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). press the OK key. Contact name 1/7 Sally The screen shown is the one when an individual's destination is selected. [ Edit ] 9 Edit items as necessary. Registered. confirmation screen appears. Menu Menu: a b appears. 10 After completing editing. 8 Press the OK key. Default Setting (System Menu) 4 Press the OK key. 8-144 . For how to edit each item. 1 Detail Rdit ********************* 2 Delete 3 Add Address 4 Search(Name) 7 Press the U or V key to select [Detail/Edit]. is displayed and the screen returns to the Address Book list screen.

8 No.12 is pressed and held. Select Key Set.4 No. 1 In the basic screen.21 No. k Design ********************* l Fiala l Maury [ Menu ] 4 Press the U or V key to select the destination you want to register. Registered.2 No. [ Exit ] 2 Press the U or V key to select the key number to which you want to register the destination.14 No. appears. The one-touch keys are arranged as shown below: No. 3 Press the OK key.6 No.22 NOTE: Refer to One-Touch Key on page 3-3 for how to use them.5 No.13 No. 12 The screen shown is the one when No.16 No. NOTE: If you want to search from the Address Book.15 No. Registering new destination Use the procedure below to register a new destination under a One-touch key. 2 No. 1 ********************* it (2 seconds or longer).: a b which you want to register the destination and hold 8 1 No.12 No. Default Setting (System Menu) Adding a Destination on One-touch Key This machine has 11 one-touch keys and you can register 2 destinations to each of them.1 No.11 SHIFT No. The selected destination is registered to the one-touch key.7 No.10 No. The Address Book list screen Addressbook: a b appears.17 No.20 No.1/No.3 No. refer to Search in Address Book on page 3-45. 5 Press the OK key. 8-145 .19 No.9 No. press the one-touch key to Select Key No.18 No. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen.

the key 2 Detail edit screen will not appear. 12 The screen shown is the one when No. The Key Edit appears.: a b you want to edit the destination and hold it (2 1 No. Select Key Set. Completed. [ Exit ] 2 Press the U or V key to select the key number where you want to edit the destination. If you press [Yes] (the Left Select key) in the screen that appears. 1 In the basic screen. 1 ********************* seconds or longer).12 is pressed and held.1/No. is displayed and the registration of the destination is deleted. NOTE: If you select [Delete] here and press the OK key. 8-146 . appears. press the one-touch key where Select Key No. k Design ********************* l Fiala l Maury [ Menu ] 6 Press the U or V key to select the destination you want to newly register. The Address Book list screen Addressbook: a b appears. refer to Search in Address Book on page 3-45. NOTE: If you want to search from the Address Book. Default Setting (System Menu) Editing One-touch Key Edit/delete the destinations you added to One-touch Key. 2 No. [ Exit ] 4 Press the U or V key to select [Edit]. Use the procedure below to edit the one-touch key. Go to step 6. 3 Press the OK key. Key Edit: a b 1 Edit ********************* NOTE: If nothing is stored in a one-touch key. 5 Press the OK key. the address book screen 3 Delete will appear instead. you can delete the registration of the destination.

8 8-147 . Default Setting (System Menu) 7 Press the OK key. overwriting the previous one. 1 [ Yes ] [ No ] 8 Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). The selected destination is registered to the one-touch key. A confirmation screen appears. Overwrite. is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen. Are you sure? z No. Registered.

System: a b 3 Security Level 4 Restart ********************* 5 Op Functions [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [Restart]. and press [Login] (the Right Select key). Use this to deal with any unstable operation by the machine. 8-148 . Menu/Count. Restart. Are you sure? [ Yes ] [ No ] 5 Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). 1 In the Sys. 4 Press the OK key. Default Setting (System Menu) Restarting the System Restart the machine without turning the main power switch off. a login screen will appear. enter the Login User Name and Login Login Password: Password to log in. The machine is restarted. the machine does not restart and the screen returns to the System menu. (Same as the computer restart.) Use the procedure below to restart the system. ******************* Then. and press the OK key. press the U or V Sys. Menu/Count. If you press [No] (the Right Select key).:a b key to select [System]. menu. [ Login ] 2 The System menu appears. A confirmation screen appears. 1 Report 2 Counter 3 System ********************* [ Exit ] When you are performing user management and Login User Name: L b have not logged in.

menu. and press [Login] (the Right Select key).:a b key to select [System]. Use the procedure below to select the interface. 1 *TCP/IP Setting ********************* 2 NetWare 3 AppleTalk 8-149 . ******************* Then. and press the OK key. • LAN Interface Setup …8-149 • TCP/IP (IPv4) Setup …8-150 • TCP/IP (IPv6) Setup …8-150 • NetWare Setup …8-151 • AppleTalk Setup …8-153 • WSD Scan Setup …8-154 • WSD Print Setup …8-155 • Protocol Detail …8-157 NOTE: After all network related settings have been done. The Network Setting menu Network Setting: a b appears. [ Login ] 2 The System menu appears. 3 Security Level [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [Network Setting]. Menu/Count. turn the machine OFF and ON again. enter the Login User Name and Login Login Password: Password to log in. Default Setting (System Menu) Network Setup The following network settings are available. 1 Report 8 2 Counter 3 System ********************* [ Exit ] When you are performing user management and Login User Name: L b have not logged in. Menu/Count. This is mandatory to make the settings effective! LAN Interface Setup Specify the settings for the LAN interface to be used. press the U or V Sys. 1 In the Sys. The default setting is Auto. 4 Press the OK key. System: a b 1 Network Setting ********************* 2 I/F Block Set. a login screen will appear.

and press the OK key. LAN Interface appears. The available LAN interfaces are as follows: Auto 10Base-Half 10Base-Full 100Base-Half 100Base-Full 8 Press the OK key. 1 In the Sys. enter the Login User Name and Login Login Password: Password to log in. Default Setting (System Menu) 5 Press the U or V key to select [LAN Interface]. TCP/IP (IPv6) Setup Set up TCP/IP (IPv6) to connect to the network. The default setting is Off.:a b key to select [System]. a login screen will appear. 1 Report 2 Counter 3 System ********************* [ Exit ] When you are performing user management and Login User Name: L b have not logged in. is displayed and the screen returns to the Network Setting menu. ******************* Then. press the U or V Sys. Menu/Count. and press [Login] (the Right Select key). Use the procedure below to setup the TCP/IP (IPv6) setting. [ Login ] 8-150 . 6 Press the OK key. Completed. LAN Interface: a b 1 *Auto ********************* 2 10Base-Half 3 10Base-Full 7 Press the U or V key to select the desired LAN interface. Menu/Count. Refer to Network Setup (LAN Cable Connection) on page 2-14 about the procedures. menu. TCP/IP (IPv4) Setup Set up TCP/IP to connect to the Windows network.

4 Press the OK key. Use the procedure below to setup the NetWare setting. Default Setting (System Menu) 2 The System menu appears. The TCP/IP Settings menu TCP/IP Settings: a b appears. 1 TCP/IP Settings ********************* 2 NetWare 3 AppleTalk [ Exit ] 5 Press the U or V key to select [TCP/IP Settings].3. 802. 6 Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu Network Setting: a b appears. 10 Press the OK key.2. After that. is displayed and the screen returns to the TCP/IP Settings menu. 8 Press the OK key. NetWare Setup Select the NetWare network connection. select frame types for NetWare network from Auto. 1 TCP/IP ********************* 2 IPv4 Setting 8 3 IPv6 Setting [ Exit ] 7 Press the U or V key to select [IPv6 Setting]. The default settings is "On". Ethernet-II. IPv6 Setting appears. 3 Security Level [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [Network Setting]. 8-151 . System: a b 1 Network Setting ********************* 2 I/F Block Set. IPv6 Setting: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On [ Exit ] 9 Press the U or V key to select [On] or [Off]. 802. Completed. or SNAP.

3 The available frame types are as follows: 3 Ether-II Auto 802. menu. 4 Press the OK key. Press the U or V key to select the 1 *Auto ********************* desired frame type. Frame Frame Type: a b Type appears. System: a b 1 Network Setting ********************* 2 I/F Block Set. Menu/Count. Menu/Count. 1 TCP/IP Settings ********************* 2 NetWare 3 AppleTalk [ Exit ] 5 Press the U or V key to select [NetWare]. NetWare: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On 7 Press the U or V key to select [On] or [Off]. and press the OK key. 1 Report 2 Counter 3 System ********************* [ Exit ] When you are performing user management and Login User Name: L b have not logged in. a login screen will appear.3 8-152 . press the U or V Sys.:a b key to select [System]. enter the Login User Name and Login Login Password: Password to log in. ******************* Then. 2 802. [ Login ] 2 The System menu appears. NetWare appears. If you select [On] and press the OK key. 6 Press the OK key. Default Setting (System Menu) 1 In the Sys. The Network Setting menu Network Setting: a b appears. 3 Security Level [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [Network Setting]. and press [Login] (the Right Select key).

1 TCP/IP Settings ********************* 2 NetWare 3 AppleTalk [ Exit ] 5 Press the U or V key to select [AppleTalk]. Completed. For detailed information on restarting the system. 8-153 . ******************* Then. enter the Login User Name and Login Login Password: Password to log in. Menu/Count.2 SNAP 8 Press the OK key. 3 Security Level [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [Network Setting]. Default Setting (System Menu) Ether-II 802. is displayed and the screen returns to the Network Setting menu. refer to Restarting the System on page 8-148. [ Login ] 2 The System menu appears. press the U or V Sys. AppleTalk Setup Select the Apple Talk network connection. Use the procedure below to setup the AppleTalk setting. System: a b 1 Network Setting ********************* 2 I/F Block Set. The Network Setting menu Network Setting: a b appears. and press the OK key. 1 Report 2 Counter 3 System ********************* [ Exit ] When you are performing user management and 8 Login User Name: L b have not logged in. 1 In the Sys. menu. The default setting is On. 4 Press the OK key. a login screen will appear.:a b key to select [System]. and press [Login] (the Right Select key). Menu/Count.

Default Setting (System Menu) 6 Press the OK key. System: a b 1 Network Setting ********************* 2 I/F Block Set. and press the OK key.:a b key to select [System]. The machine must be restarted after the setting is changed. a login screen will appear. menu. Menu/Count. AppleTalk a b 1 Off 2 *On ********************* 7 Press the U or V key to select [On] or [Off] and then press the OK key. [ Login ] 2 The System menu appears. WSD Scan Setup Select whether or not to use WSD Scan. 3 Security Level [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [Network Setting]. Use the procedure below to setup the WSD-SCAN setting. Completed. enter the Login User Name and Login Login Password: Password to log in. The default setting is On. and press [Login] (the Right Select key). 1 In the Sys. ******************* Then. AppleTalk appears. Menu/Count. 1 TCP/IP Settings ********************* 2 NetWare 3 AppleTalk [ Exit ] 8-154 . 1 Report 2 Counter 3 System ********************* [ Exit ] When you are performing user management and Login User Name: L b have not logged in. is displayed and the screen returns to the Network Setting menu. 4 Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu Network Setting: a b appears. press the U or V Sys.

3 Security Level [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [Network Setting]. The WSD-SCAN menu WSD-SCAN: a b appears. a login screen will appear. [ Login ] 2 The System menu appears. and press the OK key. 6 Press the OK key. menu. Menu/Count. Completed. ******************* Then. 1 *Off ********************* 2 On 7 Press the U or V key to select [On] or [Off]. Use the procedure below to setup the WSD-PRINT setting. The machine must be restarted after the setting is changed. System: a b 1 Network Setting ********************* 2 I/F Block Set.:a b 1 Report key to select [System]. is displayed and the screen returns to the Network Settings menu. and press [Login] (the Right Select key). 8 2 Counter 3 System ********************* [ Exit ] When you are performing user management and Login User Name: L b have not logged in. 8 Press the OK key. press the U or V Sys. WSD Print Setup Select whether or not to use WSD Print. 1 In the Sys. enter the Login User Name and Login Login Password: Password to log in. Menu/Count. The default setting is On. Default Setting (System Menu) 5 Press the U or V key to select [WSD-SCAN]. 8-155 .

1 TCP/IP Settings ********************* 2 NetWare 3 AppleTalk [ Exit ] 5 Press the U or V key to select [WSD-PRINT]. The Network Setting menu Network Setting: a b appears. 6 Press the OK key. 8-156 . 8 Press the OK key. The WSD-PRINT menu WSD-PRINT: a b appears. is displayed and the screen returns to the Network Settings menu. 1 *Off ********************* 2 On 7 Press the U or V key to select [On] or [Off]. Default Setting (System Menu) 4 Press the OK key. Completed.

Default Setting (System Menu) Protocol Detail Make other network related settings. FTP (Server) Select whether or not to On z receive documents using FTP. HTTP Select whether or not to On z communicate using HTTP. POP3 Select whether or not to Off × (E-mail RX) receive e-mail using POP3. 8-157 . SNMP Select whether or not to On z communicate using SNMP. 8 Raw Port Select whether or not to On z receive documents using Raw Port. Port number: 21 and the number of the port to be used. and the number of the port to be used. FTP (Client) Select whether or not to On × send documents using FTP. Off z SMB Select whether or not to On z send documents using Port number: 139 SMB. LPD Select whether or not to On z receive documents using LPD as the network protocol. HTTPS Select whether or not to On z communicate using HTTPS. Restarting the Item Description Default Setting System* NetBEUI Selects whether or not to On z receive documents using NetBEUI. SNMPv3 Set SNMPv3. LDAP Select whether or not to use Off × LDAP. SMTP Select whether or not to Off × (E-mail TX) send e-mail using SMTP. SSL must be set to [On] in SSL Setting on page 8-160.

:a b key to select [System]. Menu/Count. * z: The machine must be restarted after the setting is changed. and press [Login] (the Right Select key). a login screen will appear. ******************* Then. press the U or V Sys. 1 Report 2 Counter 3 System ********************* [ Exit ] When you are performing user management and Login User Name: L b have not logged in. [ Login ] 2 The System menu appears. and the number of the Port number: 631 port to be used. ×: The machine does not need to be restarted after the setting is changed. enter the Login User Name and Login Login Password: Password to log in. menu. 3 Security Level [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [Network Setting]. 8-158 . and press the OK key. ThinPrint Select whether or not to use On z ThinPrint. SSL must be set to [On] in SSL Setting on page 8-160. SSL must be set to [On] in SSL Setting on page 8-160. System: a b 1 Network Setting ********************* 2 I/F Block Set. 1 In the Sys. Default Setting (System Menu) Restarting the Item Description Default Setting System* IPP Select whether or not to use Off z IPP. ThinPrintOverSSL Select whether or not to use On z ThinPrintOverSSL. IPP over SSL Select whether or not to use On z IPP over SSL. Use the procedure below. Menu/Count.

6 Press the OK key. The Protocol Detail menu Protocol Detail: a b appears. 1 NetBEUI ********************* 2 SNMPv3 8 3 FTP(Server) [ Exit ] 9 Press the U or V key to select the item for which you want to make settings. If you select [On] for each of [FTP(Client)] and Port Number: D b [IPP] and press the OK key. 8-159 . 12 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to the Protocol Detail menu. 2 IPv4 Setting 3 IPv6 Setting 4 Protocol Detail ********************* [ Exit ] 7 Press the U or V key to select [Protocol Detail]. *******21* Press the U or V key or the numeric keys to set the port number.65535) screen appears. 10 Press the OK key. 1 TCP/IP Settings ********************* 2 NetWare 3 AppleTalk [ Exit ] 5 Press the U or V key to select [TCP/IP Settings]. The Network Setting menu Network Setting: a b appears. The TCP/IP Settings menu TCP/IP Settings: a b appears. a port number entry (1 . Default Setting (System Menu) 4 Press the OK key. 11 Press the U or V key to select [On] or [Off]. 8 Press the OK key. This displays the setting screen FTP(Client): a b for the item selected in step 9. 1 *Off ********************* 2 On The screen shown is the one when [FTP(Client)] is selected.

SSL Make this setting Make this setting when you use SSL. and press the OK key. 8-160 . menu. Use the procedure below to make the setting. The following network security settings are available. [ Login ] 2 The System menu appears. Menu/Count. 3 Security Level [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [Network Setting]. ******************* Then. and press [Login] (the Right Select key). You can use SSL Setup to select whether or not SSL is used and to specify the IPP port and HTTP port security settings. • SSL Setting …8-160 • SNMPv3 Setting …8-165 • IPSec Setting …8-166 SSL Setting This allows you to use SSL network security for communication. 1 In the Sys. System: a b 1 Network Setting ********************* 2 I/F Block Set. press the U or V Sys. enter the Login User Name and Login Login Password: Password to log in.:a b key to select [System]. The default setting is Off. Default Setting (System Menu) Network Security The network security functions can be set up to protect printer operation and the print data. a login screen will appear. 1 Report 2 Counter 3 System ********************* [ Exit ] When you are performing user management and Login User Name: L b have not logged in. Menu/Count.

7 Secure Protocol ********************* 8 Host Name 9 LAN Interface [ Exit ] 5 Press the U or V key to select [Secure Protocol]. enter the Login User Name and Login Login Password: Password to log in. The Network Setting menu Network Setting: a b appears. 10 Press the OK key. SSL appears. press the U or V Sys. and press the OK key. 6 Press the OK key. IPP Security Specify the protocol to be used for IPP. Menu/Count. a login screen will appear. 8 Press the OK key. Secure Protocol: a b 1 SSL ********************* 2 IPP Security 3 HTTP Security [ Exit ] 7 Press the U or V key to select [SSL]. [ Login ] 8-161 . is displayed and the screen returns to the Secure Protocol menu. and press [Login] (the Right Select key). Default Setting (System Menu) 4 Press the OK key. 1 In the Sys. Completed.:a b key to select [System]. SSL: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On 8 [ Exit ] 9 Press the U or V key to select [On] or [Off]. Use the procedure below to make the setting. Menu/Count. menu. ******************* Then. Secure Protocol appears. 1 Report 2 Counter 3 System ********************* [ Exit ] When you are performing user management and Login User Name: L b have not logged in. The default setting is IPPoverSSL only.

6 Press the OK key. The default setting is HTTPS only. IPP Security appears. Default Setting (System Menu) 2 The System menu appears. Secure Protocol appears. Secure Protocol: a b 1 SSL 2 IPP Security ********************* 3 HTTP Security [ Exit ] 7 Press the U or V key to select [IPP Security]. 8 Press the OK key. 3 Security Level [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [Network Setting]. The Network Setting menu Network Setting: a b appears. HTTP Security Specify the protocol to be used for HTTP. 7 Secure Protocol ********************* 8 Host Name 9 LAN Interface [ Exit ] 5 Press the U or V key to select [Secure Protocol]. 4 Press the OK key. 8-162 . System: a b 1 Network Setting ********************* 2 I/F Block Set. is displayed and the screen returns to the Secure Protocol menu. Use the procedure below to make the setting. 10 Press the OK key. Completed. IPP Security: a b 1 IPP/IPP over SSL 2 *IPPoverSSL only ********************* 9 Press the U or V key to select [IPP/IPP over SSL] or [IPPoverSSL only].

3 Security Level [ Exit ] 8 3 Press the U or V key to select [Network Setting]. 1 Report 2 Counter 3 System ********************* [ Exit ] When you are performing user management and Login User Name: L b have not logged in. 4 Press the OK key. and press the OK key. press the U or V Sys. Secure Protocol appears.:a b key to select [System]. menu. Default Setting (System Menu) 1 In the Sys. HTTP Security: a b 1 HTTP/HTTPS 2 *HTTPS only ********************* 8-163 . enter the Login User Name and Login Login Password: Password to log in. 8 Press the OK key. [ Login ] 2 The System menu appears. Menu/Count. Menu/Count. and press [Login] (the Right Select key). HTTP Security appears. ******************* Then. System: a b 1 Network Setting ********************* 2 I/F Block Set. The Network Setting menu Network Setting: a b appears. 6 Press the OK key. a login screen will appear. 7 Secure Protocol ********************* 8 Host Name 9 LAN Interface [ Exit ] 5 Press the U or V key to select [Secure Protocol]. Secure Protocol: a b 1 SSL 2 IPP Security 3 HTTP Security ********************* [ Exit ] 7 Press the U or V key to select [HTTP Security].

10 Press the OK key. LDAP Security Specify the protocol to be used for LDAP. 7 Secure Protocol ********************* 8 Host Name 9 LAN Interface [ Exit ] 5 Press the U or V key to select [Secure Protocol]. The Network Setting menu Network Setting: a b appears. Menu/Count. 1 Report 2 Counter 3 System ********************* [ Exit ] When you are performing user management and Login User Name: L b have not logged in. is displayed and the screen returns to the Secure Protocol menu. Use the procedure below to make the setting. 4 Press the OK key. Menu/Count. a login screen will appear. enter the Login User Name and Login Login Password: Password to log in. press the U or V Sys. Default Setting (System Menu) 9 Press the U or V key to select [HTTP/HTTPS] or [HTTPS only]. and press [Login] (the Right Select key).:a b key to select [System]. The default setting is Off. [ Login ] 2 The System menu appears. ******************* Then. 8-164 . and press the OK key. menu. Completed. 1 In the Sys. System: a b 1 Network Setting ********************* 2 I/F Block Set. 3 Security Level [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [Network Setting].

8-165 . LDAP Security: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 LDAPv3/TLS 3 LDAP over SSL 9 Press the U or V key to select [Off]. Use the procedure below. [LDAPv3/ TLS] or [LDAP over SSL]. Completed. Secure Protocol appears. is displayed and the screen returns to the Secure Protocol menu. LDAP Security appears. Default Setting (System Menu) 6 Press the OK key. 8 Press the OK key. Secure Protocol: a b 2 IPP Security 3 HTTP Security 4 LDAP Security ********************* [ Exit ] 7 Press the U or V key to select [LDAP Security]. The default setting is Off. 10 Press the OK key. Refer to Protocol Detail on page 8-157 about the procedures. 8 SNMPv3 Setting Sets up SNMPv3.

1 Report 2 Counter 3 System ********************* [ Exit ] When you are performing user management and Login User Name: L b have not logged in. The default setting is Off and that of Rule Setting is also Off. 4 WSD-SCAN 5 WSD-PRINT 6 IPSec ********************* [ Exit ] 5 Press the U or V key to select [IPSec]. Use the procedure below to make the setting. and press the OK key. enter the Login User Name and Login Login Password: Password to log in. 4 Press the OK key. a login screen will appear.:a b key to select [System]. 6 Press the OK key. Menu/Count. 3 Security Level [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [Network Setting]. Menu/Count. 1 In the Sys. The Network Setting menu Network Setting: a b appears. IPSec appears. [ Login ] 2 The System menu appears. System: a b 1 Network Setting ********************* 2 I/F Block Set. menu. press the U or V Sys. Default Setting (System Menu) IPSec Setting Make this setting when you use IPSec. 8-166 . ******************* Then. and press [Login] (the Right Select key). IPSec: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On 7 Press the U or V key to select [On] or [Off].

Completed. Default Setting (System Menu) If you select [On] and press the OK key. 8 8-167 . Rule Rule Setting: a b Setting appears. 2 On 8 Press the OK key. Press the U or V key to select 1 *Off ********************* [On] or [Off]. is displayed and the screen returns to the Network Setting menu.

press the U or V Sys. 1 Report 2 Counter 3 System ********************* [ Exit ] When you are performing user management and Login User Name: L b have not logged in. a login screen will appear. The I/F Block Set. enter the Login User Name and Login Login Password: Password to log in. The default setting is Unblock. 1 In the Sys. ********************* 3 Security Level [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [I/F Block Set. 4 Press the OK key. ******************* Then. Use the procedure below to specify the USB Host setting. menu. The following interface block settings are available: • USB Host (USB memory slot setting) • USB Device (USB interface setting) • Optional interface (Optional interface card setting) USB Host (USB memory slot setting) This locks and protects the USB memory slot (A1) or USB port (A2) (USB host). and press [Login] (the Right Select key). menu I/F Block Set. [ Login ] 2 The System menu appears. Menu/Count.].: a b appears. System: a b 1 Network Setting 2 I/F Block Set. and press the OK key. 1 USB Host ********************* 2 USB Device 3 Option I/F1 [ Exit ] 5 Press the U or V key to select [USB Host]. Default Setting (System Menu) Interface Block Setting This allows you to protect this machine by blocking the interface with external devices such as USB hosts or optional interfaces. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [System]. 8-168 .

USB Host appears. press the U or V Sys. 4 Press the OK key. ********************* 3 Security Level [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [I/F Block Set. 8 Press the OK key. Use the procedure below to specify the USB Device setting. menu I/F Block Set. Completed.]. enter the Login User Name and Login Login Password: Password to log in. 1 Report 2 Counter 8 3 System ********************* [ Exit ] When you are performing user management and Login User Name: L b have not logged in. The I/F Block Set. USB Host: a b 1 *Unblock ********************* 2 Block 7 Press the U or V key to select [Unblock] or [Block]. ******************* Then. Menu/Count. and press [Login] (the Right Select key). and press the OK key. Default Setting (System Menu) 6 Press the OK key. is displayed and the screen returns to the I/F Block Set. menu. Menu/Count. The default setting is Unblock.: a b appears.:a b key to select [System]. a login screen will appear. System: a b 1 Network Setting 2 I/F Block Set. 1 In the Sys. USB Device (USB interface setting) This locks and protects the USB interface connector (B1) (USB Device). menu. 1 USB Host 2 USB Device ********************* 3 Option I/F1 [ Exit ] 8-169 . [ Login ] 2 The System menu appears.

6 Press the OK key. is displayed and the screen returns to the System menu. Completed. USB Device: a b 1 *Unblock ********************* 2 Block 7 Press the U or V key to select [Unblock] or [Block]. Default Setting (System Menu) 5 Press the U or V key to select [USB Device]. 8 Press the OK key. USB Device appears. 8-170 .

Menu/Count. Use the procedure below to specify the optional interface setting. The default setting is Unblock. Option I/F appears.:a b key to select [System]. 1 In the Sys. Option I/F1: a b 1 *Unblock ********************* 2 Block 7 Press the U or V key to select [Unblock] or [Block]. enter the Login User Name and Login Login Password: Password to log in. 8-171 . Default Setting (System Menu) Optional interface (Optional interface card setting) This locks and protects the optional interface slot. [ Login ] System: a b 2 The System menu appears. 8 1 Network Setting 2 I/F Block Set. Menu/Count. a login screen will appear. 1 USB Host 2 USB Device 3 Option I/F1 ********************* [ Exit ] 5 Press the U or V key to select [Option I/F 1] or [Option I/F 2].]. 6 Press the OK key. and press [Login] (the Right Select key). 1 Report 2 Counter 3 System ********************* [ Exit ] When you are performing user management and Login User Name: L b have not logged in. The I/F Block Set.: a b appears. ********************* 3 Security Level [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [I/F Block Set. menu I/F Block Set. 4 Press the OK key. ******************* Then. press the U or V Sys. menu.

8-172 . Completed. Default Setting (System Menu) 8 Press the OK key. is displayed and the screen returns to the System menu.

There is no need for customers to use this menu. 8 8-173 . Default Setting (System Menu) Security Level (Security Level setting) The Security Level setting is primarily a menu option used by service personnel for maintenance work.

Functions See Optional Function on page Appendix-4. Default Setting (System Menu) Optional Functions You can use the optional applications installed on this machine. Opt. 8-174 .

.................................... 9-6 9-1 .....9 Maintenance This chapter describes cleaning and toner replacement............................... • Cleaning . 9-2 • Toner Container Replacement....................... 9-4 • Replacing the Waste Toner Box ..................................................

Do not use water. IMPORTANT: Do not use thinner or other organic solvents. CAUTION: For safety. clean the slit glass with the supplied cleaning cloth. always unplug the power cord before cleaning the machine. Document Processor If black streaks or dirt appears in copies when using the document processor. a 2 Wipe the white guide (b) on the document processor. 1 Open the document processor and wipe the slit glass (a). NOTE: Wipe the slit glasses with the dry cloth. Maintenance Cleaning Clean the machine regularly to ensure optimum output quality. b 3 Close the document processor. The message Clean the slit glass. 9-2 . Glass Platen Wipe the inside of the document processor and the glass platen with a soft cloth dampened with alcohol or mild detergent. soap or solvents for cleaning. may be displayed if the slit glass requires cleaning.

IMPORTANT: Be careful not to touch the black transfer roller and black transfer belt during cleaning as this may adversely affect print quality. it is also recommended that the inside of the machine be cleaned once a month as well as when the toner container is replaced. Exercise caution as there is a risk of burn injury. 1 Pull up the rear cover lever and open the rear cover. or if printouts appear faint or blurred. 9-3 . It should also be cleaned if streaking or lines appear on printed copies. Maintenance Cleaning the paper transfer unit CAUTION: Some parts are very hot inside the machine. 2 Wipe away the paper dust on the registration roller and the paper ramp using the cloth. The paper transfer unit should be cleaned each time the toner container and waste toner box are replaced. 9 Paper Transfer Unit Transfer Belt (Black) Registration Roller (Metal) Transfer Roller (Black) Duplex Unit Paper Ramp 3 Close the rear cover. To maintain optimum print quality.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to incinerate the toner container or the waste toner box. Every time you replace the toner container. 2 Carefully remove the old toner container from the machine. Open the upper tray to the position shown. 9-4 . NOTE: Put the old toner container in the plastic bag (supplied with the new toner kit) and discard it later according to the local code or regulations for waste disposal. open the top tray. For details. 3 Take the new toner container out of the toner kit. the top tray and document processor cannot be opened at the same time. Toner Container Replacement 1 While pulling the top tray cover lever. refer to Cleaning the paper transfer unit on page 9-3. Maintenance Toner Container Replacement When the message display displays Add toner. it will not be possible to install the toner container. be sure to clean the parts as instructed below. If the tray is not opened to this position. replace the toner. Dangerous sparks may cause burns. Shake the new toner container at least 5 or 6 times as shown in the figure in order to distribute the toner evenly inside the container. CAUTION: To prevent toppling.

that the projections of the toner container fit to the slots inside the machine. 9-5 . take care not to pinch your fingers. NOTE: Make sure. NOTE: When closing the top tray. 9 6 Close the top tray. Maintenance 4 Make sure the release lever is in the release position and set the new toner container in the machine. do not press hard on the operation panel. 5 Push down on the top of the toner container to install it firmly in place. When closing the top tray.

9-6 . Old Waste NOTE: Put the old waste toner box in the plastic bag Toner Box (supplied with the new toner kit) and discard it later according to the local code or regulations for waste disposal. Do not let the opening of the waste toner box face downward. Dangerous sparks may cause burns. A new waste toner box is included with the toner kit. Replacing the Waste Toner Box 1 Open the waste toner cover. The waste toner box needs to be replaced before the machine will operate. CAUTION: Do not attempt to incinerate the toner container or the waste toner box. NOTE: Remove the waste toner box as gently as possible so as not to scatter the toner inside. 3 Close the cap to the old waste toner box after removing the box from the machine. 2 Press the lock button and gently remove the waste toner box. Maintenance Replacing the Waste Toner Box Replace the waste toner box when the Check waste toner box message is displayed.

New Waste Toner Box 5 Insert the new waste toner box as shown in the figure. When the box is set correctly. Maintenance 4 Open the cap of the new waste toner box. For instructions. After replacing the toner containers and the waste toner box. it will snap into place. 9 9-7 . 6 Make sure that the waste toner box is correctly inserted and close the waste toner cover. clean the paper transfer unit. refer to Cleaning on page 9-2.

It is located at the upper left edge close to the scanner. • Be sure to consult a service technician before attempting long distance transportation of the machine. If not. Maintenance Prolonged Non-Use and Moving of the Machine Prolonged Non-use If you ever leave the machine unused for a long period of time. Refer to page 9-5. We recommend you consult with your dealer about the additional actions you should take to avoid possible damage that may occur when the machine is used next time. WARNING: If you ship the machine. remove the power cord from the wall outlet. 9-8 . • Make sure that the release lever is in LOCK position. • Lock the lock lever (Yellow) for the optical system. • Remove all toner containers and waster toner box and put them in a plastic bag. Refer to Quick Start Guide. • Keep it as level as possible to avoid spilling toner inside the machine. Moving the Machine When you move the machine: • Move it gently. remove and pack all toner containers and the waste toner box in a plastic bag and ship them separately from the machine. pull the release lever towards you until it stops.

. • Solving Malfunctions.. 10-7 • Responding to an ATTENTION Indicator Flashes.................... 10-2 • Responding to Error Messages .10 Troubleshooting This chapter explains how to solve problems with the machine.............................................. 10-15 • Clearing Paper Jams ........... 10-16 10-1 ..........................................................

Blank sheets are Are the originals loaded When placing originals on the 2-44 ejected. 4-10 — Make sure the paper type setting is 8-13 correct the paper being used. correctly? platen. Is the toner distributed evenly Shake the toner container from 9-4 within the toner container? side to side about several times. When placing originals in the 2-46 document processor. If a problem occurs with your machine. adjust the density manually and choose the desired level. 9-4 the addition of toner? Is the paper damp? Replace the paper with new paper. Reference Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Page The operation panel Is the machine plugged in? Plug the power cord into an AC — does not respond outlet. look into the checkpoints and perform procedures indicated on the following pages. Is there a message indicating Replace the toner container. Is the machine in Sleep Press the Power key to recover 2-9 mode? the machine from Sleep mode. 8-15 10-2 . 2-26 Is EcoPrint mode enabled? Disable EcoPrint mode. Faint or blurred Is the machine in Auto Set the correct density level for — printing Density mode? auto density. Is the machine in Manual Select the correct density level. If the problem persists. Pressing the Start key Is there a message on the Determine appropriate response to — does not produce Message Display? the message and respond copies. 5-16 Density mode? When changing the default density — level. when the main power switch is turned on. place them face-up. Troubleshooting Solving Malfunctions The table below provides general guidelines for problem solving. place them face-down and align them with the original size indicator plates. accordingly. The machine will be ready to copy within 20 seconds. — Check that the application software — is correctly operated. contact your Service Representative.

If there is no improvement after the value is decreased by 1 level. Printouts are fuzzy. — Run [MC] and decrease the 8-115 adjustment value. return the setting to the original value. Is the platen or the document Clean the platen or the document — processor dirty? processor. Printouts are too dark. Is the machine being used in Use in a location that has suitable — very humid conditions? humidity. adjust the density manually and choose the desired level. If there is still no improvement. decrease by 1 level again. 5-16 Density mode? When changing the default density — level. 5-15 clear. Is the machine in Manual Select the correct density level. Printouts are not Did you choose appropriate Select appropriate image quality. 5-15 pattern (dots grouped photograph? together in patterns and not aligned 10 uniformly). — Try adjusting the color control — settings using the printer driver. Decrease the adjustment value 1 level at a time from the current value. Copies have a moire Is the original a printed Set the image quality to [Photo]. 10-3 . Is the machine in Auto Set the correct density level for — Density mode? auto density. Troubleshooting Reference Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Page — Conduct color calibration either by 8-103 switching the machine off then on or using the operation panel. image quality for the original? Printouts are dirty.

and 2-26 type? Is it in good condition? reload it. 2-7 Is the printer cable or Connect the correct printer cable or 2-5 network cable connected? network cable securely. 2-26 wrinkled? Are there any loose scraps or Remove any jammed paper. 2-26 correctly? Is the paper of the supported Remove the paper. Is the paper loaded Check the position of the paper 2-45 correctly? width guides. locked? COMMAND CENTER and change COMMAND the keys locked up the setting if necessary. Cannot print. 2-7 was connected? Is the print job paused? Press [Resume] (the Left Select 7-18 key) to resume printing. Was the machine powered Power on the machine after 2-5 on before the printer cable connecting the printer cable. settings at the PC set application software settings are properly? set properly. While the operation Is the operation panel Check the panel lock setting in KYOCERA panel was being used. Guide 10-4 . Documents are Are the application software Check that the printer driver and — printed improperly. turn it over. Troubleshooting Reference Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Page Images are skewed. Paper often jams. folded or Replace the paper with new paper. Is the paper curled. Is the paper set in a proper Change the orientation in which the — orientation? paper is positioned. align the original width guides securely before placing the originals. When placing originals in the 2-45 document processor. Is the paper loaded Load the paper correctly. align them with the original size indicator plates. Is the machine powered on? Turn on the main power switch. CENTER and do not respond Operation when pressed. 10-16 jammed paper in the machine? Printouts are Is the paper damp? Replace the paper with new paper. 2-26 wrinkled. Is the machine plugged in? Plug the power cord into an AC — outlet. Are the originals placed When placing originals on the 2-44 correctly? platen.

Y. install a new toner kit for the color. Check that the USB memory — — is securely plugged into the machine. 10-5 . Skewed-color printout — Conduct color registration using 8-103 the operation panel. 8-113 Grey background — Conduct color calibration either by 8-103 switching the machine off then on or using the operation panel. lint- free cloth. Dirt on the top edge or Check the paper chute and Open the rear cover and check for 9-3 back of the paper the ramp. K” message is displayed with color description. Clean the paper ramp using a soft. C. 9-2 10 streaks Check the operation panel If the “Toner is running out. — Run [LaserScanner Cln]. Black or white vertical Is the slit glass dirty? Clean the slit glass. an 200×400dpi Super Fine for Super Fine when sending an image size is shrunk the scan resolution? image. USB memory not Check that the USB memory — — recognized. is securely plugged into the machine. Troubleshooting Reference Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Page Cannot print with USB Is the USB host blocked? Select Unblock in the USB host 8-168 memory. 8-112 — Run [Drum Refresh]. dry. When displaying an Have you selected Select a scan resolution other than 5-18 image sent from the 200×100dpi Normal or 200×100dpi Normal or 200×400dpi machine on the PC. Is the USB host blocked? Select Unblock in the USB host 8-168 settings. toner on the paper ramp inside the paper transfer unit. 9-4 for toner. vertically or horizontally. M. settings.

The altitude is 1500 m — Run [Altitude Adj. If there is still no improvement. there is no improvement when the value is set to [High 1]. set to [High 2]. 8-113 — Run [MC] and decrease the 8-115 adjustment value. If there is still no improvement. — Run [Drum Refresh]. The altitude is 1500 m — Run [Altitude Adj. decrease by 1 level again. If there is no improvement after the value is decreased by 1 level. decrease by 1 level again. set to [High 2]. decrease by 1 level again.] and set the 8-114 or higher and dots adjustment value to [High 1]. Decrease the adjustment value 1 level at a time from the current value. adjustment value 1 level at a time from the current value.] and set the 8-114 or higher and irregular adjustment value to [High 1]. Troubleshooting Reference Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Page Offset occures. return the setting to the original value. If horizontal white lines there is no improvement when the appear in the image. Part of the image is — Run [MC] and decrease the 8-115 periodically faint or adjustment value. 10-6 . Irregular horizontal — Run [MC] and decrease the 8-115 lines appear in the adjustment value. If appear in the image. Decrease the image. return the setting to the original value. value is set to [High 1]. If there is still no improvement. If there is no improvement after the value is decreased by 1 level. If there is no improvement after the value is decreased by 1 level. Decrease the blurred. return the setting to the original value. adjustment value 1 level at a time from the current value.

[Y]. Incorrect account ID. After a certain number of pages (about 20) are printed. look into the checkpoints and perform procedures indicated on the following pages. following items: • Registration to Authentication Server • Password and computer address for Authentication Server • Connection of Network Cannot duplex print Did you select a paper size/ Select the available paper type. Troubleshooting Responding to Error Messages If the control panel displays any of these messages. media type that cannot be Press the OK key to print without duplex printed? using Duplex. open? Is the top cover of the Close the top cover of the document 2-45 document processor open? processor. size loaded in the multi tray which is of the size and type purpose tray? indicated on the Message Display. open? control panel. – It is almost time to replace the toner 9-4 [C]. If the problem persists. of paper? Load paper in MP Is the paper of the selected Load the paper in the multi purpose 2-30 Tray. — Processor. [K] container. Close top (rear or left) Is there any cover which is Close the cover indicated on the — cover. Toner is running out. [M]. restricted by Job Accounting. Is the waste toner box installed? Install the waste toner box in the machine. Replace the toner container. 3-16 on this paper. [Y]. If a problem occurs with your machine. Check waste toner Is the waste toner box full? Replace the waste toner box. printing will stop. Replace 9-4 [C]. contact your Service Representative. [K] with a toner container of the color indicated in []. Add toner. 10-7 . Close Document Is the document processor Close the document processor. Press the OK key. follow the corresponding procedure. Alphanumeric Reference Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Page Load paper in cassette Is the indicated cassette out Load paper. [M]. 9-6 box. 2-27 1. 9-6 10 Cannot connect to – Press the OK key and check the — Authentication Server. – This job is canceled because it is — Job is canceled. Obtain a new toner container of the color indicated in [].

Cannot scan. Press the OK key. Is Error code "4201 to 4204" Internal condensation has occurred — displayed? as a result of a sudden change in temperature. and contact your Service Representative. key. Polling – FAX box is full. If this message still remains. This job is canceled. Accounting exceeded? Accounting. and no further storage — box limit exceeded. is available. unplug the power cord. Make a — Call service. Login Password. count restricted by Job acceptable count restricted by Job Job is canceled. Job Accounting Is the acceptable printing The printing count exceeded the — restriction exceeded. Memory is full. Press the OK — restriction exceeded. and contact your Service Representative. Press the Status/Job Cancel key and press [Cancel] to cancel the job. 10-8 . note of the error code displayed on the Message Display. turn off the machine. The job is canceled. Cannot print any more. processed Press the OK key to print the completely. Troubleshooting Reference Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Page Job Accounting – The job is canceled. Incorrect Login User – Enter correct Login User Name or — Name or Password. Press the OK key. Job Accounting – The job is canceled. The print job cannot be processed completely. Machine failure. – Unable to continue the job as the — Print job cannot be memory is used up. and then back on again. Cannot print. – Internal error has occurred. Job Is canceled. Turn off the machine. Turn off the machine and let stand for 30 to 90 minutes. key. Press the OK — restriction exceeded. unplug the power cord. scanned pages.

Job is canceled. – If a paper jam occurs. Is the acceptable scanning Press the OK key to print. and place them again. memory is used up. key. To print the same originals. Job not stored. – Press the OK key to cancel storing. If it is not resolved. – This job is canceled. – The Account ID does not match. – Unable to continue the job as the — Job is canceled. follow the operations below. Press the Status/Job Cancel key and press [Cancel] to cancel the job. Maximum Number of – Scanning cannot be performed due — scanned pages. Incorrect account ID. The job is canceled. Turn the — Turn the main power main power switch off and on. to insufficient memory of scanner. Remove original from Are there any originals left in Remove originals from the document — document processor. expand the printer memory. Troubleshooting Reference Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Page Memory is full. Leave the machine on and follow the instruction to remove the jammed paper. Press the Status/Job Cancel key and press [Cancel] to cancel the job. USB memory error. switch off and on. the document processor? processor. Press [OK]. Press the Start key to resume printing. • Select the paper size smaller to reduce. Press the OK key. – System error has occurred. the machine 10-16 will stop and the location of the jam will be indicated on the Message Display. put them back in their 10 original order. Error occurred. processor. • Select a nagative value for the sharpness. Press the OK key. Press the OK — Job is canceled. — Check the registered Account ID. 10-9 . • Select [Photo] for the quality of copies. send or — count exceeded? store the scanned pages. Paper jammed. Place original – Remove originals from the document 2-46 and press Start key.

Top tray is full of – Remove paper from the top tray. Unknown toner – This message is displayed if the Installed. – An error has occurred during — #### transmission. PC installed toner container's regional specification does not match the machine's. Press the OK key to print the scanned pages. message.000 pages of printing and requires professional servicing. a different machine of the same model while it was displaying the Add toner. and — Paper. Unknown toner – If the toner container was taken from — Installed. Replace MK. Press the Status/ Job Cancel key and press [Cancel] to cancel the job. – Replacement of the parts in the — maintenance kit is necessary at every 200. The — job is canceled. – The specified file is not found. Send error. The possible error codes and their descriptions are as follows. Remove the paper. Contact your service technician. Troubleshooting Reference Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Page File is not found. – Further scanning cannot be — Cannot start the job performed due to insufficient memory. Press the OK key. Insufficient memory. 10-10 . Scan to SMB Error Code Error Code:1101 Is the host name of the SMB Set the correct host name in — server incorrect? COMMAND CENTER. ignore the message and use the toner. press the OK key to resume the job.

Did you specify a user who Check the access restrictions of the — is not allowed to access the destination folder. Did you enter an invalid host Enter the correct host name or IP — 2201. Is the wrong port number Specify the correct port number. or has access permission been set for the folder? Error Code:1105 Is SMB protocol enabled? Enable SMB protocol for the host — name in COMMAND CENTER. Is the correct folder path Enter the correct folder path. Did you specify an invalid Enter the correct folder name and — folder name or share name? share name.:'"< >/? Error Code:1103 Is a domain name entered? Correctly enter the user name in the — "domain\user". 10-11 . folder. or has access permission been set for the folder? Are prohibited characters Check if any of the following — included in the host name? characters are included in the host name. Did you specify an invalid Enter the correct user name and — user or password? password. 2203 name or IP address? address. Make sure that the network environment (server. Error Code:2101. `~!@#$^&*()=+[]{}\|. "domain\user" or "domain@user" format. or other LAN network) is operating correctly. — specified? Are you correctly connected Make sure that the network cable has — to the network? been correctly connected. folder. Troubleshooting Reference Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Page Error Code:1102 Is a domain name entered? Correctly enter the user name in the — "domain\user". — entered? 10 Did you specify a user who Check the access restrictions of the — is not allowed to access the destination folder. "domain\user" or "domain@user" format. hub.

— entered? Did you specify a user who Check the access restrictions of the — is not allowed to access the destination folder. 5102. — incorrect? Error Code:1132 Are you trying to send to a Check if the server supports FTPS. send the pages in separate batches. — server that does not support Check if the server supports the FTPS service or the encryption method. 720f write down the error code that appears in the message display and contact a service technician. encryption method? 10-12 . Did you specify an invalid Enter the correct user name and — user or password? password. 7101. 5103. 5104. Troubleshooting Reference Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Page Error Code:0007. or has access permission been set for the folder? Error Code:1105 Is FTP protocol enabled? Enable FTP protocol in COMMAND — CENTER. If this occurs repeatedly. Error Code:1102 Is a domain name entered? Correctly enter the user name in the — "domain\user" or "domain\user" format. then on. (See the procedure in Machine failure. Error Code:1131 Is one of the FTPS settings Check the security settings.) Error Code:9181 Have more than 999 original If there are more than 999 original — pages been scanned? pages. Error Code:1103 Is the correct folder path Enter the correct folder path. folder. – Turn the main power switch off and — 5101. Call service. Scan To FTP Error Code Error Code:1101 Is the host name of the FTP Set the correct host name in — server incorrect? COMMAND CENTER.

selected when POP before "Other". Did you enter an invalid host Enter the correct host name or IP — 2102. Error Code:2101. 5104. name or IP address? address. then on. Troubleshooting Reference Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Page Error Code:2101. 2203 SMTP authentication is performed? Is the specified server an Set the correct server name in — SMTP server? COMMAND CENTER. Error Code:1104 Did you specify the Specify the destination address. Scan To Email Error Code Error Code:1101 Is the SMTP/POP3 server Set the correct server name in — name incorrect? COMMAND CENTER. If this occurs repeatedly. 10-13 . Are you correctly connected Make sure that the network cable has — to the network? been correctly connected. send the pages in separate batches. 5103. 10 Error Code:1102 Did you specify an invalid Enter the correct user name and — user or password? password. 2201.) Error Code:9181 Have more than 999 original If there are more than 999 original — pages been scanned? pages. 720f write down the error code that appears in the message display and contact a service technician. — destination address? Error Code:1105 Is SMTP protocol enabled? Enable SMTP protocol in COMMAND — CENTER. Call service. hub. (See the procedure in Machine failure. Make sure that the network environment (server. or other LAN network) is operating correctly. Error Code:2204 Were you attempting to Change the size that can be sent in — send too much data? COMMAND CENTER. 2103. Is "Other Authenticate" Select a valid POP3 user other than — 2102. 2103. — specified? Are you correctly connected Make sure that the network cable has — to the network? been correctly connected. 2202. hub. Make sure that the network environment (server. Error Code:4701. 2231. or other LAN network) is operating correctly. 2203. – Turn the main power switch off and — 5101. 2201. 7102. 3101 Is the wrong port number Specify the correct port number. 2202. 5102.

7101. or other LAN network) is operating correctly.) Error Code:9181 Have more than 999 original If there are more than 999 original — pages been scanned? pages. 720f write down the error code that appears in the message display and contact a service technician. hub. 5102. 5103. 10-14 . Call service.) Error Code:3201 Is a non-supported SMTP Check the SMTP authentication — authentication method settings on the server and client. then on. send the pages in separate batches. – Turn the main power switch off and — 5101. 7102. 5104. (For example. If this occurs repeatedly. make sure the cannot respond normally? SMTP/POP authentication enable/ disable settings are the same on the server and on the client. Troubleshooting Reference Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Page Error Code:3101 Is the server operating Make sure that the network — correctly? environment (server. Is an authentication method Check the settings on the server and — set for which the server client. CRAM-MD5 / DIGEST-MD5 / PLAIN / LOGIN Error Code:4201. (See the procedure in Machine failure. The enabled? SMTP authentication methods below can be used on the machine.

Restriction Has a communication Check error codes in the FAX Operation Guide error occurred? TX/RX Result Report Appendix and Activity Report. or Check Permitted FAX FAX Operation Guide Permitted ID No. Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference Page Cannot send fax. press [Status/Job Cancel] to check an error message. If the message is not indicated on the Message Display when [Status/Job Cancel] is pressed or the ATTENTION indicator flashes.. Is the modular cord Connect the modular — connected correctly? cord correctly. No. check the following. perform the corresponding procedure. — line busy? Does the destination Send again. Troubleshooting Responding to an ATTENTION Indicator Flashes If an ATTENTION indicator flashes. 10 10-15 . Is the destination FAX Send again. If "Error Code List" the error code starts with "U" or "E". and Permitted ID Chapter 6 Transmission registered correctly? No. — FAX machine respond? Is there an error other Contact your Service — than above? Representative. Is Permitted FAX No.

Refer to the indicated page number to remove the paper jam. Paper Jam Reference Description Location Page A Paper jam in the multi purpose tray. IMPORTANT: When removing a paper jam. Leave the main power switch on and to remove the jammed paper refer to the following information below. For paper specifications. Also refer to chapter 2 to how to insert paper correctly. or in a cassette of the optional 10-18 paper feeder. see "Paper Specifications" in the Appendix. If paper jams still occur frequently even though you have changed the paper. 10-16 B Paper jam in the machine cassette. 10-19 E Paper jam in the document processor. 10-19 D Paper jam in the transfer unit. a message will be displayed about the jam and copying or printing will stop. Please contact your service representative. 10-16 . C Paper jam in the paper feeder. Detailed paper jam positions are as follows. the machine may have a problem. make sure that no torn pieces of paper remain in the machine. the machine will re-start printing. After removing jammed paper. the specifications of the paper may not be suitable for the machine. 10-20 Paper jams If paper jams occur frequently. Troubleshooting Clearing Paper Jams If a paper jam occurs. Try changing the paper type. Remove jammed paper.

When Paper Jam is displayed. Multi Purpose Tray Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in the MP tray. do not try to forcefully remove it. you can use the online Help message to remove the paper jam. Troubleshooting Online Help Messages The online Help message function of the machine will show the procedure for removing a paper jam in the message display. press [Help](the Left Select key) to display the procedure to clear the jam. 2 Pull the cassette out of the machine. 1 Remove the paper jammed at the MP tray. Press V to display the next step or press U to display the previous step. When a paper jam occurs. 10 3 Open the lower feed cover. IMPORTANT: If the paper cannot be removed. 10-17 . Press the OK key to exit the online help message display. Go to paper jam in the feed unit on page 10-19.

After you have removed the paper jam. 2 Remove any partially fed paper. 1 Pull out the cassette or optional paper feeder. Paper jams in the cassette of the optional paper feeder are removed in the same way. follow the procedure below to remove the jam. Troubleshooting 4 Remove any partially fed paper. 10-18 . replace the lower feed cover. do not try to forcefully remove it. 3 Replace the paper cassette in the machine. NOTE: In case of jam check that the paper was loaded into the cassette correctly. Paper Cassette/Paper Feeder In the event that a paper jam occurs in the paper cassette. IMPORTANT: If the paper cannot be removed. 5 Replace the paper cassette in the machine. Go to paper jam in the feed unit on page 10-19.

3 If the jammed paper reaches the fuser unit as shown. open the rear cover of the paper feeder and remove the jammed paper. and pull it out. do not try to forcefully remove it. Go to paper jam in the feed unit on page 10-19. Fuser Cover 10-19 . grasp the paper and pull it out. grasp the paper. open the fuser cover. Troubleshooting Paper jam in the paper feeder If the paper jam cannot be removed using the procedure in paper jam in the paper cassette on page 10-18. 10 2 If most of the jammed paper is out in the upper tray. Exercise caution as there is a risk of burn injury. Inside the Machine 1 Pull up the rear cover lever and open the rear cover. CAUTION: Some parts are very hot inside the machine. NOTE: If the paper cannot be removed.

open the rear feed cover and pull out the Rear paper. grasp the paper and pull it out. Troubleshooting 4 If the jammed paper does not reach the registration roller (metal) as shown. 10-20 . The error will be cleared and printing will resume after warm-up. 1 Remove all of the originals from the document feed tray. lift up the Duplex Unit and remove the paper. Feed Cover 6 If the jammed paper reaches the Duplex Unit as shown. Document Processor Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in the document processor. Duplex Unit 7 Close the rear cover. Regis- tration Roller 5 If the jammed paper is located inside the machine as shown.

7 Place the originals. 4 Open the document processor. If the original tears. Troubleshooting 2 Open the left cover of the document processor. proceed to the next step. 6 Close the document processor. 10 5 Remove the jammed original. remove every loose scrap from inside the machine. If the original is caught in the rollers or difficult to remove. 10-21 . 3 Remove the jammed original.

Troubleshooting 10-22 .

................ 11-2 • Job Accounting ...............11 Management This chapter explains the following operations................................................. 11-33 11-1 ............................................ 11-13 • Checking the Counter............. • User Login Administration ...........

[ Login ] NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-7 for details on entering characters. Enter the Login ******************* User Name and Login Password. Enable user login administration.(page 11-5) Displaying user login administration 1 Press the system menu / counter key on the operation panel. First User Login Administration Follow these steps for the first user login administration. Enter correct Login User Name and Login Password for user authentication to log in.(page 11-5) T The registered user logs in for operations. see Adding a User on page 11-6. The system/counter menu appears. and Machine Administrator. Administrator. Menu/Count. and press Login Password: [Login].:a b ********************* 1 Report 2 Counter 3 System [ Exit ] 11-2 . In this case. For the default Login User Name and Login Password. the user Login User Name L b authentication screen appears.User. Management User Login Administration User login administration specifies how the user access is administered on this machine. log in with administrator authority. Sys. The security levels can be modified only by the machine administrator.(page 11-6) T Log out. Access are in three levels . (page 11-3) T Add a user. If user login administration is enabled.

Menu/Count. The User Login Set. Network User authentication based on Authentication Authentication Server. 1 See the procedure for displaying user control on page 11-2. Set. Management 2 From the system menu / counter menu. Enabling/Disabling User Login Administration This enables user login administration. and display the User/Job Account. Use the procedure below to enable user login administration.: a b appears. NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-7 for details on entering characters. [ Exit ] 4 Press the U or V key to select [User Login]. 11 2 Press the U or V key to select [User Login Set. Select one of the following authentication methods: Item Description Local User authentication based on user properties on Authentication the local user list stored in the machine. menu User Login Set. The User/Job Account menu appears. 1 User Login ********************* 2 Local User List 3 Group Auth. ********************* 2 Job Account. Use a user property stored in Authentication Server to access the network authentication login page. press the Sys. User/Job Account: a b 1 User Login Set. 4 User/Job Account ********************* 5 User Property 6 Common Settings [ Exit ] 3 Press the OK key. 11-3 .:a b U or V key to select [User/Job Account].]. 3 Unknown ID Job [ Exit ] 3 Press the OK key.

]. Management 5 Press the OK key.] is selected for the server type. User Login appears. login with any administrator registered in the local user list and correct the settings. 11-4 . • Network Authentication setting of the machine • User property of the Authentication Server • Date and time setting of the machine and the Authentication Server If you cannot login because of the setting of the machine. NOTE: If the Login User Name and Login Password are rejected. is displayed and the screen returns to the User Login Set. [Kerberos].] for the server type 1 NTLM ********************* and press the OK key. Select [Off] to disable user login administration. enter the host name (up to 64 characters) and port number [ Text ] of the authentication server.] or [Netwk Authentic. If the server type is [Kerberos]. and press the OK key. User Login: a b 1 *Off 2 Local Authentic. ABC If [Ext. When "Network Authentication" is selected. and press the OK key. 2 Kerberos 3 Ext. ********************* 3 Netwk Authentic. If [NTLM] or [Kerberos] is selected for the server Host Name: A b type. 6 Press the U or V key to select [Local Authentic. select Server type: a b [NTLM]. Completed. enter the host name (up to 64 characters) GUI* and domain name (up to 256 characters) of the authentication server. check the following settings. and then press the OK key. only domain names entered in uppercase will be recognized. or [Ext. menu.

1 If the screen below appears during the operations. press the OK key. 3 Press the V key to select [Login Password]. 4 Check the Login User Name and Login Password are correct. enter the Login Password. and press [Login] (the Right Select key). ******************* Login Password: [ Login ] 2 Press the OK key. press the Logout key to return 11 to the Login User Name/Login Password entry screen. Management Login/Logout Once you enable user login administration. Login User Name L b perform the following login operations. and then press the OK key. and then press the OK key. Auto Logout Logout is automatically executed in the following cases: • When the Power key is pressed to enter the sleep mode • When auto sleep is activated • When auto panel reset is activated 11-5 . a Login User Name and Login Password entry screen appears each time you use this machine. Logout To log out the machine. Login Log in using the procedure below. NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-7 for details on entering characters. enter the Login User Name.

Refer to Job Accounting on page 11-13. NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-7 for details on entering characters. NOTE: By default. ********************* 2 Job Account. The user. who registered his/her account name. Login Enter the password to log in (up to 64 characters). The following are the default user's properties. Management Adding a User This adds a new user. Set. * Mandatory at user registration. Item Description User Name* Enter the name displayed on the user list (up to 32 characters). Password* Access Level* Select Administrator or User for user access privileges. Login User Enter the Login User Name to log in (up to 32 Name* characters). 1 User Login Set. The registered address will be automatically selected for subsequent operations that need any E-mail function. 3 Unknown ID Job [ Exit ] 11-6 . Login User Name and Login Password regularly for your security. 2 See the procedure for displaying user control on page 11-2. Account Name Add an account where the user belongs. 1 Log in as a user with administrator rights. one of each default user with machine administrator rights and administrator privileges is already stored. press the U or V User/Job Account: a b key to select [User Login Set. Use the procedure below to register a new user. The table below explains the user information to be registered. E-mail Address The user can register his/her E-mail address. and display the User/Job Account. You can add Up to 21 users (including the default Login User Name).]. The same Login User Name cannot be registered. User Name: DeviceAdmin Login User Name: 2600 Login Password: 2600 Access Level: Administrator It is recommended to periodically change the user name. can log in without entering the account ID. 3 In the User/Job Account menu.

enter User Name: T b the Login User Name in the next screen. 2 Delete 3 Add User ********************* 8 Enter the user name and press the OK key. ABC [ Text ] 11 9 Press the U or V key to select [Exit] and then l User01: a b press the OK key. and then press the 1 Detail/Edit OK key. press the U or V key to select Local User List: a b the added user and then press the OK key. 1 Exit ********************* 2 Detail Select [Detail] and press the OK key to see information of the registered users. 10 In Local User List. Local User List appears. Local User List: a b l Admin l DeviceAdmin ********************* [ Menu ] 7 Press [Menu] (the Right Select key). press the U Menu: a b or V key to select [Add User]. Management 4 Press the OK key.: a b appears. 6 Press the OK key. 1 User Login 2 Local User List ********************* 3 IC Card Setting [ Exit ] 5 Press the U or V key to select [Local User List]. and then * S press the OK key. The User Login Set. menu User Login Set. l DeviceAdmin l Admin l User 1 ********************* [ Menu ] 11-7 .

Use the procedure below to change the user properties. ******@abcdef. [Change] is not displayed. Administrator NOTE: If the user list is for device administrator. select the user Access Level: 5/6 access privilege. and then press the OK key. select the Account Name: 6/6 account. Detail: C b press [Edit] (the Right Select key). press the OK key again. press Detail: C b [Edit] (the Right Select key). [ Change ] [Change] is not displayed. 16 After entering the user information. 15 Press the Z key to select [Account Name:]. and then press the OK key. is displayed and the screen returns to Local User List. NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-7 for details on entering characters. 13 Press the Z key to select [E-mailAddress:]. and then press the OK key. OOOOOOOOOOO [ Edit ] 12 Enter the same Login Password to confirm and press the OK key. enter the Login Login Password: 3/6 Password. It can be changed only by a user with administrator privileges. 11-8 .jp [ Edit ] 14 Press the Z key to select [Access Level:]. Changing User Properties User information can be changed. Registered. Management 11 Press the Y or Z key to select [Login Password:]. k KyoceramitaOsaka NOTE: If the user list is for device administrator and [ Change ] the device administrator does not log in. press Detail: C b [Change] (the Right Select key). press Detail: C b [Change] (the Right Select key). enter the e-mail p E-mailAddress: 4/6 address. and then press the OK key.

Local User List appears. User Name: 1/6 press [Edit] (the Right Select key). [ Edit ] 3 Repeat step 2 to change items as necessary.]. Local User List: a b l DeviceAdmin ********************* l Admin l User1 [ Menu ] The procedure differs depending on the details to be edited. and then press l DeviceAdmin the OK key. 2 In the User/Job Account menu. and display the User/Job Account. Changing user information 11 1 Press the U or V key to select the user whose Local User List: a b information you want to change. and then press the OK key.: a b appears. 5 Press the OK key. Management 1 See the procedure for displaying user control on page 11-2. press the U or V User/Job Account: a b key to select [User Login Set. press the OK key again. Set. ********************* 2 Job Account. 11-9 . change User1 information. Detail: C b press the Y or Z key to select the desired item. menu User Login Set. The User Login Set. 4 After completing changing the user information. l Admin ********************* l User1 [ Menu ] 2 In the same fashion as registering a new user. [ Exit ] 4 Press the U or V key to select [Local User List]. 3 Unknown ID Job [ Exit ] 3 Press the OK key. 1 User Login 2 Local User List ********************* 3 Group Auth. 1 User Login Set.

: a b appears.] is selected as the user authentication method. 1 User Login ********************* 2 Local User List 3 Group Auth. This menu can be used only when [Netwk Authentic. The user information is changed and the screen returns to Local User List. Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). NOTE: You can configure detail settings of group authentication in COMMAND CENTER. Management 5 The overwrite confirmation screen appears. and display the User/Job Account. menu User Login Set. refer to the KYOCERA COMMAND CENTER Operation Guide. [ Exit ] 11-10 . Deleting a user 1 Press the U or V key to select the user you want Local User List: a b to delete. 2 Press the U or V key to select [User Login Set. NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-7 for details on entering characters. This menu can be used only when [Netwk Authentic. 1 Detail/Edit 2 Delete ********************* 3 Add User 3 In the delete confirmation screen. press [Yes] (the Left Select key). 1 See the procedure for displaying user control on page 11-2. For details of LDAP server settings. and then press [Menu] (the Right Select l DeviceAdmin key).] is selected as the user authentication method. The user is deleted and the screen returns to Local User List. 3 Press the OK key. refer to the Operation Guide of the LDAP server. For details. Enabling/Disabling Group Authentication This enables group authentication using the LDAP server. l Admin ********************* l User1 [ Menu ] 2 Press the U or V key to select [Delete] and then Menu: a b press the OK key. Use the procedure below to enable group authentication. The User Login Set.].

5 Press the OK key. is displayed and the screen returns to the User/Job Account menu. 11-11 . 1 See the procedure for displaying user control on page 11-2.]. menu User Login Set. NW User Property: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On 6 Press the U or V key to select [On] or [Off]. 5 Press the OK key. Completed. Management 4 Press the U or V key to select [Group Auth. NW User Property appears. NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-7 for details on entering characters. [ Exit ] 4 Press the U or V key to select [NW User Property]. 7 Press the OK key.]. Displaying Network User Property Use the procedure below to display the property of the user logged on using the network authentication. This menu can be used only when [Netwk Authentic. and display the User/Job Account.] is selected as the user authentication method.: a b appears. 2 Press the U or V key to select [User Login Set. appears. 1 User Login ********************* 2 Local User List 11 3 Group Auth. 7 Press the OK key.: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On 6 Press the U or V key to select [On] or [Off]. 3 Press the OK key. Group Auth. The User Login Set. Group Auth.

1 User Login Set. is displayed and the screen returns to the User/Job Account menu. The table below shows the available settings. Unknown ID Job: a b 1 *Reject ********************* 2 Permit 4 Press the U or V key to select [Reject] or [Permit]. 3 Unknown ID Job ********************* [ Exit ] 3 Press the OK key. 2 In the User/Job Account menu. Item Description Reject The job is rejected (not printed). Permit The job is permitted to be printed. 5 Press the OK key. Completed. Unknown login user name Job This specifies the behavior for handling the jobs sent with unknown Login User Name. 1 See the procedure for displaying user control on page 11-2. NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-7 for details on entering characters. 2 Job Account. Management Completed. Use the procedure below to process jobs sent from unknown users. 11-12 . Unknown ID Job appears. follow the procedure when the Account ID is unknown. is displayed and the screen returns to the User/Job Account menu. Set. and display the User/Job Account. If the User Login is set to invalid and Job Accounting is set to valid. press the U or V User/Job Account:a b key to select [Unknown ID Job].

Use the procedure below to specify the job accounting setting. • Tracking the print volume for each account and for all accounts combined. Job accounting helps the following activities in business organizations. (page 11-15) T Other users log in for operations. and display the User/Job Account. 1 User Login Set. (page 11-15) Enabling/Disabling Job Accounting 11 Enable job accounting. Enable job accounting. 2 Job Account. • Restricting the print counter in one-page increments up to 9. press the U or V User/Job Account:a b key to select [Job Account. Set. 2 In the User/Job Account menu.999 copies. Management Job Accounting Job accounting Manages the copy/print count accumulated by individual accounts by assigning an ID to each account. (page 11-13) T Add an account. 1 See the procedure for displaying user control on page 11-2. (page 11-16) T Log out. First Job Accounting Setup Follow these steps for the first job accounting setup.]. • Resetting the print counter for each account or for all accounts combined.Set. • Integrated management of printing and scanning statistics through the use of an identical account ID.999. ********************* 3 Unknown ID Job [ Exit ] 11-13 . • Availability for account IDs with as many as eight digits (between 0 and 99999999) for security. • Manageability of up to 20 individual accounts.

The Job Account. 11-14 . 1 Job Accounting ********************* 2 Account. is displayed and the screen returns to the Job Account. 5 Press the OK key. 7 Press the OK key. Set. To continue the operation. To disable job accounting. enter the Account ID. Job Accounting appears. NOTE: When the display returns to the System Menu default screen. Report 3 Total Accounting [ Exit ] 4 Press the U or V key to select [Job Accounting]. Set. menu.Set. select [Off]. Management 3 Press the OK key. logout is automatically executed and the screen to enter the Account ID appears.:a b appears. Completed. Job Accounting: a b 1 *Off ********************* 2 On 6 Press the U or V key to select [On]. menu Job Account.

an account ID entry screen appears each time you use this machine. press the Logout key to return to the account ID entry screen. Logout When the operations are complete. (Refer to Login/Logout on page 11- 5. Management Login/Logout If job accounting is enabled. 11 (Refer to Adding a User on page 11-6. you can refer to the number of pages printed and the number of pages scanned. Login NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-7 for details on entering characters. By pressing [Counter] (the Left Select key). enter the account ID using the Account ID: b numeric keys and press the OK key. 1 In the screen below. a warning beep will sound and login will fail. the account ID entry would be skipped. the screen to enter the Login User Name and Login Password appears.) 2 Proceed to complete the rest of the steps.) If the user has already registered the account information. Enter a Login User Name and Login Password to log in. [Counter ] If the entered account ID does not match the registered ID. ******************* NOTE: If you entered a wrong character. Enter the correct account ID. press the Clear key and enter the account ID again. When the screen to enter the Login User Name and Login Password appears If user login administration is enabled. 11-15 . Use the procedure below to login and logout.

Set.:a b appears. NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-7 for details on entering characters. Restriction This Prohibits printing/scanning or restricts the number of sheets to load. Account. 2 Job Account. ********************* 3 Unknown ID Job [ Exit ] 3 Press the OK key. Management Adding an Account This section explains how to add a new account. Account ID Enter the account ID as many as eight digits (between 0 and 99999999). List]. Item Description Account Name Enter the account name (up to 32 characters). The following entries are required.]. 2 In the User/Job Account menu.Set. List: a b k UI R&D DEP. Set. ********************* k Osaka GUI Design k Kyoceramita [ Menu ] 11-16 . The Job Account. Use the procedure below to register a new account. press the U or V User/Job Account:a b key to select [Job Account. List appears. 1 User Login Set. List ********************* 6 Default Setting [ Exit ] 4 Press the U or V key to select [Account. and display the User/Job Account.Set. menu Job Account. 1 See the procedure for displaying user control on page 11-2. Refer to Restricting the Use of the Machine on page 11-20. 5 Press the OK key. Account. 4 Each Job Account 5 Account.

Management 6 Press [Menu] (the Right Select key).01: a b press the OK key. 10 Account. 9 Press the U or V key to select [Exit] and then k Dep. Enter any other account ID. Use the procedure below to manage accounts. 11-17 . Account Name: T b * S ABC [ Text ] 8 Enter the account code and press the OK key. Managing Accounts This changes the registered account information or deletes the account. Account ID: b NOTE: Any account ID that has already registered ******************* S cannot be used. and then press 1 Detail/Edit the OK key. press the U Menu: a b or V key to select [Add Account]. List is displayed and the new account is 11 added to the account list. 2 Delete 3 Add Account ********************* 7 Enter the account name and press the OK key. NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-7 for details on entering characters. 1 Exit ********************* 2 Detail Select [Detail] and press the OK key to see information of the registered accounts.

Account Name: 1/7 change account information and restriction of use. and then press Account. and display the User/Job Account. ********************* k Osaka GUI Design k Kyoceramita [ Menu ] The procedure differs depending on the details to be edited. Account.:a b appears. 4 Each Job Account 5 Account. k UI R&D DEP. Management 1 See the procedure for displaying user control on page 11-2. press [Edit] (the Right Select key). 11-18 . 1 User Login Set. 3 Repeat step 2 to change items as necessary. List appears. menu Job Account.Set. Set.]. List: a b k UI R&D DEP. k Osaka GUI Design ********************* k Kyoceramita [ Menu ] 2 Press the Y or Z key to select the item you want Detail: C b to change.Set. [ Edit ] NOTE: Activate or deactivate restriction. List ********************* 6 Default Setting [ Exit ] 4 Press the U or V key to select [Account. Refer to Restricting the Use of the Machine on page 11-20. List]. ********************* 3 Unknown ID Job [ Exit ] 3 Press the OK key. List: a b the OK key. Changing account information 1 Press the U or V key to select the account whose information you want to change. 5 Press the OK key. Account. 2 In the User/Job Account menu. Osaka GUI Design and then press the OK key. The Job Account. 2 Job Account. press the U or V User/Job Account:a b key to select [Job Account. Set.

Registered. Menu: a b 1 Detail/Edit 2 Delete ********************* 3 Add Account 3 Press the OK key. A Are you sure? confirmation screen appears. The account is deleted. Use the procedure below to set the counting methods. List. information. press the OK key again. is displayed and the screen returns to Account. List. Refer to Restricting the Use of the Machine on page 11-20. The account information is changed. Delete. 11 [ Yes ] [ No ] 4 Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). The selection may influence restriction on the count and count method. List: a b want to delete. Are you sure? z k UI R&D DEPT. k Osaka GUI Design ********************* k Kyoceramita [ Menu ] 2 Press the U or V key to select [Delete]. Counting the Number of Pages Printed on page 11-27 and Printing an Accounting Report on page 11-31 for details. Select key). 11-19 . A confirmation screen appears.either the total of both or each of copying and printing individually. Managing the Copier/Printer Counts You can select how the copying and printing page counts are shown . z k Osaka GUI DESIGN [ Yes ] [ No ] 5 Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). is displayed and the screen returns to Account. Management 4 After completing changing the account Overwrite. and then press [Menu] (the Right k UI R&D DEP. Deleting an account 1 Press the U or V key to select the account you Account. Completed.

9 Press the OK key.Set. 2 Job Account. is displayed and the screen returns to the Default Setting menu. Set. Set.]. Completed. 7 Press the OK key.Set: a b appears. Management 1 See the procedure for displaying user control on page 11-2. and display the User/Job Account. 5 Press the OK key. 1 Job Accounting ********************* 2 Account Report 3 Total Accounting [ Exit ] 4 Press the U or V key to select [Default Setting]. ********************* 3 Unknown ID Job [ Exit ] 3 Press the OK key. 2 In the User/Job Account menu. Restricting the Use of the Machine This section explains how to restrict the use of the machine by account or the number of sheets available. press the U or V User/Job Account:a b key to select [Job Account. 1 User Login Set. The Job Account. The items that can be restricted differ depending on whether [Split] or [Total] is selected for Managing the Copier/Printer Counts on page 11-19. Copy/Print Count appears. 1 Apply Limit 2 Copy/Print Count ********************* 3 Counter Limit [ Exit ] 6 Press the U or V key to select [Copy/Print Count]. The Default Setting menu Default Setting: a b appears. menu Job Account. Copy/Print Count:a b 1 Total 2 *Split ********************* 8 Press the U or V key to select [Total] or [Split]. 11-20 .

and black & white copies. 11 Scan Restriction Limits the number of sheets scanned (excludes (Others) copying). Fax TX Limits the number of sheets sent by fax. Print limit (full A limit can be set for the number of pages printed in color) full color. (Only on Restriction products with the fax function installed) 11-21 . (full color) Printer print limit A limit can be set for the total number of pages (total) printed in color and black & white. monochrome copies. Fax TX Limits the number of sheets sent by fax. (Only on Restriction products with the fax function installed) ‹ [Total] selected for Copier/Printer Count Item Detail Print limit (total) A limit can be set for the total number of printer and copier pages printed. Management Restriction Items ‹ [Split] selected for Copier/Printer Count Item Detail Copier print limit A limit can be set for the total number of full color (total) copies. Copier print limit A limit can be set for the number of full color copies. Printer print limit A limit can be set for the number of pages printed in (color) color. Scan Restriction Limits the number of sheets scanned (excludes (Others) copying).

k UI R&D DEP.999. Use the procedure below to select a restriction method. and then press the OK key. Print Restrict.: 4/6 key). k Osaka GUI Design ********************* k Kyoceramita [ Menu ] 3 Press the Y or Z key to select the item to be Detail: C b restricted and then press [Edit] (the Right Select Print Restrict. List. press the U or V key to select the Account. List: a b account to which you want to set restriction of use.: 4/7 Copier Off [ Edit ] 4 Press the U or V key to select the desired Print Restrict. 2 In Account. Off [ Edit ] When selecting [Split] in Copy/Print Count.: a b restriction method and then press the OK key.999 copies. screen Detail: C b changes as shown in the left. 1 *Off ********************* 2 Counter Limit 3 Reject Usage [ Exit ] 11-22 . Management Applying Restriction Restriction can be applied in two modes as follows: Item Description Off No restriction given Counter Limit Restricts the print counter in one-page increments up to 9. Reject Usage Restriction is applied. 1 Follow steps 1 to 7 of Adding an Account on page 11-16.

Use the procedure below to apply the restriction limit. 1 See the procedure for displaying user control on page 11-2. Are you sure? z k Osaka GUI DESIGN [ Yes ] [ No ] 7 Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). 6 Press the OK key again. Registered.Set. press the U or V User/Job Account:a b key to select [Job Account. Applying Limit of Restriction This specifies how the machine behaves when the counter has reached the limit of restriction. * The next job will be prohibited in sending or in storing in the box.9999999) press the OK key. is displayed and the screen returns to Account. Management If you select [Counter Limit]. 2 Job Account. and display the User/Job Account. **123456*pages 5 Repeat step 3 to 4 to set items as necessary. 2 In the User/Job Account menu. appears. 1 User Login Set. ********************* 3 Unknown ID Job [ Exit ] 11-23 . enter the upper limit Limit Pages: D b number of pages in the next screen. List. and then (1 . 11 Alert Only Job continues while displaying an alert message. A confirmation screen Overwrite. The restriction of use is changed. Subsequently Printing/scanning of the job continues but the subsequent job will be rejected. Item Description Immediately * Job stops when the counter reaches its limit.]. The table below describes the action taken. Set.

Apply Limit appears.Set. is displayed and the screen returns to the Default Setting menu. Management 3 Press the OK key. Apply Limit: a b 1 Immediately 2 *Subsequently ********************* 3 Alert Only [ Exit ] 8 Press the U or V key to select [Immediately]. [Subsequently] or [Alert Only]. List 6 Default Setting ********************* [ Exit ] 4 Press the U or V key to select [Default Setting]. menu Job Account. 5 Press the OK key. 1 Apply Limit ********************* 2 Copy/Print Count 3 Counter Limit [ Exit ] 6 Press the U or V key to select [Apply Limit]. 11-24 . 4 Each Job Account 5 Account. 9 Press the OK key. The Default Setting menu Default Setting: a b appears.:a b appears. The Job Account. 7 Press the OK key. Completed. Set.

The items that can be set differ depending on whether [Split] or [Total] is selected for Managing the Copier/ Printer Counts on page 11-19. Printer print limit A default value can be set for the color printed page (color) limit. Scan Restriction Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets (Other) used for scanning (excludes copying).999. 11-25 . Scan Restriction Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets (Other) used for scanning (excludes copying). Management Default Counter Limit When you add a new account. Copier print limit A default value can be set for the full color copy (full color) limit. you can change the default restrictions on the number of sheets used. (Only on products with the fax function installed) ‹ [Total] selected for Copier/Printer Count 11 Item Detail Print limit (total) A default value can be set for the full color printed page limit. Available Settings ‹ [Split] selected for Copier/Printer Count Item Detail Copier print limit A default value can be set for the total color copy (total) and black & white copy limit. FAX TX Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets Restriction used for sending faxes. Print limit (full Sets the default restriction on the total number of color) sheets used for copying and printing. You can set any number from 1 to 9. FAX TX Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets Restriction used for sending faxes. (Only on products with the fax function installed) Use the procedure below to specify the counter limits. Printer print limit A default value can be set for the total color and (total) black & white printed page limit.999 in 1-sheet increments.

is displayed and the screen returns to Counter Limit. Counter Limit: a b 1 Copy Restriction ********************* 2 Print Restrict. Set.Set.(Other) 8 Press the U or V key to select the item for which you want to set the default restriction on the number of sheets. Management 1 See the procedure for displaying user control on page 11-2. 7 Press the OK key. 2 In the User/Job Account menu.Set. 5 Press the OK key. 2 Job Account. 9 Use the numeric keys to enter the default Copy(Total): D b restriction on the number of sheets. 1 User Login Set. Set.9999999) the OK key. and then press the OK key. 1 Apply Limit ********************* 2 Copy/Print Count 3 Counter Limit [ Exit ] 6 Press the U or V key to select [Counter Limit]. 3 ScanRest. The Job Account. 10 Repeat steps 10 to 11 set other default restrictions on the number of sheets. 11-26 . 1 Each Job Account 2 Account. Counter Limit appears. The Default Setting menu Default Setting: a b appears. **123456* Completed. menu Job Account.:a b appears.]. press the U or V User/Job Account:a b key to select [Job Account. ********************* 3 Unknown ID Job [ Exit ] 3 Press the OK key. List 3 Default Setting ********************* [ Exit ] 4 Press the U or V key to select [Default Setting]. and then press (1 . and display the User/Job Account.

as well as the total number of pages scanned. 1 User Login Set.]. and display the User/Job Account. You can also use [Duplex Pages] and [Combine Pages] to check the number of pages used. 2 Job Account. Set. press the U or V User/Job Account:a b key to select [Job Account. and the total number of pages used. Counts are classified into Total Job Accounting and Each Job Accounting. Use the procedure below to check and reset the counter. The Job Account. A new count can also be started after resetting the count data which was stored for a certain period of time. Item Detail Printed Pages Displays the number of pages copied and printed. Scanned Pages Displays the number of pages scanned for copying. Types of the counts are as follows. Management Counting the Number of Pages Printed This counts the number of pages printed. FAX TX Time* Displays the total duration of fax transmissions. ********************* 3 Unknown ID Job [ Exit ] 3 Press the OK key. 11-27 .Set: a b appears. faxing* and other functions. 1 See the procedure for displaying user control on page 11-2. 11 2 In the User/Job Account menu. menu Job Account. FAX TX Pages* Displays the number of pages faxed. Report 3 Total Accounting [ Exit ] 4 Press the U or V key to select [Total Accounting]. Set.Set. 1 Job Accounting ********************* 2 Account. * Only on products with the fax function installed Total Job Accounting/Resetting the Counter This counts the number of pages for all accounts and resets the counts for those accounts together at the same time.

11-28 . press the U or V key to Total Accounting:a b select [Counter Reset]. 1 Printed Pages ********************* 2 Scanned Pages 3 FAX TX Pages [ Exit ] 6 Press the U or V key to select the function of which you want to check counts. The screen returns to the Total Accounting menu. 8 To reset the counter. Copy(B & W): 1/5 1234567 7 After confirming the content. Copy/Print Pages:C b press the Y or Z key to switch the counted items. Completed. press the OK key. 1 Printed Pages 2 Scanned Pages 3 Counter Reset ********************* [ Exit ] 9 Press the OK key. is displayed and the screen returns to the Total Accounting menu. Are you sure? z Total JobAccounting [ Yes ] [ No ] 10 Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). Management 5 Press the OK key. If you select [Printed Pages] or [Scanned Pages]. Each Job Accounting/Resetting the Counter This counts the number of pages for each account and resets the counts by account. Reset counter. Use the procedure below to display and reset the counter. A confirmation screen appears. The Total Accounting menu Total Accounting:a b appears. and then press the OK key. The counter is reset.

11-29 . 7 Press the OK key. select the item for which you want to check printed page counts.Set. and then press the OK key. 1 User Login Set. press the U or V User/Job Account:a b key to select [Job Account. 2 Job Account. 2 In the User/Job Account menu. Set.Set. and then press the OK key. 6 Press the U or V key to select the account of which you want to check counts. menu Job Account. and display the User/Job Account.:a b appears. ********************* 3 Unknown ID Job [ Exit ] 3 Press the OK key. Press the Y or Z key to switch the counted items. Management 1 See the procedure for displaying user control on page 11-2. The Job Account. The Each Job Accounting menu Each Job Account: a b appears. k Osaka GUI DESIGN ********************* k Kyoceramita k UI R&D DEPT. A menu for the account 11 Osaka GUI DESIGN: a b appears. If you select [Printed Pages]. 4 Each Job Account ********************* 5 Account List 6 Default Setting [ Exit ] 4 Press the U or V key to select [Each Job Account].]. 1 Printed Pages ********************* 2 Scanned Pages 3 Counter Reset [ Exit ] 8 Press the U or V key to select the function of which you want to check counts. 5 Press the OK key. Set.

press the OK key. press the U or V key to Osaka GUI DESIGN: a b select [Counter Reset]. Reset counter. press the Y or Z Copy/Print Pages:C b key to switch the counted items. the upper limit on Limit:1234567 the number of output sheets is also displayed. is displayed and the screen returns to the menu for the account. Management If you select [Scanned Pages]. Are you sure? z k Osaka GUI DESIGN [ Yes ] [ No ] 12 Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). The counter is reset. The screen returns to the menu for the account. 1 Printed Pages 2 Scanned Pages 3 Counter Reset ********************* [ Exit ] 11 Press the OK key. Copy(B & W): 1/5 1234567 If the number of output sheets is restricted by an account management function. 10 To reset the counter. A confirmation screen appears. 11-30 . 9 After confirming the content. Completed.

1 User Login Set. Use the procedure below to print a job accounting report. menu Job Account. The Job Account. 1 See the procedure for displaying user control on page 11-2. the report will be printed by size. When Split is selected for Managing the Copier/Printer Count FS-C2126MFP For the count by paper size. 11 2 In the User/Job Account menu.Set. press the U or V User/Job Account:a b key to select [Job Account.]. Management Printing an Accounting Report Total pages counted at all relevant accounts can be printed as an accounting report. Set. Report 3 Total Accounting [ Exit ] 4 Press the U or V key to select [Account. 2 Job Account.Set: a b appears. Reports have different formats depending on how the count of copiers and printers is administered. 11-31 . and display the User/Job Account. Report] and then press the OK key. ********************* 3 Unknown ID Job [ Exit ] 3 Press the OK key. 1 Job Accounting ********************* 2 Account. Set.

Are you sure? z Total JobAccounting [ Yes ] [ No ] 11-32 . press [Yes] (the Left Print. Management 5 In the confirmation screen. Select key). A job accounting report is printed.

For the default 11 Login User Name and Login Password. Enter the Login User Name and ******************* Login Password. 1 Printed Pages ********************* 2 Scanned Pages NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-7 for details on entering characters. and printed. 2 Counter ********************* 3 System [ Exit ] 2 If user control is disabled. Pages faxed*. the user authentication Login User Name L b screen appears. Login Password: log in with administrator authority. By Paper You can check the number of pages printed Size for each paper size. [ Exit ] If you select [Printed Pages]. In this case. and the total number of pages used. * FAX functions available only on products with the fax function installed. Scanned Pages You can check the number of pages copied. see Adding a User on page 11-6. and then press the OK key. and otherwise scanned. and then 1 by Function ********************* press the OK key. press U or Sys. 2 by Paper Size [ Exit ] 11-33 . and the total number of pages used. faxed*. Menu/Count. and press [Login]. 1 Press the system menu / counter key. Management Checking the Counter You can check the number of pages printed and scanned. and press the OK key.:a b V key to select [Counter] from the system menu / 1 Report counter menu. The number is counted by the following items: Item Description Printed By Function You can check the number of pages copied. select [by Function] Printed Pages: a b or [by Paper Size] in the next screen. [ Login ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [Printed Pages] or Counter: a b [Scanned Pages].

11-34 . The screen returns to the menu for the account. press the OK key. Printed Pages: C b Copy(B & W): 1/5 1234567 5 After completing checking the count. Management 4 Press the Y or Z key to check the count.

........................................................................ Appendix-23 • Glossary ............................................. Appendix-28 Appendix-1 ........... Appendix-21 • Sharpness adjustment......... Appendix-7 • Paper .......................................... Appendix-11 • Color balance adjustment.............. Appendix-2 • Character Entry Method ......................... Appendix-22 • Color saturation adjustment.................................Appendix • Optional Equipment ....... Appendix-22 • Specifications............................................................................

NOTE: To allow paper to be removed when a paper jam occurs. there is a cover (rear cover) on the rear side of the paper feeder. you can plug in optional memory module (dual in line memory module) in the memory slot provided on the main controller board. Appendix-2 . 512 or 1024 MB. CAUTION: When using the paper feeder. 256. Expansion Memory Cover Paper Feeder Paper Feeder Two additional cassettes identical to the machine’s cassettes can be installed in the machine. Paper capacity and loading method are the same as Cassettes 1. Expansion Memory To expand the printer memory for more complex print jobs and faster print speed.Optional Equipment Overview of Optional Equipment The following optional equipment is available for the machine. We shall not be liable for any damages caused by improper installation of expansion memory. be sure to replace the cover. NOTE: The expansion memory should only be installed by your service technician. The maximum memory size is 1792 MB. You can select additional memory module from 128.

2 Remove the right cover with a piece of metal similar to coin. Or. when you install the memory module. 3 Open the inside cover. Installing the Memory Module 1 Turn off the machine and disconnect the power cord and interface cable. if possible. 4 Remove the memory module from its package. Appendix-3 . discharge static electricity from your body by touching a water pipe (faucet) or other large metal object before handling the memory module. wear an antistatic wrist strap.Precautions for Handling the Memory Module Correct Incorrect To protect electronic parts.

make sure that the machine is switched off. NOTE: Restrictions such as the number of times the application can be used during the trial period differ depending on the application. press the U or V Sys. align the cut-out part with the socket terminal and insert directly in at an angle. and press the OK key. 1 Report 2 Counter 3 System ********************* [ Exit ] Appendix-4 . remove the right cover and the memory slot cover from the machine. CAUTION: Before inserting a memory module in the machine. Overview of the Applications The applications listed below are installed on this machine. Verifying the expanded memory To verify that the memory module is working properly. Removing the Memory Module To remove a memory module.) This application allows print data to be printed directly without a print driver. carefully push out the two socket clamps. menu. Ease the memory module out of the socket to remove. Menu/Count. Optional Function You can use the optional applications installed on this machine. • UG-33 (ThinPrint) (This application can only be activated in Europe.:a b key to select [System]. test it by printing a status page. Then. Menu/Count. 6 Carefully press the inserted memory down and into the machine. 1 In the Sys. 7 Reinstall the right cover. You can use these applications for a limited period on a trial basis. 5 With the memory connection terminal pointing toward the socket.

If you select [Trial] and press the OK key. ******************* Then. press [Trial] without entering the License key. 6 Press the OK key. If you select [Official]. 3 Security Level [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [Op Function]. the License key entry screen is displayed. The selected application menu Licence On: a b appears. Are you sure? [ Yes ] [ No ] Appendix-5 . enter the Login User Name and Login Login Password: Password to log in. To use the application as a trial. a login screen will appear. 1 ID-Card g ********************* 2 UG-33 T [ Menu ] 5 Press the U or V key to select desired application. When you are performing user management and Login User Name: L b have not logged in. The Op Function menu Op Function: a b appears. Enter the License key using the numeric keys and press the OK key. and press [Login] (the Right Select key). limited time. [ Login ] 2 The System menu appears. System: a b 1 Network Setting ********************* 2 I/F Block Set. the Test the optional confirmation screen appears. 1 *Official ********************* 2 Trial 7 Press the U or V key to select [Official] or [Trial]. 4 Press the OK key. Press [Yes] (the function for a Right Select key).

Menu/Count. 3 Security Level [ Exit ] 3 Press the U or V key to select [Op Function]. 6 Press the U or V key to select [Detail]. The Op Function menu Op Function: a b appears. System: a b 1 Network Setting ********************* 2 I/F Block Set. Appendix-6 . Menu/Count.:a b key to select [System]. CAUTION: If you change the date/time while using an application. 4 Press the OK key. and press [Login] (the Right Select key). you will no longer be able to use the application. The detail Menu: a b setting screen appears. [ Login ] 2 The System menu appears. a login screen will appear. 1 Licence On ********************* 2 Detail You can now view detailed information on the selected application. menu. 1 ID-Card g ********************* 2 UG-33 T [ Menu ] 5 Press [Menu] (the Left Select key). 1 Report 2 Counter 3 System ********************* [ Exit ] When you are performing user management and Login User Name: L b have not logged in. ******************* Then. press the U or V Sys. Checking Application Details Use the procedure below to check the details of an application. 1 In the Sys. is displayed and the screen returns to the Op Function menu. 8 Licensed. enter the Login User Name and Login Login Password: Password to log in. and press the OK key.

4. 7. Clear Key Press this key to delete the character at the cursor position. (When [Text] is displayed) Appendix-7 .Character Entry Method In character entry screens. 6. Numeric Keys Use these keys to select the character you want to enter. 5. If the cursor is at the end of the line. OK Key Press this key to finalize the entered character(s). 1 2 6 7 3 4 5 1. the character to the left of it is deleted. use the procedure below to enter characters. Keys Used Use the following keys to enter characters. Cursor Keys Use these to select the entry position. 3. or select a character from the character list. Right Select Key Press this key to select the type of characters you want to enter. Reset Key Press this key to cancel the character entry procedure and return to the standby screen. Back Key Press this key to return to the screen from which you invoked the character entry screen. 2.

123. 123 [ Text ] Symbols: a b [ Text ] NOTE: By pressing on the numeric keys while entering characters. ABC . press [Text] (the Right File name input: Select key) to select the type of characters you OsakaSD3* want to enter. Symbols To enter symbols. [ Text ] Symbol. you can directly display the Symbols screen. Appendix-8 .Selecting Type of Characters To enter characters. the following three types are available: ABC To enter alphabets. 123 [ Text ] Current character type Each time you press [Text] (the Right Select key). ABC the character type switches as follows: ABC.. In a character entry screen. 123 To enter numerals..

use the procedure below to enter characters. .' is entered when only numerals are entered and no character type is selected. press the key corresponding to the character you want to enter until it is displayed. or '.@-_/:¯1 Numeric 1 Alphabetic/Symbol abcABC2 Numeric 2 Alphabetic/Symbol defDEF3 Numeric 3 Alphabetic/Symbol ghiGHI4 Numeric 4 Alphabetic/Symbol jklJKL5 Numeric 5 Alphabetic/Symbol mnoMNO6 Numeric 6 Alphabetic/Symbol pqrsPQRS7 Numeric 7 Alphabetic/Symbol tuvTUV8 Numeric 8 Alphabetic/Symbol wxyzWXYZ9 Numeric 9 Alphabetic/Symbol . (decimal point)* Alphabetic/Symbol # Numeric * '*' is entered when [123] is selected in the character type selection._ ’ ! ? (space) 0 Numeric 0 Alphabetic/Symbol Switch between upper-/lowercase Numeric * or . .Entering Characters After selecting a character type. Key Entry mode Available characters Alphabetic/Symbol . Appendix-9 . Entering Alphabets and Numerals Referring to the table below.

Appendix-10 .Characters associated with different keys can be entered consecutively. the character entry method may vary depending on the settings. (Refer to Login Operation on page 8-58. uvwxyzABCDEFGHIJKLMNO [ Next ] NOTE: Numerals can be entered directly by pressing numeric keys. spaces are automatically entered in between. and then press the OK key to *abcdefghijklmnopqrst enter it.) If a character palette appears on the screen. If you use cursor keys to move the cursor to an entry position apart from the end of the line and enter a character there. Entering Symbols Press [Text] (the Right Select key) or # on the Symbols: a b numeric keys to display the Symbols screen. [ Text ] Entry When [Select Character] Is Selected in Login Operation Settings In the login screen that appears when user management is enabled. use Login User Name: a b cursor keys to select the desired character from the Kyocer* displayed characters. Use cursor keys to select the symbol you want to enter and then press the OK key. To enter a character associated with the same key after another. use cursor keys to move the cursor to the next entry position before entering it.

Preprinted. Folio. A5. Envelope #10. Folio. Executive. Envelope #9. A5. Executive. Executive. Coated. Letterhead. Color (Colour). Custom 1 to 8 Other sizes: Portrait-2.76 to 8. Envelope DL. Envelope #6. Loading height: 40mm Youkei 2. Envelope Monarch. Letter. B5. of sheets Plain (60g/m2 to 163g/m2) A4. Letter. Statement. 500 (80g/m2) Recycled (60g/m2 to 220g/m2) Oficio II. B5. Envelope C5. of sheets Plain. Folio. Vellum. 50 (80g/m2) Recycled. A6. Legal. Cassette Supported types Supported paper sizes No. B6 Envelope C5. Oficio II. Labels. Custom Optional paper feeder (Multi Purpose) Supported types Supported paper sizes No. Rough. A5. B5.Paper This section explains the paper sizes and types that can be used in the paper source. ISO Color (Colour) (60g/m2 to 163g/m2) B5. A4. 16k Color (Colour) (60g/m2 to 220g/m2) Envelopes ISO B5. Letter. 500 (80g/m2) Recycled (60g/m2 to 163g/m2) Statement. Statement. Oficio 250 (80g/m2) Recycled (60g/m2 to 163g/m2) II. Statement. Youkei 4 Multi Purpose tray (MP tray) Supported types Supported paper sizes No. Legal. Folio. 16K. 16K. B6. A5. of sheets Plain (60g/m2 to 163g/m2) A4. of sheets Plain (60g/m2 to 220g/m2) Letter. Bond. A6. High Quality. A4.83 to 14. Oficio II. Executive. Legal. 16k Prepunched. Envelope C5.02" or 148 to 356 mm Appendix-11 . B5. Custom Optional paper feeder Supported types Sup